Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 PREFACE
CHAPTER 2 SETUP
CHAPTER 3 INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 4 PHILOSOPHY
CHAPTER 5 OPERATION
5.1 FILENAME
5.2 DEVICES
5.3 OPTIONS
CHAPTER 6 DEVICES
6.1 LIST_OF_DEVICES
CHAPTER 7 INPUT
CHAPTER 8 OUTPUT
CHAPTER 9 SET_UP
CHAPTER 10 DATA
10.1 EXPRESSIONS
10.1.1 Constants
10.1.2 Functions
10.1.3 Operators
10.1.4 Filenames
10.1.5 Examples
10.2 ORDER
10.3 NUMBERS
10.4 POINTS
10.5 SYMBOLS
10.6 TIME-ANGLES-DATES
10.7 TYPES
10.8 ON|OFF
10.9 EXAMPLES
CHAPTER 11 COORDINATE_FRAME
CHAPTER 12 FONTS
12.1 LIST_OF_FONTS
12.2 ROMAN
12.3 GREEK
12.4 CYRILLIC
12.5 PUNCTUATION
12.6 MATH_SYMBOLS
12.7 THEORETIC
12.8 ARROWS
12.9 PHYSICS
12.10 ASTRONOMICAL
12.14 SUBSCRIPT
12.15 CHARACTER_SIZE
12.16 POSITION
12.17 EXAMPLES
12.18 SETTING_FONTS
CHAPTER 13 3-DIMENSIONAL_PLOTS
13.1 AXES_EXAMPLE
CHAPTER 14 HISTOGRAMS
CHAPTER 15 COMMANDS
15.1 FORMAT_OF_COMMANDS
15.2 QUESTION_MARK
15.3 LIST_OF_COMMANDS
15.4 OPTIONS
15.4.1 APPEND
15.4.2 CYCLE
15.4.3 EXPAND
15.4.4 FILL
15.4.5 HIDE
15.4.6 LOG
15.4.7 NAME
15.4.8 POINTS|COLUMNS
15.4.9 SELECT
15.4.10 SETS
15.4.11 SOLID...
15.4.12 SLICES
15.5 TITLE
15.6 WHITE...
15.7 ADD
15.8 SUBTRACT
15.8.1 APPEND
15.8.2 AVERAGE
15.8.3 CHECK
15.8.4 ERROR
15.8.5 FIT
15.8.6 LIMITED
15.8.7 LOG
15.8.8 VECTOR
15.8.9 WEIGHT-EWEIGHT
15.8.10 X|Y
15.8.11 Notes
15.8.12 Example
15.9 ARROW
15.9.1 Options
15.9.2 Example
15.10 BARGRAPH
15.11 BIN
15.11.1 Introduction
15.11.2 Options
15.11.3 AVERAGE
15.11.4 APPEND
15.11.5 ERRORS
15.11.6 FROM...
15.11.7 LIMITED
15.11.8 MESH
15.11.9 MONITOR
15.11.10 NORMAL
15.11.11 X...
15.11.12 VALUES
15.11.13 Histograms
15.11.14 Example
15.12 BOX
15.12.1 AT
15.12.2 FROM-TO
15.12.3 FILL
15.12.4 CURSOR
15.12.5 DATA
15.12.6 DSIZE
15.12.7 ROTATE
15.12.8 SIZE
15.12.9 SQUARE
15.12.10 SOLID...
15.12.11 INTENSITY
15.12.12 WHITE...
15.12.13 Example
15.13 CASE
15.14 CIRCLE
15.15 CONTOUR
15.15.1 N1...
15.15.2 COLOR
15.15.3 CYCLE
15.15.4 EXPAND
15.15.5 FROM|TO|BY|N
15.15.6 INTENSITY
15.15.7 LABEL
15.15.8 OUTSIDE
15.15.9 INSIDE
15.15.10 DOUBLE
15.15.11 PARALLEL
15.15.12 PERPENDICULAR
15.15.13 PRIMARY|SECONDARY
15.15.14 SAVE
15.15.15 SIZE
15.15.16 SOLID...
15.15.17 Example
15.16 CONVOLUTE
15.16.1 Options
15.16.2 Errors
15.17 CREATE
15.18 DATA
15.18.1 Example
15.19 DELETE
15.19.1 DATA
15.19.2 HISTOGRAMS
15.20 DEFINE
15.20.1 COMMAND
15.20.2 HISTOGRAMS
15.20.3 KEY
15.20.4 STRING
15.20.5 VALUE
15.21 DIAMOND
15.21.1 AT
15.21.2 FROM-TO
15.21.3 FILL
15.21.4 CURSOR
15.21.5 DATA
15.21.6 DSIZE
15.21.7 ROTATE
15.21.8 SIZE
15.21.9 SOLID...
15.21.10 INTENSITY
15.21.11 WHITE...
15.22 DIVIDE
15.22.1 APPEND
15.22.2 CHECK
15.22.3 EFFICIENCY
15.22.4 ERROR
15.22.5 FIT
15.22.6 LIMITED
15.22.7 LOG
15.22.8 WEIGHT-EWEIGHT
15.22.9 Notes
15.23 DU
15.24 DV
15.25 DW
15.26 DX
15.27 DY
15.28 DZ
15.29 ELLIPSE
15.29.1 AT
15.29.2 FROM-TO
15.29.3 FILL
15.29.4 CURSOR
15.29.5 DSIZE
15.29.6 ROTATE
15.29.7 SIZE
15.29.8 SQUARE
15.29.9 DATA
15.29.10 ANGLE
15.29.11 SOLID...
15.29.12 INTENSITY
15.29.13 WHITE...
15.30 ELSE
15.31 ENDFILE
15.32 ENDIF
15.33 ENDREPEAT
15.34 CLEAR
15.35 FFT
15.35.1 Restrictions
15.35.2 Interpretation
15.36 FILL
15.36.1 Options
15.37 FIT
15.37.1 Options
15.37.2 AGAIN
15.37.3 EQUATION
15.37.4 POLYNOMIAL
15.37.5 INVERSE
15.37.6 SINE
15.37.7 COSINE
15.37.8 LEGENDRE
15.37.9 EXPONENTIAL
15.37.10 GAUSSIAN
15.37.11 DGAUSSIAN
15.37.12 DPOLYNOMAIL
15.37.13 USER
15.37.14 COEFFICIENTS|ERRORS
15.37.15 CURVE
15.37.16 EXCLUDE/INCLUDE
15.37.17 LIMITED
15.37.18 NONLINEAR
15.37.19 LOG/FULL
15.37.20 OFFSET
15.37.21 MESH
15.37.22 NAME
15.37.23 MONITOR
15.37.24 POINTS
15.37.25 SCALE
15.37.26 SETS
15.37.27 ORDER/TERMS
15.37.28 Y|Z
15.37.29 Warning
15.37.30 Yerrors
15.37.31 Examples
15.38 FLUSH
15.39 FREQUENCY
15.40 HISTOGRAM
15.40.1 CYCLE
15.40.2 DEPTH
15.40.3 EXPAND
15.40.4 FILL
15.40.5 FRAME
15.40.6 GRID
15.40.7 HIDE
15.40.8 POINTS|COLUMNS
15.40.9 SETS
15.40.10 SOLID
15.40.11 X|Y|Z|BLOCK
15.40.12 XY
15.40.13 CROSS|RANDOM
15.40.14 DX
15.40.15 SLICES
15.40.16 3-d_histograms
15.40.17 Variables
15.40.18 Limits
15.40.19 Shading_example
15.41 HELP
15.42 IF
15.43 INTERPOLATE
15.43.1 Options
15.43.2 Notes
15.44 JOIN
15.44.1 Level
15.44.2 CYCLE
15.44.3 ERRORS
15.44.4 EXPAND
15.44.5 FILL
15.44.6 HIDE
15.44.7 SPLINE|GENERAL
15.44.8 TEXT
15.44.9 LINES
15.44.10 POINTS|COLUMNS
15.44.11 SETS
15.44.12 INTENSITY
15.44.13 WHITE...
15.44.14 SOLID...
15.44.15 X|Y|Z
15.44.16 SLICES
15.44.17 3-d_plot
15.45 LIST
15.45.1 DATA
15.45.2 FIT
15.45.3 HISTOGRAMS
15.46 MERGE
15.47 MONITOR
15.47.1 AVAILABLE
15.47.2 EXACT
15.47.3 EXPAND
15.47.4 ENTRIES
15.47.5 FILE
15.47.6 IDENT
15.47.7 INTERVAL
15.47.8 LOG
15.47.9 MESH
15.47.10 NAME
15.47.11 OVERFLOWS
15.47.12 PAUSE
15.47.13 REPEAT
15.47.14 RESCALE
15.47.15 SECTION
15.47.16 SCAN
15.47.17 SKIP
15.47.18 STATISTICS
15.47.19 SHOW
15.47.20 TIME
15.47.21 TREE
15.47.22 WINDOWS
15.48 MORE
15.49 MULTIPLY
15.49.1 APPEND
15.49.2 CHECK
15.49.3 ERROR
15.49.4 FIT
15.49.5 LIMITED
15.49.6 LOG
15.49.7 VECTOR
15.49.8 WEIGHT-EWEIGHT
15.49.9 Notes
15.50 NEW_FRAME
15.50.1 ALIAS
15.50.2 Comment
15.50.3 RESET
15.51 NDU
15.52 NDV
15.53 NDW
15.54 NDX
15.55 NDY
15.56 NDZ
15.57 PAUSE
15.57.1 FOR
15.58 PLOT
15.58.1 Options
15.58.2 AXES|GRID
15.58.3 COUNTS
15.58.4 CYCLE
15.58.5 EXPAND
15.58.6 FILL
15.58.7 INTENSITY
15.58.8 LIMITED
15.58.9 ERRORS
15.58.10 RANDOM
15.58.11 SOLID...
15.58.12 LINES|ROWS
15.58.13 OUTLINE
15.58.14 POINTS|COLUMNS
15.58.15 SETS
15.58.16 SLICES
15.58.17 SYMBOL
15.58.18 SIZE
15.58.19 TABLE
15.58.20 VARIABLE
15.58.21 VECTOR
15.58.22 WHITE...
15.58.23 3-d
15.59 PROJECT
15.59.1 ADD|AVERAGE
15.59.2 APPEND
15.59.3 INTEGRATE
15.59.4 SPLIT
15.59.5 X|Y|Z
15.59.6 LOG
15.59.7 SETS
15.59.8 Examples
15.60 READ
15.60.1 POINTS
15.60.2 MESH
15.61 REPEAT
15.61.1 Examples
15.61.2 Warning
15.62 RESTORE
15.62.1 DATA
15.62.1.1 APPEND
15.62.1.2 CONFIRM
15.62.1.3 SELECT
15.62.1.4 SETS
15.62.2 FIT
15.62.3 HISTOGRAMS
15.62.3.1 Options
15.63 SAVE
15.63.1 FIT
15.63.2 DATA
15.63.3 HISTOGRAMS
15.63.3.1 Options
15.64 SET
15.64.1 Introduction
15.64.2 Options
15.64.3 AREA
15.64.4 ARROW
15.64.5 AXES
15.64.5.1 Options
15.64.5.2 Example
15.64.6 BAR
15.64.6.1 ALL-X-Y-Z
15.64.6.2 SIZE
15.64.6.3 BREAK
15.64.6.4 SUPPRESS
15.64.6.5 PERMANENT
15.64.6.6 Examples
15.64.7 BOX
15.64.8 BLINK
15.64.9 CARD
15.64.10 CHARACTER
15.64.11 CIRCLE
15.64.12 CLEAR
15.64.13 COLOR
15.64.14 COMMAND
15.64.15 Ctrl_Z
15.64.16 CYCLE
15.64.16.1 Options
15.64.16.2 Examples
15.64.16.3 Defaults
15.64.17 DATE
15.64.18 DEVICE
15.64.18.1 Names
15.64.18.2 COLOR
15.64.18.3 LANDSCAPE-PORTRAIT
15.64.18.4 TEST
15.64.18.5 CALCOMP
15.64.18.6 EXCL
15.64.18.7 GKS
15.64.18.8 GRINNELL
15.64.18.9 HPGL
15.64.18.10 IMAGEN
15.64.18.11 POSTSCRIPT
15.64.18.12 PRINTRONIX
15.64.18.13 QMS-1200
15.64.18.14 REGIS
15.64.18.15 SIXELS
15.64.18.16 TEKTRONIX
15.64.18.17 TEK4027
15.64.18.18 VERSATEC
15.64.18.19 Xwindows
15.64.18.20 String
15.64.18.21 ADD
15.64.18.22 FILE
15.64.18.23 WIDTH|HEIGHT
15.64.18.24 IDENT
15.64.18.25 INTERACTIVE
15.64.18.26 NUMBER
15.64.18.27 ORIENTATION
15.64.18.28 REVERSE
15.64.18.29 SIDEWAYS
15.64.18.30 PERMANENT
15.64.18.31 UNIT
15.64.18.32 Example
15.64.19 DIAMOND
15.64.20 DIGITS
15.64.21 ELLIPSE
15.64.22 ERRORS
15.64.23 EXACT
15.64.24 FILE
15.64.24.1 INPUT
15.64.24.2 LIST
15.64.24.3 JOURNAL
15.64.24.4 Filename
15.64.24.5 Example
15.64.25 FILL
15.64.26 FIT
15.64.27 FLUSH
15.64.28 FONT
15.64.29 FORMAT
15.64.30 GRID
15.64.30.1 Options
15.64.30.2 Example
15.64.31 HISTOGRAM
15.64.31.1 Options
15.64.31.2 APPEND
15.64.31.3 AREA|DIRECTORY
15.64.31.4 CHECK
15.64.31.5 CONFIRM
15.64.31.6 ENTRIES
15.64.31.7 ERRORS
15.64.31.8 FILE
15.64.31.9 HISTOGRAM
15.64.31.10 LOG
15.64.31.11 MESH
15.64.31.12 NTUPLES
15.64.31.13 NUMBER
15.64.31.14 OVERFLOWS
15.64.31.15 CURRENT|NEXT|PREVIOUS|FIRST|LAST
15.64.31.16 SECTION
15.64.31.17 SELECT
15.64.31.18 TITLE
15.64.31.19 TREE
15.64.31.20 WILD
15.64.31.21 WRAP
15.64.31.22 Lexicals
15.64.31.23 Restrictions
15.64.31.24 Examples
15.64.32 INPUT
15.64.33 INTENSITY
15.64.34 LABELS
15.64.34.1 ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT
15.64.34.2 X|Y|Z
15.64.34.3 CHARACTERS
15.64.34.4 INSIDE
15.64.34.5 SIZE
15.64.34.6 SHIFT
15.64.34.7 ON|OFF
15.64.34.8 INTENSITY
15.64.34.9 WHITE...
15.64.34.10 PERMANENT
15.64.34.11 Examples
15.64.35 LIMITS
15.64.35.1 SCALE
15.64.35.2 CURSOR
15.64.35.3 PERMANENT
15.64.35.4 Example
15.64.36 MODE
15.64.36.1 AUTOPLOT
15.64.36.2 ABORT
15.64.36.3 APPEND
15.64.36.4 CONFIRM
15.64.36.5 CHECK
15.64.36.6 DATAVECTOR
15.64.36.7 DEBUG
15.64.36.8 ECHO
15.64.36.9 ERASE
15.64.36.10 EXPAND
15.64.36.11 FILECASE
15.64.36.12 HARDTEXTURE
15.64.36.13 JOURNALING
15.64.36.14 LISTING
15.64.36.15 LOG
15.64.36.16 MONITOR
15.64.36.17 PROPORTIONAL
15.64.36.18 QUICK
15.64.36.19 SHOW
15.64.36.20 TITLE
15.64.36.21 TRACE
15.64.36.22 TREE
15.64.36.23 VECTOR
15.64.36.24 VLOG
15.64.37 MONITOR
15.64.38 NAME
15.64.39 ORDER
15.64.39.1 Options
15.64.39.2 Examples
15.64.40 OUTLINE
15.64.40.1 Options
15.64.41 PATTERN
15.64.41.1 Example
15.64.42 PAUSE
15.64.43 PEN
15.64.44 POLAR
15.64.45 PROMPT
15.64.45.1 Examples
15.64.46 REVISION
15.64.47 SECONDARY
15.64.48 SEGMENTS
15.64.49 SCALE
15.64.49.1 X|Y|Z|ALL
15.64.49.2 BASE
15.64.49.3 DAYS
15.64.49.4 LABELS
15.64.49.5 LINEAR
15.64.49.6 LOGARITHMIC
15.64.49.7 MINUTES
15.64.49.8 MONTHS
15.64.49.9 NORMAL
15.64.49.10 POWER|ROOT
15.64.49.11 REVERSE
15.64.49.12 SECONDS
15.64.49.13 TICKS
15.64.49.14 TIME-HOURS
15.64.49.15 USER
15.64.49.16 YEARS
15.64.49.17 PERMANENT
15.64.49.18 Example
15.64.50 SHADOW
15.64.50.1 Options
15.64.50.2 Example
15.64.51 SHIELD
15.64.52 SIZE
15.64.52.1 X,y
15.64.52.2 UNITS
15.64.52.3 CM....
15.64.52.4 MAGNIFY|REDUCE
15.64.52.5 ORIENTATION
15.64.52.6 SIDEWAYS
15.64.52.7 MARGINS
15.64.52.8 LEFT|RIGHT|TOP|BOTTOM
15.64.52.9 Examples
15.64.53 SPHERICAL
15.64.54 STATISTICS
15.64.54.1 LIMITED
15.64.54.2 LINES|ROWS
15.64.54.3 POINTS|COLUMNS
15.64.54.4 SETS
15.64.55 STORAGE
15.64.56 SYMBOL
15.64.56.1 Xx
15.64.56.2 ANGLE
15.64.56.3 SIZE
15.64.56.4 THETA
15.64.57 PERMANENT
15.64.57.1 PHI
15.64.57.2 3-d
15.64.57.3 Example
15.64.58 TEXTURE
15.64.58.1 Example
15.64.59 THREE
15.64.59.1 Options
15.64.59.2 CENTER
15.64.59.3 DIRECTION
15.64.59.4 DISTANCE,SCRD,RDIST
15.64.59.5 REDUCE|MAGNIFY
15.64.59.6 ON|OFF|AUTOMATIC
15.64.59.7 ORIGIN
15.64.59.8 PERMANENT
15.64.59.9 SEPARATION
15.64.59.10 VERTICAL
15.64.59.11 WORLD
15.64.59.12 XAXIS
15.64.59.13 Revisions
15.64.59.14 Examples
15.64.60 TICKS
15.64.60.1 Options
15.64.60.2 Examples
15.64.61 TITLES
15.64.61.1 Options
15.64.61.2 ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT|X|Y
15.64.61.3 INDEX
15.64.61.4 INTENSITY
15.64.61.5 LINES
15.64.61.6 MARGIN
15.64.61.7 PERMANENT
15.64.61.8 SCALE
15.64.61.9 SIZE
15.64.61.10 WHITE...
15.64.61.11 Windows
15.64.61.12 ESCAPE
15.64.61.13 SUBSTITUTE
15.64.61.14 Examples
15.64.62 UNITS
15.64.62.1 CM....
15.64.62.2 REDUCE
15.64.62.3 ALL...
15.64.63 WAIT
15.64.64 WIDTH
15.64.65 WINDOWS
15.64.65.1 ABSOLUTE
15.64.65.2 NUMBERED
15.64.65.3 RELATIVE
15.64.65.4 LEVEL
15.64.65.5 Labels
15.64.65.6 Examples
15.64.65.7 3-d
15.65 SHOW
15.65.1 Options
15.65.2 CURSOR
15.65.3 DATA
15.65.3.1 BRIEF...
15.65.3.2 LIMITED
15.65.3.3 LINES|ROWS
15.65.3.4 OUTPUT
15.65.3.5 POINTS|COLUMNS
15.65.3.6 SETS
15.65.3.7 Statistics
15.65.3.8 Example
15.65.4 ERRORS
15.65.5 FLAGS
15.65.6 HISTOGRAMS
15.65.6.1 Options
15.65.6.2 AREA|DIRECTORY
15.65.6.3 ALL|FULL
15.65.6.4 BRIEF
15.65.6.5 CONTENTS
15.65.6.6 CURRENT
15.65.6.7 ENTRIES
15.65.6.8 EXACT
15.65.6.9 FROM|TO
15.65.6.10 IDENT
15.65.6.11 HISTOGRAM
15.65.6.12 NTUPL
15.65.6.13 NLIMITS
15.65.6.14 NMASKS
15.65.6.15 MESH
15.65.6.16 SELECT
15.65.6.17 SEARCH
15.65.6.18 STATISTICS
15.65.6.19 TREE
15.65.6.20 Example
15.65.7 KEYS
15.65.8 LEXICALS
15.65.9 TIME
15.65.10 Example
15.66 SMOOTH
15.66.1 Options
15.66.2 Algorithm
15.67 SORT
15.68 SPAWN
15.69 STOP
15.70 SWAP
15.71 SYMBOL
15.72 TITLE
15.72.1 Xyz
15.72.2 ANGLE
15.72.3 LJUSTIFY|CENTER|RJUSTIFY
15.72.4 DATA|XDATA|YDATA|TEXT
15.72.5 DIGITS
15.72.6 Lexicals
15.72.7 TIME
15.72.8 TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|GENERAL
15.72.9 X|Y|Z
15.72.10 LINES
15.72.11 SIZE
15.72.12 INDEX
15.72.13 SPACES
15.72.14 INTENSITY
15.72.15 WHITE...
15.72.16 CASE
15.72.17 3-d
15.72.18 Consecutive_titles
15.73 TRANSFORM
15.74 TYPE
15.75 U
15.76 V
15.77 W
15.78 X
15.78.1 APPEND
15.78.2 BINS|VALUES
15.78.3 ERROR
15.78.4 Expression
15.78.5 LINES|ROWS
15.78.6 LOG
15.78.7 NAME
15.78.8 POINTS|COLUMNS
15.78.9 POISSON|SQRT
15.78.10 SAMPLES
15.78.11 SETS
15.78.12 TIMES
15.78.13 PLUS
15.78.14 MINUS
15.78.15 DIVIDE
15.78.16 Warning
15.78.17 Examples
15.78.18 Mesh_examples
15.79 Y
15.80 Z
CHAPTER 16 LEXICAL_VALUES
16.1 LIST_OF_NAMES
16.2 VALUES
16.3 REPEAT
16.4 EXAMPLES
CHAPTER 17 EXAMPLES
CHAPTER 18 SUBROUTINES
18.1 NAMES
18.2 STRINGS
18.3 UNIT_NUMBERS
18.4 LINKING
18.5 DEMO_PROGRAM
18.6 LIST_OF_SUBROUTINES
18.7 CPUTIM
18.8 CPULIM
18.9 HELP
18.10 INTRAC
18.11 SPAWN
18.12 TRACE
18.13 READPR
18.14 DEFKEY
18.15 TDARRO
18.16 TDCRCL
18.17 TDEND
18.18 TDFLSH
18.19 TDGETV
18.20 TDHIST
18.20.1 Example
18.21 TDJOIN
18.21.1 Example
18.22 TDLIMS
18.22.1 Example
18.23 TDNEW
18.24 TDNEWP
18.25 TDPLOT
18.25.1 Example
18.26 TDPLT
18.26.1 Example
18.27 TDSET
18.28 TDSETS
18.28.1 Example
18.29 TDSHOW
18.29.1 Example
18.30 TDTEXT
18.30.1 Example
18.31 TDTITL
18.31.1 Example
18.32 TDTSET
18.33 TD3JIN
18.34 TD3HST
18.35 TDVAX_PLOT
18.36 T2CURS
18.37 T2MAIN
18.38 T2UPCS
18.39 T2SQEZ
18.40 T2_TRAP
CHAPTER 19 LINKING
CHAPTER 20 REVISIONS
20.1 OBSOLETE_COMMANDS
20.2 86
20.3 87
20.4 88
20.5 89
20.6 90
20.7 91
CHAPTER 21 INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 22 AUTHOR
Index
CHAPTER 1 PREFACE
This is a program primarily designed to produce graphs of scientific data.
It also has some calculation ability. You may create, modify, fit,
combine, and smooth data sets. The results may be displayed in a variety
of formats. In the documentation your response is underlined and optional
syntax is enclosed inside square brakets [].
CHAPTER 2 SETUP
To use Topdrawer it may be necessary to set it up. To do this:
$ SETUP TOPDRAWER
If you wish to use the previous old version:
$ SETUP TOPDRAWER.OLD
If you wish to use the version currently being tested:
$ SETUP TOPDRAWER.TEST
CHAPTER 3 INTRODUCTION
TOPDRAWER is fairly easy to use if you confine yourself to simple plots.
First invoke TOPDRAWER by typing:
$ TOPDRAWER
You are then prompted:
TD: You first enter your data as a set of X,Y,DX,DY values. The
DX,DY may be omitted if no error bars are needed. Each data point is
specified on a separate line. For example a line going from 0,0 to 1,1 is
specified as:
TD:0,0
TD:1,1
Then the data may be plotted as a set of points with error bars (if DX,DY
are not zero) by typing the command:
TD:PLOT
If you wish to produce a histogram use the command:
TD:HISTOGRAM
On the other hand if you wish to plot a smooth curve type:
TD:JOIN
For series of straight lines connecting the points:
TD:JOIN 1 (1 segment per interval)
To put a title at the top:
TD:TITLE TOP 'This is my title'
To put a title at the bottom:
TD:TITLE BOTTOM 'This is the X axis'
To put a title on the left:
TD:TITLE LEFT 'This is the Y axis'
If you are done, you then type:
TD:EXIT
Now you liked the plot, but you wish to change a few things. The commands
mistakes you made. You also should rename it:
$ RENAME TD.TDJ MYPLOT.TOP
and invoke TOPDRAWER again. Now instead of typing all the commands in,
just type:
$ SET FILE IN 'MYPLOT'
TOPDRAWER will re-execute the commands in the file. Now you wish to get
the plots out on the Postscript printer. so you type:
TD:SET DEVICE POSTSCR
Then replot the data by typing:
TD:SET FILE IN 'MYPLOT'
Finally type:
TD:EXIT
Now the plot is printed on the Talaris by:
$ PRINT MYPLOT.PS
More plots may be added to the first plot by entering more data, and then
either PLOT, HISTOGRAM, or JOIN. Each command may be modified by extra
commands to make the plot more pleasing. For example if you type:
TD:HISTOGRAM DOTS RED
Then the histogram will be formed with red dotted lines. This is useful
to differentiate it from other previously plotted histograms.
CHAPTER 4 PHILOSOPHY
TOPDRAWER is designed to plot and manipulate data. It assumes that data
consists of X vs Y with errors DX, DY. It may be X,Y vs Z with errors
DX,DY,DZ. You may also specify NDX,NDY or NDZ the negative part of the
error bars separately from DX,DY or DZ. The data may be a histogram in
which case DX would be the bin width, or it may be a set of discrete
points with unrelated errors. You may plot the data accordingly.
There is also an auxiliary set of coordinates, that may be used for data
manipulation, but not plotting. They are U,DU,NDU,V,DV,NDV,W,DW,NDW To
plot the data in these coordinates they must be moved to X,Y,Z
coordinates. This is easily done with the SWAP command.
The basic plotting operations are:
1. PLOT plots the data with optional error bars.
2. JOIN joins the data points with line segments.
3. HISTOGRAM plot the data as a histogram.
4. BAR plots the data as a bar chart (similar to a histogram)
CHAPTER 5 OPERATION
The following command invokes TOPDRAWER:
$ TOPDRAWER [filename [device1 [device2...]]] [/options]
If the filename is omitted you are prompted with
TD:
You then start typing in commands to TOPDRAWER.
If you start TOPDRAWER from a batch stream, the commands follow the
$ TOPDRAWER command.
5.1 FILENAME
TD:SET FILE INPUT filename
If the optional filename is specified after TOPDRAWER, the commands are
read from the specified file and both the journal and list file are not
produced.
5.2 DEVICES
This is a specification of the output device type to use when processing
the input file. The device is specified the same as in the SET DEVICE
command. You may specify up to 7 output devices by separating them by
spaces.
For example if you want to get postscript output in Portrait mode
appropriate for use with TeX
$ TOPDRAWER TD.TOP "POSTSCR,ORIENT=3"
For example you want to get postscript, and view it in an X window
$ TOPDRAWER TD.TOP XWINDOW POSTSCR
5.3 OPTIONS
1. /[NO]COMMAND[=file] - Specifies a file to get commands for
TOPDRAWER setup.
(Default:TDINIT.TOP)
2. /[NO]JOURNAL[=file] - Specifies a file to journal all interactive
commands.
(Default:TD.TDJ)
3. /[NO]LIST[=file] - Specifies a file to list the commands and
error messages.
(Default:TD.LIS)
CHAPTER 6 DEVICES
The device may be specified on the command line. Otherwise TD sets the
output device according to the logical name PLOT_TERM or if it is not
defined PLOT_DEVICE. If neither is defined the device is assumed to be a
Talaris printer.
Normally PLOT_TERM is automatically set when you log in. It is not
defined for a batch job. This means that TD uses your terminal when in
interactive mode, and the Talaris while in a batch stream. The login
procedure defines PLOT_TERM by asking the terminal for its ANSWERBACK
message. This message must be set properly inside the terminal. You need
to know how to SET-UP the ANSWERBACK message.
For more information see:COMMANDS SET DEVICE
6.1 LIST_OF_DEVICES
To set your device use the command:
TD:SET DEVICE options
Options Device
TEKTRONIX Tektronix 4010 terminal
TEKTRONIX "CIT467" CIT-467 Color graphics terminal
TEKTRONIX "RADM3A" ADM-3A with Retrographics
TEKTRONIX "RVT100" VT-100 with retrographics
TEKTRONIX "RVT100A" VT-100 with retrographics (Green screen)
TEKTRONIX "RVT100,YPIXELS=3055"
Falco infinity series (48 lines)
TEKTRONIX "SEL100XL" Selanar HiREZ 100XL
TEKTRONIX "VIS102" Visual 102
TEKTRONIX "TAL1590" Talaris 1590 laser printer
TEKTRONIX "KERMIT" Kermit simulation of TEK-4010 with color
TEKTRONIX "LSI7107" LSI model 7107 color terminal
TEKTRONIX "TEK4207" Tektronix color terminal
TEKTRONIX "TEEMTALK" Tektronix color terminal
TEKTRONIX "VT240" C.ITOH 328
TEKTRONIX "TEK4010,RVT100,NSEGM"
VersaTerm (Macintosh terminal emulation)
TEK4027 Tektronix-4027 color term.
TEKEMUL Tektronix 4010 emulator
REGIS VT-240
REGIS "COLOR=WRGWWWWD" VT-241 color terminal
EXCL Talaris 1590
VERSATEC Versatec printer plotter
SIXELS "LN03" LN-03 Laser printer
SIXELS "LN03HI" LN-03 High resolution
SIXELS "LN03LO" LN-03 Low resolution
SIXELS "LA50" LA-50 or LA-100 with 8.5" paper
SIXELS "LA100" LA-100 14" paper
QMS1200 QMS Lasergrafix 1200 laser printer
IMAGEN Imagen laser printer
POSTSCRIPT Postscript printer
PRINTRONIX Printronix MVP printer/plotter.
XWINDOWS X windows ( Decwindows, MOTIF )
Example
TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "RVT100"
See also:TOPDRAWER command set device
CHAPTER 7 INPUT
Normally TOPDRAWER gets primary input from either a batch file, or your
terminal (SYS$INPUT). You may have secondary input files by using the
command:
TD:SET FILE INPUT filename
If you run TOPDRAWER interactively, but from an indirect command file, the
input will be from the file that invoked TOPDRAWER. If you wish to have
input from the terminal, you may assign TT: to SYS$INPUT temporarily by:
$ ASSIGN /USER TT: SYS$INPUT
$ TOPDRAWER
You should not do this in BATCH, as TT: is the default output for the
graphics. You may get data from output files generated by histogram
packages. For more information on this see:Command SET HISTOGRAM.
Some input may be made via the cross hair cursor. For example SHOW CURSOR
brings up the cursor on your terminal. Move the cursor to the location
you desire, and press any key except "Return" The current location of the
cursor will be typed and entered into the journal file as a comment. Some
other commands that use the cursor are ARROW, BOX, CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, TITLE,
SET WINDOW, and SET LIMITS.
The input string may not be longer than 256 characters. If you need to
omit columns or set up a special format for the commands: SET CARD and
SET FORMAT.
For more information see:TOPDRAWER DATA.
CHAPTER 8 OUTPUT
TD produces the following output:
1. Plot - This may be on your terminal, LPA0:, another terminal, or
a file on disk. The plot data format and file is modified by the
command:
TD:SET DEVICE
Plot output for a device other than your terminal is a file whose
name matches the input file name, and whose type is assigned
according to the device. If there is no input file name, the
output file name is UGDEVICE. You can define logical name
TOPDRAWER_OUTPUT to specify a name of your choice.
File types are:
CAL - Calcomp Microfiche
HPGL - HPGL
IMG - Imagen
PS - Postscript
PTX - Printronix
Q - QMS
REG - Regis, Gigi, etc.
SIX - Sixels
TEK - Tektronix
VEP - Versatek
XCL - Talarix EXCL
2. Listing - This lists all TD commands you used in a session. This
is normally TD.LIS, but the name may be changed by the command:
TD:SET FILE OUTPUT 'newfilename'
If you do not want a list file:
TD:SET MODE LIST OFF
or...
TD:SET FILE OUTPUT NL:
3. Journal - This file contains all commands entered interactively.
It is normally file TD.TDJ, but the name may be changed by the
command:
TD:SET FILE JOURNAL 'newfilename'
You may temporarily turn off journaling by:
TD:SET MODE JOURNAL OFF
4. Errors - A temporary file TOPDRAWER_ERRORS.DAT is used to save
the error messages for the current plot. This file is only
opened for interactive sessions.
5. Data - You may use the LIST command to output data sets suitable
for input to TOPDRAWER. If you do not specify the output file it
goes to the Listing (TD.LIS).
CHAPTER 9 SET_UP
You may specify a setup file to initialize TOPDRAWER. This is done by
specifying the logical name TOPDRAWER_INIT. TOPDRAWER_INIT should point
to a file with TOPDRAWER commands to be executed when TD first starts.
The default file name is TDINIT.TOP. If you have a setup file then then
journal file and listing file are suppressed. You must start them in the
setup file if you want them.
example
$ ASSIGN TDHBOOK TOPDRAWER_INIT
The file TDHBOOK.TOP contains the commands:
TD:SET HIST HBOOK FILE="hbook.dat"
TD:DEFINE KEY PF3 "SET HIST TITLE PREV;NEW;HIST"/TERMINATE
TD:DEFINE KEY PF4 "SET HIST TITLE NEXT;NEW;HIST"/TERMINATE
TD:SET FILE JOURNAL HISTS.TDJ
Now when you start TOPDRAWER your hbook histograms are already available,
and keypad keys are defined to easily access them. Your journal file is
HISTS.TDJ and you have no listing file.
You assign:
$ ASSIGN TOPDRAWER_INIT SYS$LOGIN
The file TDINIT.TOP in your root default login directory is used as the
TOPDRAWER initialization file.
CHAPTER 10 DATA
TOPDRAWER accepts data in a variety of forms.
10.1 EXPRESSIONS
<expressions>
An expression is an arithmetic computation enclosed inside angle brakets
"<>". An expression uses similar syntax to FORTRAN. The syntax is not as
rigid as FORTRAN and some syntactical elements may be omitted. Expression
evaluation is very slow, so you should use them sparingly.
10.1.1 Constants
Certain constants are built into TOPDRAWER. They are:
1. PI - 3.1416...
example
<2*PI> is 6.2831...
10.1.2 Functions
Functions are expressed as:
function<expression>
The parenthesis around the argument of the function may be omitted if the
argument is a number. All functions may be abbreviated. The available
functions are:
1. [ARC]SINE - [inverse] Sine of angle in degrees
2. [A]COSINE - [inverse] Cosine of angle in degrees
3. [A]TANGENT - [inverse] Tangent of angle in degrees
4. RADIANS - Converts degrees to radians
5. DEGREES - Converts radians to degrees
6. GAMMA - GAMMA function (GAMMA(n)=(n-1)!) (Cern Library)
7. LOGARITHM - Log to the base 10
8. EXPONENTIAL - Power of e (inverse LN)
9. LN - Logarithm to the base e
10. SQRT - Square root
11. RANDOM - Random number. RAN(0) produces a random number. RAN(n)
sets the seed to n and starts a new random number sequence.
12. ABSOLUTE - Absolute value
13. INTEGER - Integer part of a number
14. FRACTION - Fractional part of a number
15. NINTEGER - Nearest integer to a number
16. ERF - Error function (Cern Library)
17. ERFC - Error function (Cern Library)
18. FREQ - Frequency function (Cern Library)
10.1.3 Operators
1. + - Add
2. - - Subtract
3. * - Multiply
4. / - Divide
5. ** - Power
These follow the same rules of precedence as in FORTRAN. For example:
1. 2*3/4 is the same as (2*3)/4 or 1.5
2. 2*3+4*5 is the same as (2*3)+(4*5) or 26
3. 2**2**3 is the same as 2**(2**3) or 256
4. 2**2*3 is the same as (2**2)*3 or 12
5. -2**2 is the same as -(2**2) or -4
Missing operators in the middle of an expression are assumed to be
multiply "*". <2(3)> is the same as <2*(3)>.
10.1.4 Filenames
TOPDRAWER will accept either VMS or UNIX style file specifications.
Example
VMS UNIX
[dir.subdir]file /dir/subdir/file
[.subdir]file subdir/file
[-.subdir]file ../subdir/file
10.1.5 Examples
<LOG(V_SUM)>
the logarithm of the SUM.
<SINE(V_SUM)>
or...
<SIN(V_SUM)>
the sine of the SUM.
<ARCSIN(V_SUM)>
or...
<ASIN(V_SUM)>
the arcsine of the SUM.
<4 SINE 30)
is the number 2.
<4(2+3)>
is the number 24.
10.2 ORDER
Data by default is entered in the following order.
X Y DX DY SYMBOL
Where:
DX is the error or 1/2 bin width for X+-DX.
DY is the error on Y+-DY.
SYMBOL is the symbol to plot.
You may change the actual order that data is entered with the SET ORDER
command.
10.3 NUMBERS
Data may be expressed in any legal FORTRAN format. For example
1 = 1.0 = +1.0E0
10.4 POINTS
Data is entered in a series of lines one point to a line. Each number may
be separated by spaces, tabs, or commas",". Numbers may also be run
together without separators, provided they begin with either plus "+" or
minus "-". If you wish to enter several data points on a single line then
they may be separated by semicolons ";". Instead of a number you may also
use expressions by enclosing it inside angle brakets "<>".
If you omit data the last value is used. See: Command READ POINTS.
10.5 SYMBOLS
Symbols are 0O to 9O or any legal UGSYS duplex character set pair. "NONE"
indicates no symbol. " " or "DOT" produces a dot. If the symbol is
omitted it is assumed to be NONE and the datum is plotted by default as a
point rather than a symbol. This may be modified by SET SYMBOL. If you
wish to use the number 1 as a symbol it must be enclosed in quotes or
apostrophes ("1").
10.6 TIME-ANGLES-DATES
Time may be entered in hours in the format hh:mm:ss.nnn. You may also
enter angles as dd:mm:ss.nn in degrees, minutes, seconds. Time or angle
data must begin with a number. 0::1.5 is legal for 1.5 seconds after
midnight, while ::1.5 is not legal.
Dates may be entered in hours as YYYY\MM\DD. If omitted MM or DD are
assumed to be 1. If you wish to enter both date and time the format is
YYYY\MM\DD\HH:mm:ss.ss. See:Command SET DATE.
If time is preceded by a sign, then all 3 HOURS,MINUTES, and SECONDS are
considered negative. If a date or date\time is preceded by a sign it
applies only to the YYYY (Year). Signs (+ -) may not be imbedding inside
a date\time.
Examples
10 (10 am)
10:00 (10 am)
15:30:25.2 (25.2 seconds past 3:30 pm)
0.5 (Half past midnight)
0:30 (Half past midnight)
24:30 (Half past midnight)
1987\12\25\12:30 (12:30 on Dec 25, 1987)
-1:30:00 (10:30)
10.7 TYPES
Data may either be X,Y,Z points or mesh data. A point consists of an
X,Y,[Z] value with optional errors DX,DY,[DZ],[NDX], [NDY],[NDZ] Z and DZ
are optional and may not necessarily be present. MESH data is a data set
consisting of Z values as a function of X and Y. A mesh is essentially a
square grid of data with X,Y vs Z. A mesh may also have optional DX, DY,
and DZ values attached to it.
Data may be subdivided into data sets. Each data set is numbered
consecutively starting with 1. Within each data set the points are
numbered from 1 to n. To create a new data set use the DATA SET command.
Some commands such as FIT allow automatic creation of a new data set if
the option APPEND is used.
When plotting you may specify which data set you wish to plot with the
option SET=n. For example PLOT SET=1 plots the first data set. You may
also use FIRST,LAST,NEXT,PREVIOUS, or CURRENT to specify a data set.
FIRST is always set number 1 while LAST is the number of data sets.
CURRENT is the last set specified. NEXT is the current data set +1, while
PREVIOUS is the current set -1.
For example you may plot 2 sets by:
TD:PLOT SET=FIRST
TD:PLOT SET=NEXT
You may also specify a range of sets.
TD:PLOT SET=2 TO LAST
plots all data sets except for number 1.
Warning
When plotting multiple data sets, the format of the plot is taken from the
first data set. If the first set is a mesh, the plot will be 3-D.
10.8 ON|OFF
A number of options use ON or OFF to modify them. For example:
TD:SET MODE VECTOR=OFF
Uses hardware characters whenever possible. Instead of ON, OFF you may
also use T,F or TRUE,FALSE or YES,NO.
10.9 EXAMPLES
The following will enter a series of data points in the order
x,dx,y,dy,symbol.
TD:SET ORDER X DX Y DY SYMBOL
TD:+1+.5+10+.5'0o'
TD:2 .5 25 .5 1o
TD:3 .25 10 .01 2o
TD:4 .1 5 1e-1 3o
CHAPTER 11 COORDINATE_FRAME
There are 2 different sets of frames used in creating plots. They are
DATA and TEXT frames. TEXT is always specified in inches Unless modified
by either a SET SIZE or SET UNITS command. The character and symbol sizes
and are all specified in tenths of inches. Both of these may be changed
by the SET UNITS command. The actual data is in the DATA frame, which is
mapped to the physical (TEXT) frame at the time of plotting. The plots
are all scaled automatically, unless you use the command SET LIMITS to
specify the scale. All commands which plot "things" work in either the
DATA or the TEXT frame. You may select the frame with the option DATA or
TEXT. In addition if 3d coordinates are used the frame is automatically
DATA.
The DATA frame is not mapped to the TEXT frame until a plotting
command or a command which uses the data frame is used. Plotting commands
are JOIN, HISTOGRAM, PLOT and so on. Commands which use the data frame
are ARROW DATA, BOX DATA, TITLE DATA and so on. If you wish to have
TOPDRAWER automatically set the data frame, you should supply the data
before any commands which reference the data frame.
Several commands modify the data frame, once it has been defined:
SET WINDOW
SET LIMITS
SET THREE
SET SIZE
SET SCALE
These commands allow you to overlay different plots with different scales.
Just reading in new data does not change the current data frame.
CHAPTER 12 FONTS
There are several fonts available in the unified graphics. They are:
EXTENDED and DUPLEX.
The EXTENDED and DUPLEX support many sets of characters. The DUPLEX set
is slow compared to the extended set, but it looks almost like printed
characters if you use a high resolution device. The alternate character
sets are determined by a character pair. The first character determines
the actual character printer, the second one determines the case.
12.1 LIST_OF_FONTS
Case Character set
1. blank Roman (default)
2. L Roman lower case
3. F+G Greek
4. B+C Cyrillic
5. P Punctuation
6. S Typographicl symbols
7. M Math symbols
8. T Theoretic symbols
9. W Arrows
10. K Physics symbols
11. A Astronomical symbols
12. O Markers (Centered symbols)
13. D Drawing symbols (underscore,overscore)
14. U+V Movement control
15. X Subscript/Superscript
16. Y Character size
17. Z Position save/restore
12.2 ROMAN
Case character:
blank = upper case, L= Lower case
This is the normal ASCII character set. It is not necessary to use L to
shift to lowercase if your computer accepts lowercase characters.
12.3 GREEK
Case character:
F = upper case, G= Lower case
A Alpha B Beta G Gamma D Delta
E Epsilon Z Zeta H Eta Q Theta
I Iota K Kappa L Lambda M Mu
N Nu X Xi O Omicron P Pi
R Rho S Sigma T Tau U Upsilon
F Phi C Chi Y Psi W Omega
12.4 CYRILLIC
Case character:
B=Upper case, C=Lower case
A Ah B Beh V Veh G Geh
D Deh E Yeh X Zheh Z Zeh
I Ee 1 Ee S Kratkoy
K Kah L El M Em N En
O Oh P Peh R Err S Ess
T Teh U Ooh F Ef H Kha
C Tseh 2 Cheh 3 Shah 4 Shchan
Q Tvyordy Znak
Y Yery 5 Myakhki Znak
6 Eh Oborotnoye
W Yoo J Yah
12.5 PUNCTUATION
Case character:
P=Punctuation
1. . Colon
2. , semi-colon
3. E Exclamation mark
4. U question mark
5. I Interrobang
6. A Apostrophe
7. Q Quotation marks
8. P New paragraph
9. D Dagger
10. F Double dagger
12.6 MATH_SYMBOLS
Case character:
M = Mathematical symbols
1. . Dot product
2. X Cross product
3. / Division sign
4. P Group plus
5. M Group multiply
6. + Plus or minus
7. - Minus or plus
8. L Less than
9. G Greater than
10. M Less than or equal
11. H Greater than or equal
12. N Not equal
13. = Identically equal
14. A Approximately equal
15. C Congruent to
16. S Similar to
17. R Proportional to
18. T Perpendicular to
19. 2 Square root
20. D Degrees
21. I Integral sign
22. J Line integral
23. Y Partial derivative
24. Z Del.
25. ( Left floor braket
26. ) Right floor braket
27. B Left ceiling braket
28. E Right ceiling braket
29. 0 Infinity
12.7 THEORETIC
Case character:
T = Theoretic special symbols
1. E Existential quantifier
2. A Universal quantifier
3. M Membership symbol
4. N Membership negation
5. I Intersection
6. U Union
7. L Contained in
8. G Contains
9. K Contained in or equals
10. F Contains or equals
12.8 ARROWS
Case character:
W = arrows
1. U Up
2. D Down
3. L Left (<--)
4. R Right (-->)
5. B Left/right (<-->)
12.9 PHYSICS
Case character:
K = Physics symbols
1. H H-bar
2. L Lambda bar
12.10 ASTRONOMICAL
Case character:
A=Astronomical symbols
1. H Sun
2. M Mercury
3. V Venus
4. E Earth
5. W Mars
6. J Jupiter
7. S Saturn
8. U Uranus
9. N Neptune
10. P Pluto
11. O Moon
12. C Comet
13. * Star
14. X Ascending mode
15. Y Descending mode
16. K Conjunction
17. Q Quadrature
18. T Opposition
19. 0 Aries
20. 1 Taurus
21. 2 Gemini
22. 3 Cancer
23. 4 Leo
24. 5 Virgo
25. 6 Libra
26. 7 Scorpius
27. 8 Sagittarius
28. 9 Capricornus
29. A Aquarius
30. B Pisces
12.11 MARKERS
Case character:
O= Plotting symbols
0 Vertical cross
1 Diagonal cross
2 Diamond
3 Square
4 Fancy diamond
5 Fancy square
6 Fancy vertical cross
7 Fancy diagonal cross
8 Star burst
9 Octagon
12.12 DRAWING
Case character:
D= Drawing characters
U Underscore
O Overscore
12.13 MOVEMENT
This moves the current position by the specified amount. This is useful
for overstriking 2 characters to create a new character.
Case character:
U=Horizontal movement
0 1 space back
1 Half space
2 Half space back
3 Third space
4 Third space back
5 Sixth space
6 Sixth space back
V=Vertical movement
1 Half up
2 Half down
3 Third up
4 Third down
5 Sixth up
6 Sixth down
12.14 SUBSCRIPT
Case character:
X=Subscript control
0 Enter subscript
1 Leave subscript
2 Enter superscript
3 Leave superscript
12.15 CHARACTER_SIZE
Case character:
Y= Character size control
0 Increase by One-half
1 Decrease by One-half
12.16 POSITION
Case character:
Z=Position control
0 Save current state in area 1
1 Restore state in area 1
2 Save current state in area 2
3 Restore state in area 2
4 Save current state in area 3
5 Restore state in area 3
6 Save current state in area 4
7 Restore state in area 4
12.17 EXAMPLES
To draw the letter A with a bar over it. You first draw an "A" then move
back 1 space, then draw an Overscore.
TITLE "A0O" CASE " UD"
To draw a lowercase greek Lambda with a "hat or circumflex" over it.
TITLE "L012" CASE "GUV V"
12.18 SETTING_FONTS
The fonts are selected in 2 different ways for plot symbols and titles.
For plot symbols you use a 2 character identifier for the symbol. For
example 0O selects the cross as a plot symbol. See commands:
1. SET SYMBOL
2. PLOT
3. SET ORDER
For titles the special symbols are selected with the CASE command. The
case command specifies a string with a font selection character for each
character in the title. For example you wish to write in Greek
Alpha,Beta,Gamma followed by ABC.
TD:TITLE "ABGABC"
TD:CASE "GGG "
CHAPTER 13 3-DIMENSIONAL_PLOTS
TOPDRAWER will do a variety of 3-d plots. You can plot a series of
separate graphs superimposed on a third axis, or you can enter an array of
data to be plotted with hidden line removal. The array of data is entered
by the READ MESH command. The mesh is then plotted by the HISTOGRAM ,JOIN
or PLOT commands.
1. HISTOGRAM BLOCK produces a block or "Lego" plot of mesh data.
2. JOIN produces a mesh surface.
3. SET THREE OFF;PLOT produces a scatter plot of mesh data.
4. CONTOUR produces a contour plot.
Axes are not automatically added to 3-d graphs so you must use the
command PLOT AXES. You may turn each axis on separately using the SET
AXIS command and then PLOT AXES X,Y,Z to place each axis in a convenient
location.
The command SET THREE is used to specify the "viewpoint" of a 3-d
plot. SET SCALE is also used to specify the range and type of scale to
use along each of the X,Y,Z axes.
3-d plots may also be built from a series of 2-d plots. To do this
you must provide z values and:
TD:SET THREE ON
Then either JOIN, HISTOGRAM or PLOT is used to plot the data. Normally Z
is the dependent variable, and X,Y are the independent variables. If this
rule is violated, 3-d histograms will not be correctly plotted. Your data
may be moved with the SWAP command if you need to get it into the correct
variables.
13.1 AXES_EXAMPLE
Assume you are plotting a mesh. The axes will normally appear behind the
plot which may be hard to read. You can move the axes to the front for
X,Y and to the left or right for Z with the following commands.
TD:SET AXES ALL ON FRONT
TD:PLOT AXES HIDE
TD:TITLE X CENTER "X title"
TD:TITLE Y CENTER "Y title"
TD:TITLE Z CENTER "Z title"
CHAPTER 14 HISTOGRAMS
TOPDRAWER can read files written by other histogram packages, and then
plot them. Support is provided for the HBOOK histogram package. For more
information see:
SET HISTOGRAM
CHAPTER 15 COMMANDS
15.1 FORMAT_OF_COMMANDS
Normally 1 command is placed on a single line. If you wish to put more
than 1 command per line, they must be separated by a semicolon ";"
You may continue a command on the next line by putting a minus sign "-" at
the end of the current line.
TD:SHOW DATA -
_TD:STAT=OFF (continuation example)
Optional syntax in a command is shown enclosed in square brackets "[]".
Required syntax may be enclosed in braces {}. If options are mutually
exclusive they are separated by vertical bars "|" Options within a command
may appear in any order. Parameters must follow the option they modify.
Options in a command may be separated by tabs spaces * , or =. For
example SIZE=5 is the same as SIZE 5 or SIZE=5 or ,SIZE 5.
Commands and options may be abbreviated to the shortest number of unique
characters or a minimum of 2 characters. For example the command BARGRAPH
may be abbreviated to BARGR, BAR or even BA. SET FILE INPUT may be
abbreviated to SE FI IN. All commands may be abbreviated to 3 characters.
The minimum abbreviation for each option is underlined.
Commands are read from left to right. If conflicting options are given
for the same command, the right most option is used. For example SET AXES
ON OFF turns the axes off.
Many commands have synonyms. For example AXES or AXIS, STOP or END, NEW
FRAME or NEW PLOT or just NEW.
Comments may be added to a command by enclosing them in parentheses "()".
If the line begins with a double slash, "//" the rest of the line is a
comment.
15.2 QUESTION_MARK
The question mark may be used after a command to get immediate help on the
options. TOPDRAWER will list the various options and what is expected
after each option. If the option expects more key words, they are not
listed.
15.3 LIST_OF_COMMANDS
3-d plot info. is in parentheses ()
1. ADD - Adds together 2 data sets
2. ARROW - Draws an arrow.
3. BARGRAPH - Produces a bar graph.
4. BIN - This transforms the data to a frequency distribution
(histogram). This may also be used to add data sets together.
5. BOX - Draws a box.
6. CIRCLE - Draws a circle or ELLIPSE.
7. CLEAR - Clears the screen the next plot will use same parameters
(WARNING: usually you want command NEW)
8. CONTOUR - Draws a contour plot of MESH data.
9. CONVOLUTE - Calculates the convolution of 2 data sets.
10. CREATE MESH - Creates mesh data.
11. DATA SET - Starts a new data set.
12. DELETE - Deletes data points.
13. DEFINE COMMAND/KEY - Defines commands or keys on your keypad.
14. DEFINE HISTOGRAM - Defines histograms (HBOOK )
15. DIAMOND - Draws a diamond.
16. DIVIDE - Divides 2 data sets (histograms)
17. NDU/NDV/NDW/NDX/NDY/NDZ - Enters a sequence of NDU,NDY... or NDZ
data values. These are the negative errors on U,... or Z.
18. DU/DV/DW/DX/DY/DZ - Enters a sequence of DX,DY, or DZ data
values. These are the errors on U... or Z.
19. ELLIPSE - Draws a circle or ELLIPSE.
20. ENDREPEAT - Ends a repeat loop.
21. ENDFILE - Ends a file.
22. FFT - Calculates a "fast" fourier transform of a data set.
23. FIT - Fits functions to the data and/or generates a curve.
24. FLUSH - Flush out all remaining data.
25. HISTOGRAM - Draws a histogram or ("Block") plot.
26. HELP - Get help on TOPDRAWER.
27. IF/ELSE/ENDIF - Tests status
28. JOIN - Joins the data points with a line or (Mesh) plot.
29. LIST - List the current data points.
30. LIST HISTOGRAM - List histograms (HBOOK )
31. MERGE - Merges the contents of data sets.
32. MULTIPLY - Multiplies 2 data sets (histograms)
33. NEW FRAME - Starts a completely new plot.
34. NDX/NDY/NDZ - Enters a set of NDX... data values. These are
negative error values.
35. PAUSE - The program pauses.
36. PLOT - Plots data as points or symbols (Scatter plot).
* OUTLINE - Plots an outline around the plot.
* AXES - Plots axes (Ticks and labels).
* TABLE - Plots a table (list of numbers).
37. READ - Reads in data points.
38. REPEAT - Repeats a series of commands.
39. RESTORE - Restores things
A. DATA - Restores data sets from a file.
B. HISTOGRAM - Restores a set of histograms (HBOOK )
C. FIT - Restores a fit.
40. SAVE - Saves things See:RESTORE
41. SHOW - Shows current options as set by the SET command.
42. SMOOTH - The data is smoothed.
43. SORT - Sorts the contents of a data set.
44. SPAWN - Spawns out of TOPDRAWER.
45. SPLINE - Produce a spline fit to the data.
46. STOP - Stops TOPDRAWER.
47. SUBTRACT - Subtracts 2 data sets.
48. SWAP - Swaps data for 2 axes.
49. SYMBOL - Enters symbols for existing data.
50. TITLE - Puts a title on the plot.
51. TRANSFORM - Transform data from one coordinate frame to another
(CARTESIAN,POLAR,SPHERICAL)
52. TYPE - Types a line on your terminal.
53. CASE - Controls the format of the title.
54. MORE - Adds more text under the current title.
55. SET - Sets options for plots (defaults).
56. U/V/W/X/Y/Z - Enters a sequence of U,V,.... or Z values. U,V,W
are auxiliary coordinates while X,Y,Z are the coordinates used in
plotting.
15.4 OPTIONS
There are a number of options that are common to many commands. These
select either the data to use, or the plot attributes. Commands that
modify data have some common output options.
Data selection
POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]
Selects the data points or columns of a mesh by number
LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]
Selects the lines of a mesh
SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]
Selects the data sets by number
SELECT="name"
Selects the data sets by name
LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]] [RECURSOR]
[CURSOR]
Selects the data by specifying a range or value for each point
SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]
Selects the data by specifying a range and selects the axis to view a
mesh.
[TITLE[=ON|OFF]]
Uses the name of the current histogram to put a title on the plot.
Plot limits
EXPAND[=ON|OFF]
Plot attributes
CYCLE[=ON|OFF]
Each data set is plotted with a different intensity, color ...
INTENSITY|WIDTH=n
Selects the line width for the plotted data
WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN
Selects the color for the plotted data
SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE
Selects the texture of the lines for plotted data.
HIDE[=ON|OFF]
Hides the current data if behind a previous hidden set.
FILL[=ON|OFF]
Fills the data with a pattern.
Output selection.
APPEND[=ON|OFF]
The resulting "new" data set is appended to the current sets rather
than replacing it.
NAME="name"
Specifies the name of the "new" data set.
Miscellaneous
LOG[=ON|OFF]
15.4.1 APPEND
For commands that transform data either the specified data sets are
replaced by the new data set, or all data sets are replaced by the new
data. If you wish to retain the old data the option APPEND creates a new
data set with the transformed data.
(Default:OFF)
See:Command SET MODE
15.4.2 CYCLE
When plotting more than 1 slice or data set, CYCLE causes the line
texture, color, and width to vary from one plot to the next. The order of
cycling is set by the SET CYCLE command. If you have specified either
texture, color or width it overrides the cycle value.
(Default:OFF)
15.4.3 EXPAND
Sets the limits so that the selected data expands to fill the window.
This has no effect unless LIMITED, POINTS, SETS, or SLICES are specified.
Normally the limits of the plot are set according to all data. This may
inconvenient when the plotted subset of the data occupies only a small
portion of the window. EXPAND will make the data fill the window.
(Default:OFF)
15.4.4 FILL
Generates a fill pattern. To set the fill pattern see:SET FILL.
(Default:OFF)
See:Command SET MODE
15.4.5 HIDE
Controls whether hidden lines are drawn for a 3-d mesh, or whether one
plot hides the next. You must specify HIDE for both the plot to be hidden
and the plot that is to hide it. The plot which is drawn first will hide
the second one. HIDE=OFF draws the hidden lines, while HIDE=ON omits
them.
(Default:HIDE=ON for mesh, HIDE=OFF for data)
example
Assume you have 2 data sets where you want set 1 to hide elements in set
2. Also you would like to fill data set 2.
TD:JOIN SET=1 HIDE
TD:JOINS SET=2 HIDE FILL
You can produce a drawing of a mesh with hidden lines as dotted lines by
doing the histogram twice:
TD:HISTOGRAM
TD:HISTOGRAM HIDE=OFF DOTTED
15.4.6 LOG
This logs the operation by typing on your terminal a line telling you what
was done.
(Default:OFF)
15.4.7 NAME
The new set will usually have a name consisting of a transformation name
followed by the old set name. If you specify a new name it is applied to
the new data set. If the name ends in "%" then the old name is appended
to the new name. See option:APPEND
15.4.8 POINTS|COLUMNS
This selects the points or the colums of a mesh to plot or modify. If not
selected all points are used. If n2 is omitted it is assumed to be n1.
You may specify the point number or the options FIRST,LAST.
15.4.9 SELECT
SELECT="name"
selects the data sets to plot or modify by name. You may use "wild"
characters. "*" means any characters, while "%" means any single
character. Normally the match is case blind unless you:
TD:SET EXACT
15.4.10 SETS
This selects the data sets to plot or modify. If n2 is omitted it is
assumed to be n1. You may specify the data set number or the options
FIRST,LAST.
15.4.11 SOLID...
This determines the texture of the line. By stringing together several
texture commands you may create very complicated textures. For example
DOT SPACE DOT DASH will produce a dot-dot-dast pattern with a large space
between the dots.
1. SOLID produces a totally solid line. This overrides all previous
specifications.
2. DOT produces a dot
3. DASH produces a short dash
4. DAASH produces a long dash
5. SPACE produces extra space between previous elements
6. FUNNY produces random distances between elements
7. PATTERNED makes the pattern according to the current SET pattern
if it is specified by itself. If specified with other options it
produces the patterns by generating a pattern. The length of the
elements is determined by the size in the SET PATTERN command.
8. Some combinations will produce the patterns by hardware when
available. This makes for quick, but not necessarily nice plots.
The following generally use hardware:
A. DOT
B. DASH
C. DOT DASH
D. DAASH
See:Command SET TEXTURE
15.4.12 SLICES
[SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
or...
[SLICE X|Y|Z=v1] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
This plots or joins points sliced from mesh data. This command is illegal
for normal data. If v2 is omitted then v2=v1. If a range is selected
then all slices within the range are histogrammed. IF you set THREE=OFF
then the slices are histogrammed according to the first X,Y,Z Mentioned.
If X is first then the slices are taken perpendicular to the X axis. You
only need select X|Y|Z the first time you slice after a NEW FRAME command.
15.5 TITLE
This takes the name of the data set you are plotting and uses it to write
a title on the plot. The name is divided into 4 parts separated by
semicolons ";". The 4 parts are placed at the TOP,X,Y,Z locations of the
plot. If the default title color, width are none then the title is
plotted with the same color, width as the the data set.
This can be very helpful when overlaying several data sets, as the titles
correspond to the data set.
15.6 WHITE...
This sets the color of the plot.
See:Command SET COLOR
15.7 ADD
See: SUBTRACT
15.8 SUBTRACT
{ADD|SUBTRACT} [Y|Z] [FROM|TO] [EWEIGHT=n] [WEIGHT=n] {n1|"name1"} [BY]
{n2|"name2"|FIT}
[AVERAGE|EFFICIENCY[=ON|OFF]] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
[CHECK[=ON|OFF]] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] [POINTS|
COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] [VECTOR[=ON|OFF]]
This adds or subtracts the (Y/Z) values in data set n2 (from,to) data set
n1. The result is a modified set n1.
15.8.1 APPEND
If APPEND is specified, then a new data set is created, containing the
result and n1 is unchanged.
15.8.2 AVERAGE
This option will not work for the SUBTRACT command. If AVERAGE is
specified, the data is averaged together according to the Y statistics.
If Y is non zero but DY is 0 then DY is assumed to be 1. If both Y1 and
DY1 are zero then Y3,DY3 = Y2,DY2.
Y3=(Y1/DY1**2+Y2/DY2**2)/(1/DY1**2+1/DY2**2)
DY3=SQRT(2*DY1**2*DY2**2/(DY1**2+DY2**2))
If you wish to average several data sets with statistics, this should give
you the correct result. Zero data with zero statistics indicates the
absence of data. If you wish to average several data sets without
statistics then you should always set the statistics to a "reasonable"
value.
15.8.3 CHECK
CHECK=OFF turns off data set checking. When CHECK=ON both data sets must
have identical X (and Y if mesh) values, but data set n2 may contain more
points than n1. If (DX/DY) is non zero then the both DX and X must be
identical within 1% of DX. If you have data sets with non identical
values of X you may create a set with identical values using the BIN
command. you may also add together data sets with the BIN command. If
the X values of 2 data sets are not quite identical. You may force
TOPDRAWER to add them by setting DX for the data 100 times greater than
the difference in X or by setting CHECK=OFF.
15.8.4 ERROR
ERROR=OFF excludes the errors from the FIT in the computation.
(Default:ERROR=ON)
15.8.5 FIT
Specifies that the last FIT is to be added or subtracted from the data
set. See:Command FIT.
15.8.6 LIMITED
You may specify the limits over which the histograms are to be added. If
you specify the Y or Z limits, then all data that contains values inside
these limits will be added. For example if you
ADD 1 to 2 LIMITED FROM Y=10 to Y=11
But data set 1 contains the followind data:
1,0; 2,10; 3,0; 4,11; 5,0
Points 2 to 4 inclusive will be added, and only points 1 and 5 will be
omitted.
15.8.7 LOG
If LOG is specified then the result of the command is typed on your
terminal.
15.8.8 VECTOR
The DX,DY,DZ's will be added together assuming they are a vector. The
X,Y,Z are not changed, and they should match for both input data sets.
If POLAR or SPHERICAL are ON the coordinates are handled correctly.
15.8.9 WEIGHT-EWEIGHT
WEIGHT=n specifies a weighting factor to multiply the data by before
adding or subtracting it. EWEIGHT=n specifies the error on WEIGHT. This
option must precede the data set number.
15.8.10 X|Y
Selects which coordinate of regular data is to be added. Mesh data always
adds the dependent coordinate which is usually z.
(Default:Y)
15.8.11 Notes
For mesh data the independent coordinate must be Z. For 2-d data the
independent coordinate is always Y. If you add normal data to mesh data
each normal Y value is added to the corresponding mesh Z value. You may
not add mesh data to normal 2-d data.
If EFFICIENCY is not specified then the new value is Y3=Y1(+-)Y2. The
errors (DY) are treated as if the data sets are uncorrelated
DY3=SQRT(DY1**2+DY2**2).
The ADD command with CHECK=OFF allows you to combine X,Y,Z... data
TD:SWAP X Y SET=1 from 1 data set with mismatched data from another
set. For example you wish to plot Y of set 1 vs Y of set 2.
TD:SWAP X Y SET=1
TD:ADD 1,1 APPEND (Produces set 3=set 1)
TD:Y=0 SET=LAST (Set 3 has only X)
TD:ADD 2,3 CHECK=OFF (Set 3 has Y(1),Y(2))
Set 3 now has X=Y(set 1) and Y=Y(set 2)
15.8.12 Example
TD:ADD 1 TO 2
or...
TD:ADD 2 1
or...
TD:ADD TO 2 1
Data set 1 is added to data set 2. Data set 1 is unchanged.
TD:ADD 1 TO 2 APPEND
Data set 1 and 2 are added. The result in put into a new data set. Both
sets 1 and 2 are unchanged.
TD:SUBTRACT 1 FROM 2
Data set 1 is subtracted from data set 2. Data set 1 is unchanged.
See:Command DIVIDE,MULTIPLY
15.9 ARROW
Draws an arrow from 1 point to another.
ARROW [FROM] [x,y[,z]|CURSOR] [DATA] [LESS=n]
TO[x,y[,z]|CURSOR] [DATA] [LESS=n]
[SIZE=n] [FLARE|FLAIR=n]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[FILL[=ON|OFF]] [HIDE[=ON|OFF]]
15.9.1 Options
1. x,y,z - specify the location of the ends of the arrow. If z is
specified the end point is assumed to be specified in data
coordinates. If CURSOR is specified you may enter the end point
with the cross hair cursor. The cursor appears on the screen.
Just move it to the end point and press the space bar. If you
press any other key, the end point is not entered.
2. DATA - specifies X,Y are in data coordinate frame. Normally they
are in the TEXT coordinate frame.
3. LESS - Shortens the arrow by n so it does not touch x,y.
4. SIZE - length of arrow head in tenths of an inch.
5. FLARE - is ratio of the base to the height of the arrow head
(fatness).
6. INTENSITY... - Selects the intensity of the arrow.
7. WHITE... - Selects the color of the arrow
8. SOLID... - Selects the texture of the body of the arrow.
See:Command SET TEXTURE.
9. FILL - Fills in the arrow head
15.9.2 Example
TD:ARROW From 1,1 TO DATA 25,100 LESS 0.1
Draws an arrow from 1,1 in the text frame to data location 25,100. The
arrow is shortened by 0.1 inches so it does not touch the data.
15.10 BARGRAPH
Produces a simple bar graph. Bars are centered on the x values with
heights given by Y. Half widths are determined by DX and DY is not used.
BARGRAPH [EXPAND]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
3-d options
[X] [Y] [Z] [BLOCK|LEGO] [HIDE[=ON|OFF]] [FRAME[=ON|OFF]] [DEPTH[=ON|
OFF]] [XY|YZ|ZX] [CROSS|RANDOM]
If the points are not specified all data points are used. The line
texture is determined by the options specified or by the default.
See:Command HISTOGRAM for more information.
15.11 BIN
BIN|FREQUENCY
[MESH] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] [[X|Y] [FROM=n] [TO=n] [BY|WIDTH|STEP=n]
[BINS|N=n]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [AVERAGE[=ON|OFF]] [VALUES]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[NORMAL[=ON|OFF]]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]] [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]]
This transforms data to a frequency distribution (histogram) with equally
spaced X/Y values.
15.11.1 Introduction
For each X entered, the corresponding Y is added/averaged to a bin in the
histogram. If all selected Y and DYs are zero Y and DY are assumed to be
1.0. When averaging any data with zero DY is ignored. The result is an
evenly spaced series of X values with the corresponding distribution in Y
and the standard deviation of each Y in DY/NDY. The symbol for each bin
is set to the default. You may find that the resulting data is not in the
correct storage locations especially if a 3-d plot is to be produced. You
may change locations with the SWAP command. If the data has a non zero DX
then it may be distributed over more than 1 bin. The DX error
distribution is assumed to be gaussian, and the data is distributed with a
cut off at 4 sigma. If NORMAL=OFF a flat distribution is assumed.
You may not BIN mesh data. If you need to rebin mesh data then it should
be decomposed to a series of data sets using the PROJECT BY n command.
15.11.2 Options
1. MESH - Bins data into a MESH
2. ERRORS - Bins data into a MESH with errors if MESH is selected.
3. X,Y - Select the axes to specify bins.
4. BINS|N - The number of bins in the histogram.
5. VALUES - You are specifying the bin values rather than the bin
edge.
6. FROM - Sets the lowest bin value (low edge)
7. TO - Sets the highest bin value.
8. BY - Sets the bin width.
9. NORMAL - Selects either a normal (Gaussian) distribution or a
flat (histogram) distribution.
10. NAME - Selects the name of the appended data set
11. POINTS - Specifies the range of points within a data set to use.
12. SETS - Specifies the range of data sets to use.
13. APPEND - The new data is appended to the current data as a new
set rather than replacing it.
14. AVERAGE - Produces a weighted average of the data
15. LIMITED - Selects the range of data to bin.
16. LOG - Types the result of the command
17. MONITOR - Plots the result.
15.11.3 AVERAGE
A weighted average is produced of the data. The data is weighted by
1/DY**2 if DY is non zero. Otherwise a weight of 1 is used. The result
is X,Y,DY. If the original DYs are all zero (or 1) then the final DY is
1/SQRT(points). Where points is the number of points averaged to form a
bin.
15.11.4 APPEND
If APPEND=ON the resulting data sets are appended to the current data
sets. If OFF then the current data is replaced by the new binned data.
15.11.5 ERRORS
If this option and MESH are selected, then the mesh will have errors on
its data.
15.11.6 FROM...
[[X|Y] [FROM=n] [TO=n] [BY|WIDTH|STEP=n] [BINS|N=n]]
Specifies the range of the histogram. If FROM,TO and NBINS are specified
BY may not be specified. FROM is the lowes bin edge. TO is the highest
bin edge. BY is the bin width, And N is the number of bins.
If VALUES is specified then the FROM and TO are the center of the first
bin and the center of the last bin.
If these are omitted then the data is scanned and the bins are arranged
according to the current scale values. (See:SET SCALE) If the data to bin
is arranged as a set of matching histograms, the final data set will have
the same x values as the initial. A histogram has equally spaced x values
with identical DX. Data sets match if the initial X and DX values are the
same.
The following are equivalent commands:
TD:BIN FROM 0 TO 10 BY 1
TD:BIN FROM 0 TO 10 N=10
TD:BIN FROM 0 BY 1 N=10
TD:BIN VALUES FROM .5 TO 9.5 BY 1
15.11.7 LIMITED
Specifies which data are to be binned. If limits are not specified, the
default is the current plot limits. See:Command SET LIMITS.
1. X - Specifies X limit
2. Y - Specifies Y limit
3. Z - Specifies the Z limit
4. CURSOR - Brings up the cursor. You move it to the X,Y value you
wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to enter X
or Y to enter Y.
5. RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.
Example
TD:BIN LIMITED FROM X=1 to X=5
Sets limits on the range of X data to bin.
TD:BIN LIMITED FROM 1,5.5 TO 5,50.8
Sets limits on the range of X,Y to bin. This does not set the range of
the final data sets.
15.11.8 MESH
Bins data into a mesh of Z vs X,Y. The Z values are added or averaged
together. If Z does not exist you are given an error message. APPEND is
ignored for a MESH.
example
TD:BIN MESH X FROM 1 to 10 by 1 Y FROM 10 to 100 by 10
15.11.9 MONITOR
If selected it histograms the result.
See: SET MODE MONITOR
15.11.10 NORMAL
NORMAL=ON selects a normal distribution with a cutoff at 4 sigma for the
error DX. NORMAL=OFF selects a flat distribution from -DX to +DX. This
is probably preferable for rebinning another histogram.
(Default:NORMAL=ON)
15.11.11 X...
This specifies which axes to bin. X is always binned. If Y is specified
then both X and Y are binned. After X or Y you should specify the
FROM,TO,BY options if you wish to bin into a specific range, or step size.
If you specify Y without MESH then a set of data sets are produced, each
for a different Y.
15.11.12 VALUES
Normally FROM,TO specify the edges of the minimum, maximum bins. When
VALUES=ON then they specify the center of the bins.
15.11.13 Histograms
You may add together 2 histograms or average together 2 histograms with
different bin widths. You should specify the correct DX and DY for each
data set you wish to add. You probably also wish to use NORMAL=OFF
If you do not specify FROM, TO ... a set of values is assumed. First if
you are binning 2 histograms with equally spaced equivalent values, then
the same X values are assumed. Otherwise the current X tick spacing is
used.
15.11.14 Example
Say you wish to find the frequency distribution of a set of student grades
in 5 point steps. The following will do the job:
TD:SET ORDER X
(Enter grades)
TD:Grade1; Grade2; Grade3.....
TD:Graden;.......
TD:BIN BY 5 (now do the binning)
TD:HISTOGRAM
Suppose you wish to add together 2 HBOOK histograms. Each histogram
contains counts, but the X spacing is different.
TD:SET HIST HBOOK ID=n1
TD:SET HIST ID=n2 APPEND
You now have both hists in memory.
TD:BIN NORMAL=OFF
You now have both histograms added together. If both histograms had the
same X values/bin then the result will have the same X values as the
original.
15.12 BOX
Draws a box centered on the x,y with the sides parallel to the axes.
BOX [AT|FROM|TO]{x,y[,z]|CURSOR} [DATA] [SIZE=dx[,dy]]
[DSIZE=dx[,dy[,dz]]] [ROTATE=n] [SQUARE|SYMMETRIC[=ON|OFF]]
[FILL[=ON|OFF]] [HIDE[=ON|OFF]]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
15.12.1 AT
x,y,z specify the center of the box. If z is specified then they are
assumed to be data units. Instead of x,y,z you may specify CURSOR. If
x,y,z are specified without FROM,TO, then AT is assumed.
15.12.2 FROM-TO
You may also specify the diagonally opposite corners of the box. If z is
specified then they are assumed to be data units. Instead of x,y,z you
may specify CURSOR.
15.12.3 FILL
Fills in the box using the current fill pattern. See:SET FILL
15.12.4 CURSOR
The cross hair cursor is used to specify the limits or center of the box.
First move the cursor to a corner of the box. Press the space bar. Next
move the cursor the diagonally opposite corner and press space again to
draw the box. If you decide not to draw the box, press any other key
other than space or "Return".
15.12.5 DATA
Specifies X,Y are in data coordinate frame. Normally they are in the TEXT
coordinate frame. This option is not necessary if z or DSIZE are
specified.
15.12.6 DSIZE
Specifies the size in data units. If the size is in data units the x,y
are assumed to be data units also.
15.12.7 ROTATE
Specifies a rotation angle in degrees. Rotation is right handed or
counterclockwise.
15.12.8 SIZE
Specifies the size in inches DX is the width of the box. If omitted the
width is the default see:Command SET BOX SIZE. DY is the height of the
box. If omitted DY=DX.
15.12.9 SQUARE
The option SQUARE or SYMMETRIC produces a square box. The SIZE is treated
as a diagonal through the center of a square, and FROM, TO are treated as
the coordinates of 2 opposite sides of a square.
15.12.10 SOLID...
Sets the texture of the line. See:Command SET TEXTURE.
15.12.11 INTENSITY
Sets the intensity (n=1-5)
15.12.12 WHITE...
Sets the color of the line.
15.12.13 Example
TD:BOX AT 6.5,5 size=6.5,5
or...
TD:BOX 6.5,5 size 6.5,5
or...
TD:BOX FROM 3.25,2.5 TO 9.75,7.5
or...
TD:BOX FROM 3.25,2.5 size=6.5,5
Draws a centered box half the size of the screen assuming the default size
of 13x10.
TD:Set limits X -100,100 Y -100,100
TD:BOX 0,0 DATA size 1
Draws a box centered on the data 1 inch square
TD:Set limits X -100,100 Y -100,100
TD:BOX 50,50 Dsize 100,100
Draws a box around the upper right quadrant of the data.
TD:BOX AT CURSOR TO CURSOR
Draws a box centered at the first cursor position with a corner at the
second cursor.
TD:BOX FROM CURSOR SIZE=2
Draws a box with the lower left corner at the cursor position 2 inches
square.
15.13 CASE
See:Command TITLE
15.14 CIRCLE
Draws a circle or ellipse. See:Command ELLIPSE.
15.15 CONTOUR
Draws a contour plot from mesh data.
CONTOUR [n1,n2,n3.....]
Contour selection
[FROM n TO n BY n N n]
[PRIMARY|SECONDARY] [LABEL[=ON|OFF]]
Data selection
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] [SELECT="name"]
Label selection
[INSIDE[=ON|OFF]] [OUTSIDE[=ON|OFF]] [PEPPENDICULAR[=ON|OFF]]
[PARALLEL[=ON|OFF]] [DOUBLE[=ON|OFF]]
Attributes
[EXPAND[=ON|OFF]]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
Misc
[TITLE[=ON|OFF]]
[SAVE[=ON|OFF]] [NAME='name']
15.15.1 N1...
Contour lines are drawn for the specified values n1,n2...
If no values are specified, then lines are drawn according to the tick
locations selected by the SET SCALE command. Primary contour lines are
determined by the long tick locations, and the secondary lines by the
short ticks.
If the scale of the Z axis is set to be logarithmic, then the primary
lines are at powers of 10.
15.15.2 COLOR
Sets the color of primary contour lines.
15.15.3 CYCLE
CYCLE causes the line texture, color, and width attributes to vary from
one set of secondary contour lines to the next. The order of cycling is
set by the SET CYCLE command. The attributes specified by the SET
SECONDARY command override those specified by the SET CYCLE command.
Primary contour lines also vary according to cycles. If you specify any
attributes they are used for the primary contours, and override the the
cycles.
15.15.4 EXPAND
Sets the limits so that the selected data expands to fill the window.
This has no effect unless POINTS, or SETS are specified or the limits on
MESH data have been set by a SET LIMITS command.
See:SET MODE
15.15.5 FROM|TO|BY|N
You may also specify a range of contours with FROM,TO,BY,N. You may
specify any 3. The maximum number of contours you may specify at once is
100.
example
TD:CONTOUR FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2
or...
TD:CONTOUR FROM 1 BY 2 N=5
or..
TD:CONTOUR 1,3,5,7,9
Draws contour lines at 1,3,5,7, and 9.
15.15.6 INTENSITY
Sets the line width or intensity of primary contour lines.
15.15.7 LABEL
If LABEL=ON is specified then any contours after the LABEL option will be
labelled. If no contours are specified LABEL=OFF produces the default
contours without any labels.
15.15.8 OUTSIDE
This turns on labels along the outside boundary of the contour plot for
all contours that terminate at the boundary. (Default)
15.15.9 INSIDE
This turns on labels in the interior of the contour plot for all contours.
(Default)
15.15.10 DOUBLE
This turns on double labels on the outside boundary of the contour plot
for all contours that terminate at the boundary. This labels both ends of
each terminal contour.
(Default:DOUBLE=OFF)
15.15.11 PARALLEL
Produces label which are parallel to inside contour lines. Normally
labels are horizontal parallel to the X axis.
(Default:PARALLEL=OFF)
15.15.12 PERPENDICULAR
Produces label which are perpendicular to inside contour lines. Normally
labels are horizontal parallel to the X axis.
(Default:PERPENDICULAR=OFF)
15.15.13 PRIMARY|SECONDARY
Sets the type of contour line. Primary lines use the default or selected
color, intensity, and texture. The secondary contour lines are determined
by the SET SECONDARY command. The default for secondary lines is DOTTED.
15.15.14 SAVE
This saves the contour as a series of data sets rather than plotting it.
The new data sets have the name 'Contour ...' where ... is the old data
set name. You may select the new data set with the NAME='...' option.
15.15.15 SIZE
SIZE=n determines the size of the contour labels in tenths of inches. If
unspecified the size is determined by the SET LABEL command. The color,
and intensity of the contour labels is also determined by the SET LABEL
command.
15.15.16 SOLID...
Sets the texture of primary contour lines.
15.15.17 Example
TD:CONTOUR
Draws a series of contour lines according to the Z scale.
TD:CONTOUR SECONDARY 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9,PRIMARY,20,LABEL,5,10
or...
TD:CONTOUR SECONDARY FROM 1 TO 9 BY 1 PRIMARY,20,LABEL,5,10
Draws contours for Z=1 to 20. Contour 5 and 10 are labeled. Contours
5,10, and 20 will be SOLID, all others are dotted.
TD:CONTOUR SAVE 10
Saves the contours for Z=10 as separate data sets. No plot is produced.
15.16 CONVOLUTE
CONVOLUTE BY={nset|"name"} [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [CHECK[=ON|
OFF]] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] [INVERT[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
[MONITOR[=ON|OFF]] [NORMALIZE[=ON|OFF]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [SELECT="name"]
Convolutes nset with the specified data sets.
The specified data sets and nset must be histograms with the same spacing
between points. If nset is a mesh, then the data sets must also be mesh
data. You may convolute a mesh by a normal data set.
NOTE: The inverse convolution of 2 mesh data sets may not be correct.
This problem may be fixed in the next version.
15.16.1 Options
1. BY selects the data set to convolute by. You may specify either
the name or the data set number.
2. CHECK=OFF Turns off the error checking. Normally the 2 data sets
must have matching channel widths. And each data set must have
equally spaced x values and y values if a mesh.
(Default:ON)
3. ERROR=OFF Errors are not calculated for the result.
(Default:ON)
4. INVERT=ON Convolutes by the inverted function. This is not an
exact calculation. The resulting data may exhibit ripples, due
to the inversion process. Inversion uses CERN library routine
CFT.
(Default:OFF)
5. NORMALIZE=ON Convolutes the data set with a normalized nset.
(Default:OFF)
6. APPEND=ON Creates a new data set containing the entire result.
The appended set is longer than the original set to contain the
entire result. If you do not select APPEND some data might be
lost.
(Default:OFF)
7. MONITOR Histograms both the original data and the result in 2
windows.
See:SET MONITOR
8. NAME selects the name for the new appended data set.
9. SELECT selects data sets to convolute by name.
10. LOG=ON Logs the operation on your terminal.
(Default:OFF)
15.16.2 Errors
The error is computed using DY during a convolution. The NDY if present
is ignored in the computation, and it is set to DY when done.
No error calculation is done for inverse convolutions.
15.17 CREATE
CREATE MESH
X|Y|Z [FROM n][TOn][BYn][N=n] [ERRORS] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]]
[NAME="name"]
Creates a mesh. You may fill the mesh using the Z= command.
ERRORS creates a mesh with errors. Storage is allocated for DX,DY,DZ.
example
TD:CREATE MESH X FROM 1 TO 10 BY 1 Y FROM 10 TO 100 BY 10
TD:Z="V_XV+V_YV"
creates some mesh data.
15.18 DATA
DATA [SET] [NAME="name"] This starts a new data set. If the data is
broken up into sets, you may specify which data set to plot. Also JOIN
and HISTOGRAM will plot each set independently. The Data sets are
numbered in order 1,2,3... When a data set is deleted the remaining data
sets are renumbered. You may specify data sets either by number or name.
You may intermix MESH and regular data sets.
15.18.1 Example
To add a new data set to the existing data, and enter 5 values into it:
TD:DATA SET name="New set"
-1.5,-1;-1,1;0,2;1,1;-2,-1.5
15.19 DELETE
DELETE [HISTOGRAMS|DATA]
15.19.1 DATA
DELETE [ALL]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
Deletes the specified data points. If all the points in a data set are
deleted, the entire set is deleted. If an entire data set is deleted, all
the following sets are renumbered. You must specify either ALL, POINTS,
SETS or LIMITS. POINTS or SETS may be combined with LIMITS to select only
certain points within a range. For mesh data LIMITED and POINTS are not
legal options.
15.19.1.1 ALL - Deletes all data points
15.19.1.2 CONFIRM - If ON you are asked to confirm whether you wish each
point deleted. If ON or OFF are omitted ON is assumed. You reply:
* Y - Yes delete it.
* N - No, do not delete it (Default).
* Q - Quit and delete no more points.
* A - All delete it and all other specified points, without asking any
more.
15.19.1.3 LIMITED - Specifies deletion of data within specific limts on
X,Y, and Z. If limits are not specified, the default is the current plot
limits. See:Command SET LIMITS.
1. X - Specifies X limit
2. Y - Specifies Y limit
3. Z - Specifies the Z limit
4. CURSOR - Brings up the cursor. You move it to the X,Y value you
wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to enter X
or Y to enter Y.
5. RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.
TD:DELETE LIMITED RECURSOR
is the same as...
TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR
6. VLOG - Draws a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
dotted line around the final limits.
example
TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM 1,1 to 2,5
is the same as
TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=1 TO X=2 Y=5
Deletes all points that with X between 1 and 2 and Y between 2 and 5
inclusive.
TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM Y=1 TO Y=5
Deletes all data points with Y values between 1 and 5 inclusive.
TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR
Deletes all data points within a box defined by the cursor.
TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM X=CURSOR TO X=CURSOR
Deletes all data points within X values defined by the cursor.
15.19.1.4 LOG - LOG=ON Lists all points deleted. Note, that pressing
Ctrl_C will abort the deletions. If you do not specify ON or OFF, ON is
assumed.
15.19.1.5 POINTS - Specifies the range of points to delete. n1,n2= the
data point number or LAST or FIRST.
15.19.1.6 SETS - Specifies the range of data sets to delete. n1,n2= the
data set number or LAST or FIRST.
15.19.2 HISTOGRAMS
DELETE HISTOGRAMA [ALL]
[IDENT=[FROM] nmin [TO] [nmax]]
[EXACT[=ON|OFF]]
[SELECT|NAME='hist_name']
[AREA|DIRECTORY="dir/subdir..."]
[TReE[=ON|OFF]]
[ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]]
[HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]]
[MESH[=ON|OFF]]
[ARRAY[=ON|OFF]]
[NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]]
[CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
Deletes the specified histograms. You must specify either ALL, or a
specific range of IDENTSs. You may select histograms to delete by NAME,
type (ARRAY,HISTOGRAM,MESH,NTUPLES), or whether they have entries. In
addition AREA, TREE allow selection of portions of the directory tree.
See also commands: SHOW HISTOGRAM, SET HISTOGRAM
15.19.2.1 ALL - Deletes all histograms.
15.19.2.2 IDENT - Selects the range of IDs to delete.
15.19.2.3 CONFIRM - If ON you are asked to confirm whether you wish each
point deleted. If ON or OFF are omitted ON is assumed. You reply:
* Y - Yes delete it.
* N - No, do not delete it (Default).
* Q - Quit and delete no more points.
* A - All delete it and all other specified points, without asking any
more.
15.19.2.4 LOG - LOG=ON Lists all points deleted. Note, that pressing
Ctrl_C will abort the deletions. If you do not specify ON or OFF, ON is
assumed.
15.20 DEFINE
This defines various things such as new commands, or the keys for a VT-100
keypad.
15.20.1 COMMAND
DEFINE COMMAND new_command "command string"
This defines a new command as the command string. New commands must be
different from existing commands, and are only used if an existing command
is not found. There is a limit of 3 command substitutions in a row, and
1000 total substitutions per input line. The limit on the number of
substitutions per line may be modified by SET COMMAND.
example
DEFINE COMMAND EDT "SPAWN EDT"
Defines the command EDT so you may edit a file while using TOPDRAWER.
DEFINE COMMAND MAIL "SPAWN MAIL"
Defines the command MAIL so you may use the mail utility while using
TOPDRAWER.
DEFINE COMMAND @ "SET FILE INPUT="
Defines @ to work similarly to @ in VMS. @filename will get commands from
the specified file.
DEFINE COMMAND EDAT "LIST DATA FILE=DAT.TMP;EDT DAT.TMP;DELETE ALL;
SET FILE IN=DAT.TMP"
Defines the command EDAT to allow you to edit the current data.
15.20.1.1 Initialization - You may also define commands before running
TOPDRAWER. You make DCL symbols of the form:
TD_C_new_command :==the_command
When you type in new_command the_command is executed. For example the DCL
definition:
$ TD_C_DIR*ECTORY :=SPAWN DIRECTORY
is the same as the TOPDRAWER command:
TD:DEFINE COMMAND "DIR*ECTORY" "SPAWN DIR"
15.20.1.2 Examples - For example you wish to define some DCL commands
such as DIRECTORY for convenience.
TD:DEFINE COMMAND DIR "SPAWN DIR"
or...
TD:DEFINE COMMAND "DIR*ECTORY" "SPAWN DIR"
These both define the command DIR. The second definition allows any
abbreviation from DIR to DIRECTORY to be used.
TD:DEFINE COMMAND SC "SHOW HIST CURRENT FULL"
Defines the command SC to show you the full status of the current
histogram. (See:Command SET HIST and SHOW HIST)
TD:DEFINE COMMAND SD "SHOW DATA STATISTICS"
Defines a command to show you the statistics of the data set.
TD:DEFINE COMMAND SD1 "SHOW DATA STATISTICS SET=1"
Defines a command to show you the statistics of the data set number 1.
15.20.2 HISTOGRAMS
This creates HBOOK histograms or modifies the histograms.
See:Command SET HISTOGRAM. You may add together histograms or add ntuples
to histograms. The variables in NTUPLES may be added to several
histograms all in one operation.
DEFINE HISTOGRAMS {IDENT[=FROM n][TOn]| APPEND=n| CURRENT| NEXT| PREVIOUS|
FIRST| LAST| ALL} [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
Histogram selection
[AREA|DIRECTORY="name"] [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]]
[HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] [MESH[=ON|OFF]] [ARRAY[=ON|OFF]]
[NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]] [SELECT|NAME="hist name"]
[CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]]
Histogram creation
[[[X|Y][FROM n][TO n][BY n][BINS=n]]|
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]] [CHECK[=ON|OFF]]
[RANGE=n] [PROFILE[=ON|OFF]]
Histogram modification
[BINSZ[=ON|OFF]] [DEFNME='name'] [ERRORS[=ON|OFF]]
[STATISTICS[=ON|OFF]] [ZERO] [SECTION]]
Histogram Filling
[[ADD|SUBTRACT|MULTIPLY|DIVIDE=n1[,n2]] [FACTOR=f1[,f2]]
[CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]]
Print options
[DEFAULT[=ON|OFF]] [PRAUTOMATIC] [PRBIGBI=n]
[PRBLACK] [PRCHANNELS[=ON|OFF]]
[PRCONTENTS[=ON|OFF]] [PRERRORS[=ON|OFF]]
[PRHISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] [PRINTEGRAL[=ON|OFF]]
[PRLOGARITHMIC|PRLINEAR[=ON|OFF]] [PRLOW[=ON|OFF]]
[PRMAXIMUM=n] [PRMINIMUM=n] [PRROTATE[=ON|OFF]]
[PRSTAR] [PRSTATISTICS[=ON|OFF]]
[PRSQUEEZE[=ON|OFF]] [PR1PAGE[=ON|OFF]] [PR2PAGE[=ON|OFF]]
[PRPAGE=n] [TITLE="general_title"]
15.20.2.1 Options -
Histogram selection
1. APPEND=n - Selects the IDENT as 1 more than the last one to last
one+n.
2. CURRENT,NEXT,PREVIOUS,ALL,FIRST,LAST - Selects a histogram.
3. ENTRIES - Selects only histograms with entries
4. HISTOGRAMS - Selects only histograms
5. SELECT - The name of histograms to modify.
6. IDENT - Selects the histograms by number.
7. MESH - Selects only mesh histograms
8. NTUPL - Selects only ntuples
9. SECTION - Selects the Global Section (applies to ZERO only)
Operations
10. ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPY,DIVIDE - Combines 2 histograms into a third.
11. CYCLE - Cycles through hists.
Modifying parameters
12. DISK - Enables histogram storage on DISK, with n records. It is
stored using unit 87.
13. DEFNAME - The new name to assign to histograms.
14. ERRORS - Enable/Disable error computations. This slows down
histogram filling.
15. TITLE - Defines the title as the header to each hist printout.
16. PR... - Modifies the printed output from the LIST HISTOGRAM
command.
17. BINSZ - YES sets bin size to be set to a "resonable value" when a
histogram is defined. This is defined for all histograms.
18. STATISTICS - Enable/Disable "real time" statistics calculations.
19. ZERO - Clears or sets the histogram to zero
Creation
20. X,Y FROM n TO... - Specifies the hist scale.
21. SETS - Specifies the data sets to put into the histograms.
22. RANGE - Selects the maximum range of the histogram (HBOOK)
Miscellaneous
23. LOG - Types the results of the definition
15.20.2.2 APPEND - Selects the histogram ID after the last one for
creating a histogram. If the option n is specified it is the number of
histograms to create.
Example
DEFINE HIST X fROM 1 to 10 by 1 APPEND=5
Creates 5 histograms with net ID's of size 10.
15.20.2.3 ADD... - ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE [IDENT=n1[,n2]]
[FACTOR=f1[,f2] [CYCLE=[ON|OFF]
Takes histograms IDENT=n1 and n2 and combines them into the previously
specified histograms n3=nmin to nmax. The number of channels in n1,n2,
and n3 must all be the same.
n3=n2*f2 operation n1*f1
If n1 or n2 are omitted they are assumed to be n3. If f1 or is omitted it
is assumed to be 1.0. If n2 is specified and n3 does not exist, it is
created. CYCLE increments N1,N2 each time. This combines n1,n2 into nmin
and n1+1,n2+1 into nmin+1 and so on. Only histograms of the same type
with the same number of channels can be added.
If n1 is an NTUPL then it is binned into n3=nmin to nmax using the
parameters specified in previous SET HISTOGRAM commands. The possible
options the may be set are X,DX,...,EVENTS,NLIMIT,NMASK. If the target
histogram does not exist it is automatically created with 100 channels
using the NTUPL name. If CYCLE is selected then the X specification is
incremented.
example
TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM IDENT=25 DIVIDE IDENT=1,2 FACTOR=.25,.75
HIST(25)=HIST(1)*0.25 / HIST(2)*0.75
TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM IDENT=25 ADD IDENT=1,2
HIST(25)=HIST(1)+HIST(2)
TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM IDENT=25 ADD IDENT=1 FACTOR=0.5
HIST(25)=HIST(1)*0.5
TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM IDENT 25 TO 30 ADD IDENT=1 CYCLE
N-tupl value 1 is added to histogram 25
N-tupl value 2 is added to histogram 26
...
N-tupl value 6 is added to histogram 30
15.20.2.4 AREA|DIRECTORY -
TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM AREA=directory/subdir...
For HBOOK4 this creates the specified directory, and sets it. If the
specified area does not begin with "/" it is assumed to be a subdirectory
of the current directory. If it begins with "/" it is assumed to be a
subdirectory of the current root.
example
Assume you have no subdirectories.
TD:DEFINE HIST AREA SUBA
creates directory //PAWC/SUBA
TD:DEFINE HIST AREA Q
then creates directory //PAWC/SUBA/Q
TD:DEFINE HIST AREA /SUBB/X/Y
creates subdirectories:
"//PAWC/SUBB"
"//PAWC/SUBB/X"
"//PAWC/SUBB/X/Y"
15.20.2.5 CHECK - Turns off bin checking for creating histograms
from Topdrawer data sets.
15.20.2.6 CONFIRM - Each histogram that matches the specifications
is logged, then you are asked whether you want to modify it. You reply:
* YES - to modify it.
* NO - do not modify it (Default).
* QUIT - do not modify all the rest
* ALL - Stop asking questions and Modify all the rest.
If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.
(Default:CONFIRM=OFF)
15.20.2.7 IDENT... - You must specify the IDENT of the histogram to
modify or create.
1. IDENT=FROM n TO n - where n is the ID to modify
2. APPEND - The last histogram ID+1 in the current area
3. CURRENT - The current histogram if any
4. NEXT - The current histogram ID +1
5. PREVIOUS - The current histogram ID -1
6. ALL - All histograms
15.20.2.8 LOG - Type on your terminal a log of the definition.
15.20.2.9 SELECT - The name of the histograms you wish to modify.
15.20.2.10 SETS - Creates histograms from TOPDRAWER data sets. It
selects the range of data sets to use in creating some histograms. The
MESH and SELECT options may be used to select the data set. This allows
you to take Topdrawer data and put it into the HBOOK structures. The data
used must be strictly monotonic in x. Mesh data must have equally spaced
bins. If you wish to store Mesh data without equally spaced bins then
specify CHECK=OFF to turn off the bin checking. The PROFILE option is
ignored.
If you specify SETS then you may not specify X or Y ranges or ZERO.
EXAMPLE
DEFINE HIST SETS 5 APPEND PR
Puts data set number 5 into an HBOOK histogram.
DEFINE HIST SETS APPEND
Puts all data sets into HBOOK histograms.
15.20.2.11 DEFNAME - The name you wish to assign to a histogram. HBOOK
histograms may only have a new name when they are zeroed.
15.20.2.12 DEFAULT - Resets all options to their default values.
15.20.2.13 HISTOGRAMS - Selects only histograms (not mesh) to modify.
15.20.2.14 MESH - Selects only MESH histograms to modify.
15.20.2.15 NTUPL - Selects only NTUPLES to modify. NTUPLE=OFF
selects all histograms but NTUPLES.
15.20.2.16 PR... - These options modify the printed output for
LIST HISTOGRAM. They either take a numeric parameter or ON/OFF. If ON or
OFF are omitted ON is assumed.
1. MIN=n - Selects the minimum Y for print plot.
2. MAX=n - Selects the maximum Y for print plot.
3. BIGBI=n - Selects the number of columns per channel for histogram
print.
4. AUTOMATIC
5. BLACK - Fills the area under the hist with "X"
6. STAR - Prints an asterisk for the histogram
7. ERROR - Puts on error bars
8. CONTENTS - Prints the histogram contents
9. INTEGRAL - Prints the integrated contents
10. HISTOGRAM - Prints the histogram shape
11. LINEAR - Prints on a linear scale in Y
12. LOGARITHIC - Prints on a log scale in Y
13. LOW - Prints the lower limits of the bins
14. MAXIMUM=n - Sets the maximum on the contents
15. MINIMUM=n - Sets the minimum on the contents
16. PAGE=n - Sets the number of lines/page (all histograms)
17. ROTATE - Rotates the hist
18. STATISTICS - Includes hist statistics in output
19. SQUEEZE - Squeezes pages together to save paper. (all
histograms)
20. 1PAGE - hist takes only 1 page
21. 2PAGE - Spills hist over 2 pages
22. TABLE - Prints 2-d hists as a table
23. SCATTER - Prints 2-d hists as a scatter plot.
15.20.2.17 RANGE - Specifies the maximum range for a new
histogram. See: HBOOK documentation.
(Default:RANGE=0)
example
TD:DEFINE HIST ID=5 RANGE=500 FROM 10 TO 10 BY 0.1
15.20.2.18 STATISTICS - Turns on or off statistics accumulation. This
applies to HBOOK.
15.20.2.19 X|Y... - If you specify X|Y FROM,TO and BY or N= then a
new histogram is created, or an existing histogram is rescaled. When
rescaled it is recreated, and the existing scales, and title are kept, if
not respecified. If you specify this for both X and Y then a 3-d
histrogram is created. If unspecified FROM/TO=0 and N=100. The option
PROFILE creates a profile histogram using the specified X,Y limits.
examples
TD:DEFINE HIST ID=5 X FROM 10 TO 20 BY 0.5 DEFNAME='test'
TD:DEFINE HIST ID=5 FROM 10 TO 20 BY 0.5 DEFNAME='test'
TD:DEFINE HIST ID=5 FROM 10 TO 20 N=20 DEFNAME='test'
all create a histogram with 20 bins from 10 to 20 in steps 0f 0.5
TD:DEFINE HIST NEXT X FROM 10 to 20 BY .5 Y FROM 1 TO 5 BY 1
DEFNAME='3-d test'
Creates a 3-d histogram of size 5 by 20.
TD:DEFINE HIST NEXT X N=50
Creates a histogram with 50 bins.
TD:DEFINE HIST NEXT X
Creates a histogram with 100 bins.
TD:DEFINE HIST IDENT=2 X FROM 1 TO 100 Y FROM 0 TO 1.5 PROFILE
Creates a profile histogram with 100 bins from 1 to 100 for Y values from
0 to 1.5.
15.20.2.20 ZERO - Sets the contents of the specified histogram to
zero. If SECTION is specified then the histogram in a global section is
zeroed. If DEFNAME is specified then a new name is assigned to the
histogram. Note: To zero a histogram in a global section you must be the
owner of the section, or before running the program that creates the
section you must:
$ SET PROT=G:RWE/DEFAULT
15.20.3 KEY
DEFINE KEY keyname "key definition" options
This defines a key on your keypad so you can abbreviate a command to a
single keystroke. The syntax is similar to the VMS DEFINE/KEY command.
Since the syntax is VMS the key definition must be enclosed in quotes (")
and not in apostrophes ('). For more information See:DEFINE/KEY in the
VAX/VMS DCL Dictionary.
15.20.3.1 Keyname -
The PF2 key is already defined as the HELP key.
The PF1 key is the gold key.
Vt-100 keypad
PF1,PF2,PF3,PF4
PERIOD,COMMA,MINUS,ENTER
KP0,KP1...,KP9
Vt-2xx keys
Upper row keys:
F6,...F20
Named keys:
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
Find Ins. Rem. Sel Prev. Nex.
HELP,DO
NOTE
F1-F5 can not be redefined. F6-F14 are used for keypad editing
and may not be redefined unless Ctrl_V is pressed. See
HELP TERMINALS KEYS.
15.20.3.2 Options - In general the only options you will frequently use
are: /TERMINATE, /NOECHO, and possibly /IF_STATE.
1. /[NO]TERMINATE - When the key is pressed the line is also
terminated.
(Default:/NOTERMINATE)
2. /[NO]ECHO - The command is [not] echoed.
(Default:/ECHO)
3. /[NO]IF_STATE=gold - The definition is for this key prefaced by
gold key (PF1).
(Default:/NOIF_STATE)
4. /[NO]LOCK_STATE - The state is defined till NOLOCK.
(Default:NOLOCK_STATE)
5. /[NO]SET_STATE=name
(Default:/NOSET_STATE)
15.20.3.3 Example - The PF1 and PF2 keys are already defined:
TD:DEFINE KEY PF1 " " /SET_STATE=gold
TD:DEFINE KEY PF2 "HELP "/TERMINATE
examples
TD:DEFINE KEY PF3 "SET HIST PREV; NEW;HIST" /TERMINATE
TD:DEFINE KEY PF4 "SET HIST NEXT; NEW;HIST" /TERMINATE
This sets up 2 keys so that you can step through a list of histograms.
TD:DEFINE KEY MINUS "SET HIST ID="
This sets up key to give the command. When the minus key on the keypad is
pressed the command is entered, and you enter the number followed by the
"RETURN" key.
TD:DEFINE KEY KP7 "HISTOGRAM"/TERMINATE
This sets up the 7 key on the keypad to histogram.
TD:DEFINE KEY COMMA "SET FILE INPUT 'myfile'"/term
This sets up the comma (,) key on the keypad to get commands from the file
MYFILE.TOP.
TD:DEFINE KEY PF4 "SET THREE ON"/term
TD:DEFINE KEY PF4 "SET THREE OFF"/term/ifstate=gold
This sets up PF4 as a key to turn THREE ON or OFF. To turn on three press
PF4. To turn THREE OFF press PF1 PF4.
15.20.4 STRING
You may define strings for "Lexicals"
TD:DEFINE STRING name 'string'
A lexical of the form S_name is give the string
Example
TD:DEFINE STRING NAME 'George Washington
TD:TITLE TOP 'The first president was ' S_NAME
TD:TYPE 'NAME="' S_NAME '"'
You may show all defined strings with the SHOW STRINGS command. An
individual string may be examined by the TYPE command.
TYPE S_name
15.20.4.1 Variable - This defines a local variable of the form
TD_S_name
which contains the string that you have defined. You may define variables
before entering TOPDRAWER so that they are available for use. You do this
by:
$ TD_S_NAME := "String to use"
15.20.5 VALUE
You may define values for "Lexicals"
DEFINE VALUE name=value [LOG=[ON|OFF]] [FAST[=ON|OFF]]
A lexical of the form V_name is give the value n If you specify LOG then
the value is typed on your terminal. When FAST=ON the value is defined as
a local symbol in non readable form. This will speeds up symbol
definitions, but it has little effect on the symbol usage. You should use
FAST when you are repeatedly redefining symbols. Non readable symbols do
not make sense for a SHOW VALUE command. If you need speed, single letter
names are the most efficient.
(Default:FAST=OFF)
Example
TD:DEFINE VALUE NORM=125.5
TD:Y=Y TIMES V_NORM
Multiplies all data by 125.5.
TD:DEFINE VALUE NORM=<100/V_SUM>
TD:Y=Y TIMES V_NORM
Normalizes the data to SUM=100.
You may show all defined values with the SHOW VALUE command. Individual
values may be shown by the SHOW LEXICAL command. See:TOPDRAWER DATA
15.20.5.1 Variable - This defines a local variable of the form
TD_V_name
which contains the value that you have defined. You may define variables
before entering TOPDRAWER so that they are available for use. You do this
by:
$ TD_V_NAME := "number"
example
$ TD_V_A := "25.8E5"
$ TOPDRAWER
$ TITLE TOP 'A=',T_A
15.21 DIAMOND
Draws a diamond.
DIAMOND [AT|FROM|TO]{x,y[,z]|CURSOR} [DATA] [SIZE=dx[,dy]]
[DSIZE=dx[,dy[,dz]]] [ROTATE=n] [FILL[=ON|OFF]] [HIDE[=ON|
OFF]]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
See also:Command BOX
15.21.1 AT
x,y,z specify the center of the diamond. If z is specified then they are
assumed to be data units.
15.21.2 FROM-TO
You may specify the diagonally opposite corners of box enclosing the
diamond.
15.21.3 FILL
Fills in the diamond using the current fill pattern. See:SET FILL
15.21.4 CURSOR
The cross hair cursor is used to specify the limits of the diamond.
Simply move the cross hairs so they define the lower-left limits of the
diamond and press the space bar. Next move the cursor to the upper-right
limits of the diamond an press space again. If you press a key other than
space, the cursor information is not used. Alternately you may specify
the upper-left then lower-right extension, or any other combination that
defines the diamond.
15.21.5 DATA
Specifies X,Y are in data coordinate frame. Normally they are in the TEXT
coordinate frame. This option is not necessary if z or DSIZE are
specified.
15.21.6 DSIZE
DSIZE=dx[,dy] Specifies the size in data units. If the size is in data
units the x,y are assumed to be data units also. DY is the height. If
omitted DY=DX.
15.21.7 ROTATE
Specifies a rotation angle in degrees. Rotation is right handed or
counterclockwise.
15.21.8 SIZE
SIZE=dx[,dy] specifies the size in inches DX is the width. If omitted the
width is the default See:Command SET DIAMOND SIZE. DY is the height. If
omitted DY=DX.
15.21.9 SOLID...
Sets the texture of the line. See:Command SET TEXTURE.
15.21.10 INTENSITY
Sets the intensity (1-5)
15.21.11 WHITE...
Sets the color of the line.
15.22 DIVIDE
DIVIDE [Y|Z] [FROM|TO] [EWEIGHT=n] [WEIGHT=n] {n1|"name1"} [BY] {n2|
"name2"|FIT}
[AVERAGE|EFFICIENCY[=ON|OFF]] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
[CHECK[=ON|OFF]] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] [POINTS|
COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
This divides the Y values in data set n1 by data set n2. The result is a
modified set n1. You may not divide normal 2-d data by mesh data.
15.22.1 APPEND
If APPEND is specified, then a new data set is created, containing the
result and n1 is unchanged.
15.22.2 CHECK
CHECK=OFF turns off data set checking. When CHECK=ON both data sets must
have identical X (and Y if mesh) values, but data set n2 may contain more
points than n1. If (DX/DY) is non zero then the both DX and X must be
identical within 1% of DX. If you have data sets with non identical
values of X you may create a set with identical values using the BIN
command. If the X values of 2 data sets are not quite identical. You may
force TOPDRAWER to divide them by setting DX for the data 100 times
greater than the difference in X or by setting CHECK=OFF
15.22.3 EFFICIENCY
If EFFICIENCY is specified, the data is treated as an efficiency. That is
set n1 contains the number of successes, while n2 contains the number of
trials. The result has error bars (DY) which follow a binomial
distribution. See:Command ADD,MULTIPLY.
15.22.4 ERROR
ERROR=OFF excludes the errors from the FIT in the computation.
(Default:ERROR=ON)
15.22.5 FIT
Specifies that the data set is to be divided by the last FIT.
See:Command FIT.
15.22.6 LIMITED
You may specify the limits over which the histograms are to be divided.
If you specify the Y or Z limits, then all data that contains values
inside these limits will be divided. For example if you
DIVIDE 1 by 2 LIMITED FROM Y=10 to Y=11
But data set 1 contains the followind data:
1,0; 2,10; 3,0; 4,11; 5,0
Points 2 to 4 inclusive will be divided, and only points 1 and 5 will be
omitted.
15.22.7 LOG
If LOG is specified then the result of the command is typed on your
terminal.
15.22.8 WEIGHT-EWEIGHT
WEIGHT=n specifies a weighting factor to multiply the data by before
adding or subtracting it. EWEIGHT=n specifies the error on WEIGHT. This
option must precede the data set number.
15.22.9 Notes
If EFFICIENCY is not specified then the new value is Y3=Y1/Y2. If Y2 is
zero then Y3 is set to 0.0. The errors (DY) are treated as if the data
sets are uncorrelated, if BINOMIAL is not specified.
15.23 DU
See:Command X
15.24 DV
See:Command X
15.25 DW
See:Command X
15.26 DX
See:Command X
15.27 DY
See:Command X
15.28 DZ
See:Command X
15.29 ELLIPSE
Draws a circle or ellipse.
{CIRCLE|ELLIPSE} [AT|FROM|TO]{x,y[,z]|CURSOR} [DATA] [SIZE=dx[,dy]]
[DSIZE=dx[,dy[,dz]]] [ROTATE=n] [SQUARE|SYMMETRIC[=ON|OFF]]
[FILL[=ON|OFF]] [HIDE[=ON|OFF]]
[ANGLE [FROM] A1 [TO] [A2]]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
See also:Command BOX
15.29.1 AT
x,y,z specify the center of the ellipse. If z is specified then they are
assumed to be data units. If x,y,z are specified without FROM, TO, or AT
then AT is assumed.
15.29.2 FROM-TO
Specifies the diagonally opposite corners of box enclosing the ellipse.
15.29.3 FILL
Fills in the ellipse using the current fill pattern. See:SET FILL
15.29.4 CURSOR
The cross hair cursor is used to specify the limits of the ellipse.
Simply move the cross hairs so they define the lower-left limits of the
ellipse and press the space bar. Next move the cursor to the upper-right
limits of the ellipse an press space again. If you press a key other than
space, the cursor information is not used. Alternately you may specify
the upper-left then lower-right extension, or any other combination that
defines the ellipse.
15.29.5 DSIZE
specifies the size in data units. If the size is in data units the x,y
are assumed to be data units also. You should note that if DSIZE is
specified, you will usually get an ellipse.
15.29.6 ROTATE
Specifies a rotation angle in degrees. Rotation is right handed or
counterclockwise.
15.29.7 SIZE
specifies the size in inches DX is the width. If omitted the width is the
default See:Command SET ELLIPSE SIZE. DY is the height. If omitted the
DY=DX.
15.29.8 SQUARE
The option SQUARE or SYMMETRIC produces a circle. The SIZE is treated as
the X,Y of a diameter from the center of a circle, and FROM, TO are
treated as the ends of diameter of the circle.
15.29.9 DATA
Specifies X,Y are in data coordinate frame. Normally they are in the TEXT
coordinate frame. This option is not necessary if z or DSIZE are
specified.
15.29.10 ANGLE
The ellipse is drawn from the angle A1 to A2. A1,A2 must be in the range
-360 to 360 degrees.
15.29.11 SOLID...
Sets the texture of the line. See:Command SET TEXTURE.
15.29.12 INTENSITY
Sets the intensity (1-5)
15.29.13 WHITE...
Sets the color of the line.
15.30 ELSE
TD:ELSE
Starts or stops execution of TOPDRAWER commands depending on the preceding
IF. See:Command IF.
15.31 ENDFILE
TD:ENDFILE "Comment to type"
Ends the current file. If this command is given from the terminal or is
included in the command file used to run TOPDRAWER then it is the same as
EXIT.
15.32 ENDIF
TD:ENDIF
Ends the current if block. See:Command IF
15.33 ENDREPEAT
TD:ENDREPEAT
Ends the current repeat block. See:Command REPEAT
15.34 CLEAR
{CLEAR|ERASE} [FROM] [x,y[,z]|CURSOR] [DATA] TO[x,y[,z]|CURSOR] [DATA]
This clears the screen without resetting the buffers or the default
values. This is useful if you wish to view several different things with
the same parameters. If you specify a pair of X,Y values only a rectangle
inside those values is cleared. This only works on terminals that support
selective erase. Each X,Y[,Z] may be specified in either Text or Data
coordinates. Text coordinates are assumed if a Z is not specified.
WARNING
After CLEAR the current scale settings are retained, and
subsequent plots will not automatically have axes or scales. In
general you should use command NEW.
15.35 FFT
FFT [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [SELECT="name"] [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|
OFF]] [INVERT[=ON|OFF]] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
[POLAR[=ON|OFF]] [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]]
This command produces a complex fast fourier transformation of the
selected data sets. For 2-d data the real part of the coefficients is
stored in Y, and the imaginary part in Z if it exists. If not then DY
contains the imaginary part. X contains the frequency value. No error
analysis is performed by this operation. For mesh data the real part is
stored in Z and the imaginary part in DZ.
1. APPEND=ON Creates a new data set containing the result.
2. CHECK=OFF Turns off the checking to see if data is a histogram.
3. INVERT=ON inverts the forier series contained in Y,Z/DY.
4. SETS selects the data sets to to transform.
5. LOG=ON Logs the operation on your terminal.
6. MONITOR If selected it histograms the original data set and the
result.
See: SET MODE MONITOR
7. POLAR=ON selects polar coordinate output where Y is the magnitude
and Z/DY is the angle. The angle units is selected by the SET
POLAR command.
The selected data must be a histogram, that is the X values must be
equally spaced and strictly monotonic, and there must be at least 2 points
in each data set.
15.35.1 Restrictions
The fast fourier transform is done by a modified version of the CERN
library routine CFT. The data is assumed to be periodic with an EVEN
number of points. For example, suppots you have NPT points, then we
assume y[I]=y[I+NPT] Also, data sets are assumed to have lengths (say NPT)
where NPT's largest prime factor is not more than 23. The speed is
enhanced by using small prime factors. Thus, the routine fails for vector
lengths
NPT= 29 31 37 41 43 47 53 61 67 71 73 79 83 89 97
101 103 107 109 113 127 131 137 139 149 151 157 163 167 173
179 181 191 193 197 199 211 223 227 229 233 239 241 251 257
263 269 271 277 281 283 293 307 311 313 317 331 337 347 349
353 359 367 373 379 383 389 397 401 409 419 421 431 433 439
443 449 457 461 463 467 479 487 491 499 503 509 521 523 541
547 557 563 569 571 577 587 593 599 601 607 613 617 619 631
641 643 647 653 659 661 673 677 683 691 701 709 719 727 733
739 743 751 757 761 769 773 787 797 809 811 821 823 827 829
839 853 857 859 863 877 881 883 887 907 911 919 929 937 941
947 953 967 971 977 983 991 997 etc.
15.35.2 Interpretation
Assuming you have periodic data, the spectrum will exhibit 2 peaks. The
first one will be at f the frequency of the structure. The second one
will be at a frequency of 1/(chan width)-f. The peak will appear both in
the real and imaginary parts of the spectrum.
15.36 FILL
FILL BY={nset|"name"} [LEVEL=n] [ADD=[n|Z]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
This takes the data set nset and assumes it is a closed curve. It fills
the curve by adding 1 to each Z value of the specified data sets which lie
inside the curve. For mesh data Z must be the dependent variable.
If the filled data set has finite DX then it is incremented by the
fraction of the curve that lies within the DX of X.
If you specify LEVEL=n and DY is finite then n steps are used to find the
part of the curve that lies within each channel +-DY.
15.36.1 Options
1. ADD - Selects the value to fill by. If ADD=Z then the Z value of
the fill source is used in the fill.
2. BY=n - Selects the data set to use in filling other data set.
You may specify the set number or the name enclosed in quotes.
3. LEVEL - Selects the number of passes to test. 0=no fractions.
4. LIMITED - Selects data by range of X,Y,Z
5. LINES - Selects the range of lines or rows of a mesh to fill.
6. LOG - Tells you how many points have been filled.
7. POINTS - Selects the range of points or columns to fill.
8. SETS - Selects the data sets to fill. The fill source is never
filled.
9. SELECT - Selects the data sets to fill by name.
15.37 FIT
FIT [AGAIN[=ON|OFF]]
Coordinate to fit
[Y|Z]
Type of fit
[POLYNOMIAL| LEGENDRE| SINE| COSINE| EXPONENTIAL| GAUSSIAN|
INNVERSE| USER=n| EQUATION "term1;term2;..."]
[SCALE] [ORDER|TERMS=n] [OFFSET=n]
[NONLINEAR[=ON|OFF]]
[COEFFICIENTS|ECOEFFICIENTS|CMINIMUM|CMAXIMUM [INDEX=n] N1,N2,N3...]
[CONSTRAIN[=ON|OFF]]
[INCLUDE|EXCLUDE [NONE|EVEN|ODD] [n1,n2...] ]
Data generation
[CURVE [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [[X|Y] [FROM xmin] [TO xmax] [BY dx]
[N=steps]] [BINS|VALUES]] [NAME="name"]
Data selection
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[MESH[=ON|OFF]]
Output selection
[LOG[=ON|OFF]] [FULL[=ON|OFF]] [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]]
NONLINEAR=ON options
[ECHISQ=n] [MINUIT] [GRAD[=ON|OFF]] [PRINTLEVEL=n] [REPEAT=n]
[TOLERANCE=n]
Fits data and optionally produces a curve containing the fit. The
coefficients are typed on the terminal and placed as comments in the log
file. Data points with zero or negative values of DY are omitted from the
fit. If DY does not exist or is 0.0 for all specified data then DY is
assumed to be 1.0. If all coefficients are constrained, no fitting is
done, but you may generate the curve for those coefficients. You may
subtract the FIT from a data set with the SUBTRACT command.
15.37.1 Options
1. AGAIN - Redo the last fit.
2. Y|Z selects which coordinate is to be fit.
Type of fit
3. POLYNOMIAL,LEGENDRE,SINE,COSINE,EXPONENTIAL,GAUSSIAN,INVERSE - Is
the function
4. SCALE - Does fit to LOG(X) or LOG(Y) if the scale is set to LOG.
5. ORDER|TERMS=n - The max number of terms used in the fit.
6. OFFSET=n - An offset for the X value to set the center of the fit
7. COEFFICIENTS - Selects constant coefficients.
8. ECOEFFICIENTS|ERRORS - Selects constant coefficient errors.
A. CONSTRAIN selects whether coefficient is constrained.
B. INDEX selects the coefficient number.
9. INCLUDE|EXCLUDE - Selects coef. to fit or exclude from the fit.
Curve generation
10. CURVE - Produces a data set containing the fitted curve.
A. APPEND appends the new curve to the data sets.
B. NAME selects the new data set name.
C. [X|Y] from n1 to n2 by n3 selects the range and bin width for
the curve.
Data selection
11. LIMITED - Selects data by range of X,Y,Z
12. NAME - Selects the name of the appended data set
13. POINTS - Selects the range of points to use in the fit
14. SETS - Selects the data sets to use in the fit
15. MESH - Selects mesh data (normally regular data is used)
Nonlinear options
16. MINUIT - Does nonlinear fits using interactive MINUIT.
17. NONLINEAR - Selects nonlinear or linear fitting. For
NONLINEAR=on Uses linear fitting techniques if on. If off uses
MINUIT.
A. REPEAT selects the maximum number of tries.
B. PRINTELEVEL select the amount of log output.
C. GRADIENT selects whether the calculated derivitives are use
in the fitting.
D. TOLERENCE selects the tolerence for good fit
E. ECHISQ selects the error in chisq for finding errors in coef.
(Default:1.0)
18. Output options
19. LOG - Enables/Disable the terminal listing of the results of the
fit.
20. FULL - Enables output of error matrix as part of LOG.
21. MONITOR - Plots the original data and the fit.
15.37.2 AGAIN
Redo the last fit. This option must be the first option on the line.
After the fit command. When you redo the fit you may specify new options
to modify the fit. If you want to set fit options without doing any fits
use the command
SET FIT [options]
This sets fitting options to be performed by the next fit command. The
options on SET FIT are identical to the options on FIT. You may use a
series of SET FIT commands to setup the next fit.
15.37.3 EQUATION
LINEAR This allows you to enter equations for each term of a series
to fit. Each term is separated by a semicolon ";". The zeroeth order
term is always assumed to be a constant so only the first, second...
order terms are entered. For example you wish to fit
Y=C0+C1*X**1.5+C2*EXP(X)
TD:FIT EQUATION "XV**1.5;EXP(XV)"
If you have previously fit using an equation:
TD:FIT EQUATION ""
Uses the same equation for a new fit. All other fit options may be used
with EQUATION, but any options that modify the number of terms to fit must
appear after the equation definition. The X offset is ignored by the
equation.
NONLINEAR If you wish to perform a fit to an arbitrary function of X,
then you must enter the coefficients in the the equation as COE[n], and
you must specify the NONLINEAR option. Remember that each term
automatically has a coefficient, so you should use coefficients in the
equation that have not been already used. For example you wish to fit the
equation:
C0+C1*/(1+C2*(X-C3)**2)
Recalling that C0, and C1 will already be used you enter:
TD:FIT EQUATION "1/(1+COE[2]*(XV-COE[3])**2)" NONLINEAR TERMS=3
You may also need to specify initial values for the coefficients and
inital errors for the first step.
CONSTRAIN=OFF COEF n0,n1,n2,n3 ERROR n0,n1,n2,n3
Note: The constant term COE[0] is fit by default. Likewise the C1 is
automatically included as the coefficient of the first term. To get rid
of the constant term you use the option: EXCLUDE 0
15.37.4 POLYNOMIAL
Does a fit to:
SUM( an*(X-Offset)**n ); n=0,TERMS-1
This is the default if no function is specified.
15.37.5 INVERSE
Does a fit to an inverse poser series:
Y=SUM( an*(X-Offset)**(-n) ); n=0,TERMS-1
15.37.6 SINE
Does a fit to:
Y=a0+SUM( an*SINE((n)*(THETA-Offset)) ); n=1,TERMS-1
15.37.7 COSINE
Does a fit to:
Y=a0+SUM( an*COS((n*(THETA-Offset)) ); n=1,TERMS-1
The angle THETA is normally in degrees. If you wish to modify this see
SET POLAR.
15.37.8 LEGENDRE
Does a fit to:
Y=SUM of a legendre polynomial in (X-Offset). ,br;If you select both
LEGENDRE and COSINE or the data is POLAR then the Legendre series is a
function of COS((THETA-Offset)).
15.37.9 EXPONENTIAL
Does a fit to:
Y=EXP( a0+a1*(x-offset)) + Polynomial when NONLINEAR=ON (Default)
or ...
LN(Y)=series(x-offset)
for data points with Y>0.0.
Where series is either POLY,SINE,COSINE or LEGENDRE.
If you wish to fit data which has negative or zero data points, you must
either SMOOTH the data to get rid of them, or use the BIN command to rebin
the data into large bins. If all y data is less than zero, you may make
it positive with the command:
TD:Y=Y TIMES -1
When a NONLINEAR fit is used, and NTERMS=n is greater than 2 a polynomial
background of n-2 terms is added to the exponential.
15.37.10 GAUSSIAN
Does a fit to:
Y=a0*EXP(-0.5*((X-a1)/a2)**2)[+a3+a4*X+...] for NONLINEAR=ON
(Default) or
LN(Y)=LN(a0)+-0.5*((X-a1)/a2)**2 for NONLINEAR=OFF
for data points with Y,DY not 0.0.
Since only data with both Y,DY nonzero are fit, there may be some
inaccuracy for histogram data with zero in a large number of bins, and
small numbers in a few bins. Such data should be smoothed or rebinned to
remove the bins with DY=0.
For linear fits if you specify the a0 or a1 coefficient you must also
specify a3. If you wish to fit data which has negative or zero data
points, you must either SMOOTH the data to get rid of them, or use the BIN
command to rebin the data into large bins. If all y data is less than
zero, you may make it positive with the command:
TD:Y=Y * -1
When a NONLINEAR fit is used, and NTERMS=n is greater than 3 a polynomial
background of n-3 terms is added to the gaussian. If NTERMS=4,5,6 a
constant, straignht line, or parabola are used for the background. Larger
values are possible, but not recommended.
For LINEAR fits the OFFSET is used as the initial guess for the center of
the gaussian. When done, it is approximately equal to a1.
WARNING If you get the warning message that negative data points have beem
omitted in a Gaussian fit, the fit may be incorrect.
15.37.11 DGAUSSIAN
Does a fit to:
Z=a0*EXP(-0.5*(((X-a1)/a2)**2)+((Y-a3)/a4)**2))[+a5+a6*X+a7*Y] for
NONLINEAR=ON (Default) or
for data points with Y>0.0.
If you specify NTERMS=n where n is larger than 5 a Dpolynomial background
is added to the gaussian. The number of terms in the background is n-5.
If NTERMS=6,8 a constant, or sloped plane is used for the background.
15.37.12 DPOLYNOMAIL
Does a double polynomial fit to:
Z=a0+a1*X+a2*Y+a3*X**2+a4*X*Y+a5*Y**2+z6*X**3....
15.37.13 USER
USER=n
Does a fit to a user supplied function type. N must be between 1 and 99
with a default of 1. If none then a polynomial is used. For each
coefficient of the linear fit the user supplied function is called:
Y=TDUFUN(n,NORD,X)
Where n is the function type. NORD is the number of the coefficient
(1-19) and X is the x value. The user function must return the y value of
the term.
For example if you want USER=1 to select a polynomial, and USER=2 to
select an inverse polynomial. You would write the following subroutine:
FUNCTION TDUFUN(n,NORD,X)
IF (n.eq.1) THEN
TDUFUN=X**NORD
IF (n.eq.2) THEN
TDUFUN=X**(-NORD)
ELSE
END
15.37.14 COEFFICIENTS|ERRORS
Sets individual coefficients|errors. If coefficients are set then they
are not included in the calculation of the fit unless CONSTRAIN=OFF. If
CONSTRAIN=OFF then you are merely settting the initial value of the
coefficient. This is only useful for nonlinear fits. If you set the
error it is used as the initial step for nonlinear fits. INDEX sets the
index of the coefficient|error. The index may range from 0 to 19.
Undefined errors are assumed to be 0.0.
EXAMPLE
TD:COEFFICIENTS 1,2.5,.5 ERRORS .1,.5,.2
Sets - a0=1.0+-.1, a1=2.5+-.5, a3=0.5+-.2
TD:COEFFICIENTS INDEX=3 .5 ERRORS I=3 .1
Sets - a3=0.5+-.1
TD:COEFFICIENTS 1.0 I=3 2.0 I=5 .5,-.7
Sets - A0=1.0, A3=2.0, A5=0.5, A6=-0.7
15.37.15 CURVE
Generates the fitted curve, (Y,DY) as a function of X, which replaces the
current data. DY is calculated using the error matrix.
1. X Selects the X coordinate. (Default)
2. Y Selects the Y coordinate. This is used to
generate a mesh.
3. APPEND - The new data is appended to the current data as a new
set rather than replacing it.
4. N - Sets the number of bins in the resulting curve.
5. FROM - Sets the lowest value for the fitted curve.
6. TO - Sets the highest value for the fitted curve.
7. BY - Sets the width between data points in the fitted curve. You
may not specify all four FROM,TO,BY, and N.
8. BINS - Specifies that FROM, TO refer to the lower edge of the
first bin and the upper edge of the last bin.
9. VALUES - Specifies that FROM, TO refer to the center of the first
and last bins.
(Default:VALUES)
Example
The following all produce points at X=0.5,1.5,...9.5
CURVE VALUES FROM .5 TO 9.5 BY 1
CURVE BINS FROM 0 TO 10 BY 1
CURVE BINS FROM 0 TO BY 1 N=10
CURVE BINS FROM 0 TO BY 1 N=10 Y FROM 100 to 120 by 2
If you do not specify FROM, TO ... a set of values is assumed. First if
you are fitting a histogram with equally spaced values, then the same X
values are assumed. Otherwise the current X tick spacing is used.
15.37.16 EXCLUDE/INCLUDE
Selects terms to include or exclude from the fit. n1... may range from 0
to 19. If you specify INCLUDE NONE then no terms are fit. This is useful
if you wish to generate a curve by specifying coefficients, without
actually performing a fit.
(Default:EXCLUDE NONE)
15.37.17 LIMITED
Fits points between the specified limits. If limits are not specified,
the default is the current plot limit. See:Command SET LIMITS. You may
specify up to 5 sets of limits. This allows you to fit the data using up
to 5 regions, and omitting the rest of the data.
1. X - Specifies X limit
2. Y - Specifies Y limit
3. Z - Specifies the Z limit
4. CURSOR - Brings up the cursor. You move it to the X,Y value you
wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to enter X
or Y to enter Y.
5. RECURSOR - The cursor enters all regions from the current one,
until you type "Q".
6. VLOG - Draws a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
dotted line around the final limits.
example
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM 1,1 to 2,5
or...
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=1 TO X=2 Y=5
Fits all points that with X between 1 and 2 and Y between 2 and 5
inclusive.
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM Y=1 TO Y=5
Fits all data points with Y values between 1 and 5 inclusive.
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR
Fits all data points as defined by the cursor limits.
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM X=CURSOR TO X=CURSOR
Fits all data points according to X values defined by the cursor.
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM 1 to 20 FROM 40 TO 80
Fits a parabola to data in 2 regions, and skips the X values 20 to 40.
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED VLOG RECURSOR
Fits a parabola to the data for the regions selected by the cursor. Both
X and Y values are determinded by the cursor. Each cursor value is
entered by pressing the space bar. After the last region, Press the "Q"
key to quit.
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED VLOG X=RECURSOR
This is the same as above, except that only X values are entered by
cursor.
15.37.18 NONLINEAR
Selects nonlinear fitting techniques. If ON MINUIT is used to do the fit.
The ECHISQ, GRADIENT, TOLERENCE, REPEAT, and PRINTLEVEL are used to modify
the MINUIT fit. They are ignored for linear fits. If you specify the
option MINUIT you will enter interactive MINUIT mode. You must then guide
the fit using MINUIT commands. In addition you may specify the maximum
and minimum value for each coeffiecint with the CMINIMUM and CMAXIMUM
options. You might also wish to pick an initial error for each
coefficinent, and possibly an initial value.
The nonlinear errors agree with the linear values if you select
ECHISQ=1.0. Note: Though Topdrawer and PAW both use MINUIT, the
resulting CHISQ disagrees by about a factor of 3. The TOPDRAWER CHISQ
seems to agree with the correct value by subtracting the fitted curve from
the data and calculating SUM((Y/DY)**2)/(Points-Params)
The linear methods are much faster and convergence is guaranteed if no
numerical errors occurr. Unfortunately many curves can not be expressed
as a linear combination of terms.
Most linear fits may be performed either by linear or nonlinear methods.
This may be useful in checking the accuracy of the fitting techniques.
(Default:OFF, ON if GAUSSIAN or EXPONENTAIL)
15.37.18.1 ECHISQ - Selects the difference in CHISQ for calculating
the error in the coefficients.
(Default:1)
15.37.18.2 GRADIENT - If ON use the calculated gradient.
(Default:GRADIENT=ON, OFF for EQUATION)
15.37.18.3 PRINTLEVEL - Selects the MINUIT printlevel (-1 to 3).
Higher levels produce more detailed reporting.
(Default:PRINTLEVEL=-1)
15.37.18.4 REPEAT - The number of times to repeat before giving up.
(Default:REPEAT=25)
15.37.18.5 TOLERENCE - Selects the tolerence for fitting. Fit stops
when the estimated distance from the min chisq is
0.001*TOLERENCE*ECHISQ*CHISQ.
(Default:0.1)
15.37.19 LOG/FULL
Types the result of the fit on your terminal. If you select LOG=OFF then
the results of the fit are not typed on your terminal. If you select FULL
then the error matrix as well as all result of the fit is typed on your
terminal.
(Default:LOG=ON,FULL=OFF).
15.37.20 OFFSET
OFFSET=n If non zero the data is fitted as a function of (X-n). For
non orthogonal functions such as plynomials, you should always specify the
offset as the center of the region that you wish to fit. This will
produce a better fit with lower errors on the coefficients. The offset is
included in the a1 coefficent for GAUSSIAN fits, so you do not need to
specify it.
15.37.21 MESH
Selects mesh data. Normally mesh data is ignored when performing a fit.
15.37.22 NAME
The new set will usually have a name consisting of a transformation name
followed by the old set name. If you specify a new name it is applied to
the new data set. If the name ends in "%" then the old name is appended
to the new name. See option:APPEND
15.37.23 MONITOR
If selected it plots the original data and joins the fitted curve.
See: SET MODE MONITOR
The fitted curve is joined using the SECONDARY attributes. to change them
use the SET SECONDARY command.
15.37.24 POINTS
Specifies the range of points to use. If n2 is omitted it is assumed to
be n1. You may specify the point number or the options FIRST,LAST.
15.37.25 SCALE
Fits the LOG(X or Y) to the base e if a log scale is selected for X or Y.
see the command: SET SCALE. Similarly the option EXPONENTIAL fits
LOG(Y)=series.
example
TD:SET SCALE Y LOG
TD:FIT TERMS=4
Fits a polynomial LOG(Y)=a0+a1*X+a2*X**2+a3*X**3
example
TD:SET SCALE X LOG
TD:FIT TERMS=3
Fits a polynomial Y=a0+a1*LOG(X)+a2*LOG(X)**2
15.37.26 SETS
Specifies the range of data sets to use. If n2 is omitted it is assumed
to be n1. You may specify the data set number or the options FIRST,LAST.
15.37.27 ORDER/TERMS
Sets the number of terms in a series or the order of the series. The
number of terms must be between 1 and 20. The order (TERMS-1) must be
between 0 and 19.
(Default:TERMS=2)
15.37.28 Y|Z
This selects the coordinate to fit. By default Z is fit for MESH data,
DPOLYNOMIAL, or DGAUSS. Otherwise Y is fit.
15.37.29 Warning
A fit may fail with floating point overflow when the number of terms is
large. Sometimes you may avoid this be rescaling the data to a smaller
range, and fitting the rescaled data. Selecting an offset for X may also
prevent errors.
For example you have data with X ranging from 1 to 100 and Y from 0 to 10.
When you try to fit the data with more than 9 terms you get floating
overflow. This may be prevented by rescaling X to be in the range .01 to
1.
TD:X=X TIMES 0.01
Then try performing the fit again.
Even if there is no overflow, a fit may fail if a large number of terms
are selected, and the limit of the computer accuracy is reached (14
digits). Polynomials are particularly sensative to this type of problem.
In general polynomials should not be fitted to more than 9 terms.
15.37.30 Yerrors
The error bars on the Y values are used as weighting factors for the fit.
If they are all 0.0 they are assumed to be 1.0. The resulting fit has
error bars on the coefficients according to the assumed error bars on the
Y values. X errors are not used in the fit.
When a curve is generated, it will have error bars on the Y values if the
fitted curve had non zero error bars. For some functions the final errors
depend on the initial center of the expansion. This is set by specifying
an offset (OFFSET=n). Generally best results are obtained with an offset
in the middle of the data set.
15.37.31 Examples
TD:FIT POLY TERMS=10 INCLUDE EVEN
Fits a polynomial using the even powers of X. (1.0,X**2...X**8) A curve
with the resulting fit replaces the current data.
TD:FIT LEGEN TERMS=3
Fits a legendre polynomial of 3 terms. (1,L1,L2) A curve with the
resulting fit replaces the current data.
TD:FIT POLY INCLUDE 2,3,5 CURVE APPEND FROM 0 to 10 by .1
Fits a polynomial using X**2,X**3,X**5 and appends the histogram at the
end of the current data. The curve contains 101 data points spanning the
range of X from 0.0 to 10.0
TD:FIT POLY INCLUDE NONE COEF 1.0,.5,-.25 CURVE FROM 0 TO 10 BY .5
Creates a parabola Y=1.0+0.5*X-0.25*X**2 from 0 to 10 in steps of 0.5.
Note: that no fit is performed since no coefficints were included.
15.38 FLUSH
FLUSH This flushes any information in the buffers. If you are
plotting on an interactive device, from the terminal you can do the same
thing by hitting "return".
15.39 FREQUENCY
This is a synonym for BIN. See the BIN command.
15.40 HISTOGRAM
Draws a histogram from the specified data points. Bin edges are halfway
between the ends of adjacent error bars (DX), or halfway between points if
no error bars.
HISTOGRAM [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]]
[TITLE[=ON|OFF]]
[CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] [HIDE[=ON|
OFF]] [FILL[=ON|OFF]]
MESH options
[X] [Y] [Z] [BLOCK|LEGO] [FRAME[=ON|OFF]] [DEPTH[=ON|OFF]] [GRID[=ON|
OFF]] [XY|YZ|ZX] [CROSS|RANDOM]
15.40.1 CYCLE
When plotting more than 1 slice or data set, CYCLE causes the line
texture, color, and width to vary from one plot to the next. The order of
cycling is set by the SET CYCLE command. If you have specified either
texture, color or width it overrides the cycle value.
15.40.2 DEPTH
DEPTH=OFF plots the mesh as a series of disconnected histograms, rather
than as a solid. Each histogram is drawn as a flat 2 dimensional hist,
but one after the other. Necessary lines to delineate edges of different
planes are included when a plot with depth is requested. By omitting some
lines the plot is much faster.
(Default:DEPTH=ON)
If you wish to pick which axes is histogrammed you may use the options
X,Y,Z
15.40.3 EXPAND
Sets the limits so that the selected data expands to fill the window.
This has no effect unless POINTS, SETS, SLICES are specified or the limits
on MESH data have been set by a SET LIMITS command.
See:SET MODE
15.40.4 FILL
Generates a fill pattern under the histogram, or bar chart.
15.40.5 FRAME
This option specifies that the edge of the 3-d plot is to be always drawn.
If turned off the edge is not drawn when the data=ZMIN. Essentially this
histograms only the "important" interior data.
(Default:FRAME=ON)
15.40.6 GRID
Draws grid lines corresponding to Z major ticks on a histogram of a MESH.
These are drawn according to the style,color... selected by the SET GRID
command. The CYCLE option in the SET GRID command can make these
different colors and textures.
(Default:GRID=OFF)
If SET AXES THREE=ON and SET GRID X=ON Y=ON are selected then GRID
defaults to ON.
15.40.7 HIDE
Controls whether hidden lines are drawn for a 3-d mesh, or whether one
histogram hides the next. You must specify HIDE for both the histogram to
be hidden and the histogram that is to hide it. The histogram which is
drawn first will hide the second one. HIDE=OFF draws the hidden lines,
while HIDE=ON omits them.
(Default:HIDE=ON for mesh, HIDE=OFF for data)
example
Assume you have 2 data sets where you want set 1 to hide elements in set
2. Also you would like to fill data set 2.
TD:JOIN SET=1 HIDE
TD:JOINS SET=2 HIDE FILL
You can produce a drawing of a mesh with hidden lines as dotted lines by
doing the histogram twice:
TD:HISTOGRAM
TD:HISTOGRAM HIDE=OFF DOTTED
15.40.8 POINTS|COLUMNS
Specifies the range of points or the colums of a mesh to use. If not
selected all points are plotted. If n2 is omitted it is assumed to be n1.
You may specify the point number or the options FIRST,LAST.
15.40.9 SETS
This selects the data set to plot. The data must be broken up into sets
using the data set command, for this option to work properly. If n2 is
omitted it is assumed to be n1. You may specify the data set number or
the options FIRST,LAST.
15.40.10 SOLID
This determines the texture of the line. See:Command SET TEXTURE
15.40.11 X|Y|Z|BLOCK
For normal data X,Y,Z pick the dependent axis of the plot.
Mesh data produces a "solid" plot. The limits are set from the beginning
of the first X,Y data point to the last. This may not be satisfactory if
the bins at the edges are large.
The options X... modify the format of the plot.
1. X - Draws all bin edges in the X direction.
2. Y - Draws all bin edges in the Y direction.
3. Z - Draws all bin edges in the Z direction.
4. BLOCK or LEGO - Draws all bin edges. It is equivalent to X Y Z.
This produces a block or "Lego" plot.
15.40.12 XY
XY|YZ|ZX determine which faces are "shaded". The shading is done by
either drawing parallel lines, a cross from corner to corner or random dot
patterns. The default is parallel lines.
15.40.13 CROSS|RANDOM
CROSS|RANDOM produce either a diagonal cross or a set of random dots as
shading patterns on the selected faces. DX controls the number of
dots/face. DX is the total number of dots to pruduce.
15.40.14 DX
DX|DY|DZ are the separation between parallel lines used to shade the
faces. If zero parallel lines are not drawn.
Example
You wish to shade face YZ,ZX with lines parallel to the Y axis separated
by 0.1 units. Essentially this draws lines at even multiples of 0.1
units. This may be used in a similar fashion to grid lines on 1-d plots.
TD:HISTOGRAM YZ ZX DX=0.1
Note: you specify DX the distance along the X axis. Since DY is 0, no
lines parallel to the X axis are drawn. When selecting RANDOM shading DX
specifies the number of dots/face.
15.40.15 SLICES
[SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
or...
[SLICE X|Y|Z=v1] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
This plots a histogram sliced from mesh data. This command is illegal for
normal data. If v2 is omitted then v2=v1. If a range is selected then
all slices within the range are histogrammed. IF you set THREE=OFF then
the slices are histogrammed according to the first X,Y,Z Mentioned. If X
is first then the slices are taken perpendicular to the X axis. You only
need select X|Y|Z the first time you slice after a NEW FRAME command.
15.40.15.1 Operation - If THREE is ON then the histogram is sliced into
a section between v1 and v2. The data outside of the range is omitted
from the plot.
If THREE is OFF then each line/column of the histogram between v1 and v2
is plotted as a separate histogram. If both v2 and v1 are omitted, then
all slices are plotted.
If you wish to add together a series of slices and plot them as a single
histogram see:Command PROJECT.
15.40.15.2 Warning - If you intend to use options X,Y,or Z to control
the format of a histogram they should not follow a SLICE command, or they
should be separated from it by some other option.
15.40.15.3 Example -
2-d Example
You read in a mesh of data x,y vs Z. X ranges from 0.0 to 1.0 in steps of
0.1 and Y from 100 to 200 in steps of 1. Then you:
TD:SET THREE OFF
You wish to view a histogram of x vs Z for Y=140 and expand the scale so
that the final plot fills the window.
TD:HISTOGRAM SLICE Y=140 EXPAND
You now wish to view y vs z for values Y=.2 to .5:
TD:HISTOGRAM SLICE X FROM .2 to 0.5
(This plots 4 histograms)
Now you wish to view all slices along the X axis:
TD:HISTOGRAM SLICES Y
(This plots 100 histograms!)
TD:HISTOGRAM SLICE X FROM 0 to 0.5 Y FROM 105.5 to 110.0
Plots the mesh data as a series of slices looking along the X axis for a
limited range of Y.
TD:HISTOGRAM SLICE Y=105 X FROM .25 TO .5
Plots the mesh data as a single slice looking along the Y axis for a
limited range of X.
3-d Example
You enter mesh data in steps of 1 for Y=1 to 10, X=0 to 20.
TD:HIST SLICE X=10.
You are looking at X=10.
TD:HIST SLICE X=10. TO 20
You are looking at X=10 to 20.
TD:HIST SLICE X=10. TO 20 Y=5 TO 7
You are looking at X=10 to 20, Y=5 to 7.
15.40.16 3-d_histograms
A 3-d histogram can be either a plot of mesh data or a plot of "normal"
x,y,z data. Mesh data is normally plotted as a "solid". XYZ data is
plotted as a histogram of X vs Z in the plane determined by Y. For all
3-d histograms Z must be the dependent variable, and X,Y are independent.
Repeated XYZ plots may be used to build up a series of histograms.
NOTE
Some lines may be missing from the plot, because of the viewpoint. If
this happens you may need to:
TD:SET THREE RDIST 1000
This moves the viewpoint closer to infinity, but maintans the plot size.
If the plot is too large you may need to adjust the screen or window
distance.
TD:SET THREE DIST 1000 SCRD 300
Will reduce the size of the plot. The size of the plot is roughly
proportional to the ratio of SCRD to DIST.
If you specify color, intensity, or texture it is used for the top side of
the mesh, while the default is used for the bottom.
example
TD:SET COLOR RED
TD:SET TEXTURE DOTS
TD:HISTOGRAM SOLID WHITE
Produces a mesh plot with bottom in dotted red lines, while the top side
is drawen in white solid lines.
15.40.17 Variables
Normally for 2-d plots X is the independent variable and Y is the
dependent one.
Normally for 3-d plots X,Y are the independent variables and Z is the
dependent variable.
The bin width is half way between the X or X,Y values if DX,DY are 0. If
DX,DY are specified then they determine the bin width.
15.40.18 Limits
The limits of the data for histograms is normally set so that the
lowerlimit of the dependent axis with a linear scale is 0.0, unless some
data points are less than zero. If you wish a different value you can:
TD:SET LIMIT YMIN=n
or for 3-d....
TD:SET LIMIT ZMIN=n
WARNING
If this command is issued in between 2 plots overlaying each
other, they will not have the same scales.
15.40.19 Shading_example
Shading is produced by the options:
XY YZ ZX DX DY DZ CROSS RANDOM
If you wish to shade the 3 faces differently, you must histogram 3 times
with each pattern you wish. For example you wish parallel lines on the YZ
face, dots on the ZX face, and crosses on the XY face:
TD:HISTOGRAM XY CROSS
TD:HISTOGRAM YZ DX=0.1 DY=0.1
TD:HISTOGRAM ZX RANDOM DX=1000
15.41 HELP
This gives you help on TOPDRAWER commands. This command is not journaled
unless the MODE ABORT=OFF is set.
TD:HELP topic subtopic sub-subtopic...
For example to get the list of set commands:
TD:HELP COMMAND SET list
To get help on the JOIN command.
TD:HELP COMMAND JOIN
15.42 IF
IF|IFNOT [.AND.|.OR.] [.NOT.]
[DATA] [ERROR] [INTERACTIVE] [MESH]
[THREE|3D] [value {.LT.|.EQ.|.GT.|.LE.|.NE.|.GE.} value]
The condition is tested and if satisfied the rest of the line up to the
semicolon ";" is executed. If not satisfied it is skipped. If .AND. or
.OR. are omitted .AND. is assumed.
IF|IFNOT [conditions] THEN
. . .
ELSE
. . .
ENDIF
If the tested condition is satisfied lines up to the ENDIF or ELSE are
executed. Otherwise they are skipped.
1. DATA - True if any data points are available.
2. ERROR - This condition is true if the last line had an error.
3. INTERACTIVE - True if the program is running interactively, False
if it is run in BATCH mode. The device you are using may or may
not be interactive independent of the mode of operation.
4. MESH - True if the data is (3D) mesh data.
5. 3D - True if 3D is turned on. You should notice that mesh data
may be plotted as flat or 3D data.
6. value - Any number or lexical.
Example
TD:IF MESH PLOT;IFNOT MESH HISTOGRAM;
or...
TD:IF MESH THEN;PLOT;ELSE;HISTOGRAM;ENDIF;
If the current data is mesh data it is plotted as a scatter plot otherwise
it is histogrammed.
TD:IF 3D .AND. V_SUM .GT. 0 HISTOGRAM
Histograms 3-d data if it is greater than zero.
TD:IF V_SUM .GT. 0 .OR. V_SUM .LT. -1 .AND. 3D JOIN
Joins mesh data if the sum over the data is not between -1 and 0.
15.43 INTERPOLATE
INTERPOLATE [LEVEL=n] [{SPLINE|GENERAL}] [CLOSED[=ON|OFF]]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
Interpolates a data set and puts the result into a new data set. LEVEL is
the number of intervals per pair of points. If 2 a single point is
interpolated in between each existing point. If it is 5 then 4 points are
interpolated. X, Y, and Z if available are all interpolated.
The data must be strictly monotonic in either Y or X for a SPLINE
interplation.
If the first and last points of a curve are the same, the curve is assumed
to be closed, and the interpolation is done accordingly. If the data is
POLAR or SPHERICAL then the angles must vary smoothly for proper closure.
15.43.1 Options
1. LEVEL - Selects the number of subintervals from 2 to 10.
(Default:LEVEL=2)
2. SPLINE|GENERAL - Selects the type of fit to use in interpolation.
(Default:GENERAL)
3. CLOSED forces the interpolation to consider the data as a closed
curve. CLOSED=OFF will fil an unclosed curve even when the first
and last points are identical.
(Default:data determines closure)
4. POINTS - Selects the data points to use by number.
5. SETS - Selects the range of data sets to interpolate.
6. SELECT="name" - Selects the data sets by name
7. LIMITED - Selects the points to use by a range of values. The
actual data selected will include all data that meets the
selection. Some data outside of the range may be included to
avoid breaking up a data set into multiple pieces.
8. APPEND - Appends the new data sets. Otherwise the new data
replaces the old set.
(Default:APPEND=OFF)
9. NAME - Specifies the name for the new data set.
(Default:"Spline %"
10. LOG - Summarizes the operations done.
(Default:LOG=OFF)
15.43.2 Notes
The spline fit is based on the spline fitter from FXB$CG from the Stanford
SPSS package.
The general fit was originally adapted from ACM Algorithm #433, by Hiroshi
Akima.
The interpolation by n will not give the same results as joining the data
by n, since the joininig is done after the data coordinates have been
transformed into text coordinates.
15.44 JOIN
Joins the data points with a series of line segments.
JOIN [[LEVEL=]n] [{SPLINE|GENERAL}] [TEXT] [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]]
[TITLE[=ON|OFF]]
[CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[HIDE[=ON|OFF]]
3-d options
[X|Y|Z] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]]
15.44.1 Level
This is the number of line segments/point to use in joining the points.
If omitted TOPDRAWER picks a suitable value
15.44.2 CYCLE
When plotting more than 1 slice or data set, CYCLE causes the line
texture, color, and width to vary from one plot to the next. The order of
cycling is set by the SET CYCLE command. If you have specified either
texture, color or width it overrides the cycle value.
15.44.3 ERRORS
This puts error bars as vertical lines on a mesh plot.
15.44.4 EXPAND
Sets the limits so that the selected data expands to fill the window.
This has no effect unless POINTS, SETS, SLICES are specified or the limits
on MESH data have been set by a SET LIMITS command.
See:SET MODE
15.44.5 FILL
Generates a fill pattern inside the curve. The pattern will be generated
so that alternate areas witin the curve are shaded. The curve is assumed
to be closed with the last pont connecticted to the first one.
No spline or general fits are done to the data with fill. The number of
segements per point or level is assumed to be 1 with fill.
15.44.6 HIDE
Controls whether hidden lines are drawn for a 3-d mesh, or whether one
histogram hides the next. HIDE=OFF draws the hidden lines, while HIDE=ON
omits them.
(Default:HIDE=ON for mesh, HIDE=OFF for data)
This works very well for curves which are functions of x, or curves that
have at most 2 y values for a given x. Curves with more than 2 y values
per X will hide the entire region from the minimum to the maximum y.
15.44.7 SPLINE|GENERAL
SPLINE uses a natural cubic spline to fit the points. Either x or y must
be strictly increasing. A GENERAL curve is calculated using an algorithm
which allows multiple-valued functions and repeated points.
(Default:GENERAL)
15.44.8 TEXT
Use the TEXT coordinate frame instead of the DATA frame.
15.44.9 LINES
Specify which lines or rows of a mesh are to be used in the plot.
15.44.10 POINTS|COLUMNS
Specifies the range of points or the colums of a mesh to use. If not
specified all data points are used. If n2 is omitted it is assumed to be
n1. You may specify the point number or the options FIRST,LAST. For 3-d
plots this specifies the columns to use in the plot.
15.44.11 SETS
This selects the data set to plot. The data must be broken up into sets
using the data set command, for this option to work properly. If n2 is
omitted it is assumed to be n1. You may specify the data set number or
the options FIRST,LAST.
15.44.12 INTENSITY
Sets line intensity or width (1-5).
15.44.13 WHITE...
Sets the line color. See:Command SET COLOR.
15.44.14 SOLID...
Set the line texture. See:Command SET TEXTURE
15.44.15 X|Y|Z
This specifies that mesh data is to be joined only in X,Y, or Z. The
default is to join in both.
15.44.16 SLICES
This plots data sliced from a mesh. For more information see HISTOGRAM
SLICE.
15.44.17 3-d_plot
This produces a mesh plot of the data. Essentially the data points are
joined in X,Y. If you specify color, intensity, or texture it is used for
the top side of the mesh, while the default is used for the bottom.
example
TD:SET COLOR RED
TD:SET TEXTURE DOTS
TD:JOIN SOLID WHITE
Produces a mesh plot with bottom in dotted red lines, while the top side
is drawen in white solid lines.
15.45 LIST
15.45.1 DATA
LIST [DATA] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [FILE|OUTPUT=filename] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] n2]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[STATISTICS[=ON|OFF]]
[COMPRESS[=ON|OFF]]
lists the current data in the buffer. The data values are listed in a
format that may be used as input to TOPDRAWER. For more information
See:Command SHOW DATA.
15.45.1.1 APPEND - Adds the listing to the end of the specified file.
(Default:APPEND=OFF)
15.45.1.2 COMPRESS - Selects compressed output. This saves space on
disk, at the expense of readability. If you do not specify ON or OFF, ON
is assumed.
(Default:COMPRESS=OFF)
15.45.1.3 FILE - Selects the filename for output. If omitted the
listing file is used. If the filename is NONE then no file name is
selected. If you wish to specify a file name containing either semicolons
or blanks, it must be enclosed in parenthesis.
15.45.1.4 LIMITED - Limits the data listed to the specified range. For
3-d data the limit on the dependent variable is ignored. If limits are
not specified, the default is the current plot limits.
See:Command SET LIMITS.
1. X - Specifies X limit
2. Y - Specifies Y limit
3. Z - Specifies the Z limit
4. CURSOR - Brings up the cursor. You move it to the X,Y value you
wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to enter X
or Y to enter Y.
5. RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.
6. VLOG - Draws a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
dotted line around the final limits.
7. LOG - Type on the terminal a summary of the data listing.
example
TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM 1,1 to 2,5
or...
TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=1 TO X=2 Y=5
Lists all points that with X between 1 and 2 and Y between 2 and 5
inclusive.
TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM Y=1 TO Y=5
Lists all data points with Y values between 1 and 5 inclusive.
TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR
Lists all data points as defined by the cursor limits.
TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM X=CURSOR TO X=CURSOR
Lists all data points according to X values defined by the cursor.
15.45.1.5 LINES|ROWS - For 3-d plots specifies which lines or rows of
the mesh data to list.
15.45.1.6 POINTS|COLUMNS - This specifies which points to list. For 3-d
this is the range of column numbers.
15.45.1.7 SETS - This specifies which data set to list.
15.45.1.8 STATISTICS - This displays only the statistics on the data,
and the actual data values are suppressed.
15.45.2 FIT
LIST FIT [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [FILE|OUTPUT=filename] [FULL[=ON|OFF]]
Produces a listing on disk of the current fit parameters.
Options:
1. APPEND adds the listing to the end of the specified file
(Default:APPEND=OFF)
2. FULL outputs all information.
(Default:FULL=OFF)
3. FILE specifies the file name
(Default:tfit.lis)
15.45.3 HISTOGRAMS
LIST HISTOGRAMS
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]]
[FILE|OUTPUT=filename]
[IDENT=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT|NAME='hist_name']
[EXACT[=ON|OFF]]
[AREA|DIRECTORY="dir/subdir..."]
[TReE[=ON|OFF]]
[ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]]
[HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]]
[MESH[=ON|OFF]]
[ARRAY[=ON|OFF]]
[NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]]
[INdEX[=ON|OFF]]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]]
This produces a line printer listing of the current histogram data. The
options ENTRIES,MESH,NTUPLES,EXACT,NAME, and IDENT select which histograms
are printed. TREE lists all histograms in the directory tree. You may
specify the output file name FILE=name. The option LOG types the file
name of the histogram listing on your terminal. The histogram data is
listed in a form suitable to be printed. Some histogram packages allow
you to specify the format of the output. For more information see
command: SET HISTOGRAM.
An index precedes all of the histograms. If you specify INDEX=OFF then no
index is listed.
(Default:FILE=histo.lis,TREE=OFF,INDEX=ON,APPEND=OFF)
15.46 MERGE
MERGE [ALL]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[NAMe="name"]
[POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[CURSOR] ]
Merges the specified data points into a single data set.
1. ALL merges all data
2. APPEND creates a new data set and copies all of the specified
sets into it. If not specified then the specified range of data
sets is deleted.
3. LIMITED allows you to specify which points to retain, all others
are deleted or omitted in the case of APPEND.
4. LOG shows which sets are merged.
5. NAME specifies the name of the new data set.
6. POINTS selects the data points by number
7. SETS selects the range of data sets to merge.
8. SELECT selects the data sets by name
You must specify either SETS, POINTS, LIMITED, or ALL If the range of data
sets contains a mesh data set and APPEND is not specified, the data can
not be merged.
After merging several data sets you may need to SORT the data if you wish
to HISTOGRAM, JOIN, or BARCHART it.
15.47 MONITOR
MONITOR HISTOGRAMS [AVAILABLE|FILE=name|SECTION=name]
[IDENT[=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[EXACT[=ON|OFF]] [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]] [SELECT|NAME='hist_name']
[INTERVAL=n] [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|
OFF]] [MESH[=ON|OFF]] [OVERFLOWS[=ON|OFF]] [PAUSE[=ON|OFF]]
[REPEAT=n] [RESCALE[=ON|OFF]] [SHOW[=ON|OFF]] [SCAN[=ON|OFF]]
[SKIP=n] [STATISTICS[=ON|OFF]] [TIME[=ON|OFF]] [TREE[=ON|OFF]]
[WINDOWS=n]
Repeatedly displays the selected histograms, or the last one selected by a
SET HISTOGRAM command. If more than 1 histogram are selected only the
first 20 are displayed. SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK and SET MONITOR
15.47.1 AVAILABLE
Selects currently available histograms rather than histograms in a global
section or direct access file.
15.47.2 EXACT
Histogram names are treated as exact strings, and they are not searched in
a case independent manner.
(Default:OFF)
15.47.3 EXPAND
Expands the histogram scales by omitting leading and trailing zero
channels. The histogram is also centered in the window. You may also set
limits on the Y scales of individual histograms by:
DEFINE HIST ID=n PRMIN=nlow PRMAX=nhigh
15.47.4 ENTRIES
YES selects only histograms with entries, while NO selects histograms
without entries.
15.47.5 FILE
Selects the direct access file to monitor. If FILE="" then the current
one is used.
15.47.6 IDENT
Specifies the IDs of the histograms to display. If this qualifier is not
used, then the current histogram is displayed. If IDENT is used without
any parameters then all histograms are candidates for monitoring.
15.47.7 INTERVAL
Specifies the interval in seconds between updates.
(Default:10)
15.47.8 LOG
Types on your terminal the name of each histogram monitored. If
STATISTICS is selected then the statistics are also typed.
15.47.9 MESH
YES selects only mesh data (scatter plots), while NO selects only non mesh
data. Normally both mesh and nonmesh data are displayed.
15.47.10 NAME
Selects the histograms by name. See SET or SHOW HISTOGRAM.
15.47.11 OVERFLOWS
Displays the overflow data in the first/last channels.
(Default:ON)
15.47.12 PAUSE
Selects pause mode rather than wait mode. After each plot Topdrawer
pauses until you press the "Return" key.
(Default:OFF)
15.47.13 REPEAT
Is the number of times to repeat. It must be in the range of 1 to
2147483647.
(Default:9999)
15.47.14 RESCALE
Selects whether hist is rescaled when it overflows. Normally the
TOPDRAWER automatically picks the scale of the displayed histogram. Then
when it is too big to fit on the screen, it is erased and rescaled. If
you set limits before the MONITOR command, they are used to determine the
scale of the histogram. The histogram is not automatically rescaled, if
the limits are picked or if RESCALE=OFF.
(Default:ON)
15.47.15 SECTION
Selects the global section to monitor. If SECTION="" then the current one
is used. If neither FILE nor SECTION are specified then section is
assumed unless FILE has been specified in a previous MONITOR HISTOGRAM or
SET HISTOGRAM command. SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK
15.47.16 SCAN
Displays all selected histograms, in order. The screen is cleared between
each update. This allows you to look at more than 20 histograms.
(Default:OFF)
15.47.17 SKIP
SKIP=n Skips the first n histograms which meet the selection
criteria.
15.47.18 STATISTICS
Puts histogram overflow/underflow and sum on the line below the top title.
15.47.19 SHOW
Adds the hist ID to the lower right corner of each window below the X
title.
(Default:ON)
15.47.20 TIME
Adds the time to the lower left corner of the display.
(Default:ON)
15.47.21 TREE
Search the directory tree from the current directory for histograms to
monitor, that match the selection criterions.
(Default:OFF)
15.47.22 WINDOWS
Selects the maximum number of windows to use. You may specify any number
from 1 to 20.
(Default:20)
15.48 MORE
Adds more text after the last title with the same parameters as the last
title. It may also be modified by a matching CASE command, see TITLE.
MORE
15.49 MULTIPLY
MULTIPLY [Y|Z] [FROM|TO] [EWEIGHT=n] [WEIGHT=n] {n1|"name1"} [BY] {n2|
"name2"|FIT}
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [LINES|
ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO
[[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]] [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
[VECTOR[=ON|OFF]]
This multiplies the (Y/Z) values in data set n1 by data set n2. The
result is a modified set n1. You may not multiply mesh data by normal 2-d
data.
15.49.1 APPEND
If APPEND is specified, then a new data set is created, containing the
result and set n1 is unchanged.
15.49.2 CHECK
CHECK=OFF turns off data set checking. When CHECK=ON both data sets must
have identical X (and Y if mesh) values, but data set n2 may contain more
points than n1. If (DX/DY) is non zero then the both DX and X must be
identical within 1% of DX. If you have data sets with non identical
values of X you may create a set with identical values using the BIN
command. If the X values of 2 data sets are not quite identical. You may
force TOPDRAWER to multiply them by setting DX for the data 100 times
greater than the difference in X or by setting CHECK=OFF
15.49.3 ERROR
ERROR=OFF excludes the errors from the FIT in the computation.
(Default:ERROR=ON)
15.49.4 FIT
Specifies that the data set is to be multiplied by the last FIT.
See:Command FIT.
15.49.5 LIMITED
You may specify the limits over which the histograms are to be multiplied.
If you specify the Y or Z limits, then all data that contains values
inside these limits will be multiplied. For example if you
MULTIPLY 1 to 2 LIMITED FROM Y=10 to Y=11
But data set 1 contains the followind data:
1,0; 2,10; 3,0; 4,11; 5,0
Points 2 to 4 inclusive will be multiplied, and only points 1 and 5 will
be omitted.
15.49.6 LOG
If LOG is specified then the result of the command is typed on your
terminal.
15.49.7 VECTOR
The DX,DY,DZ's will be cross multiplied together assuming they form a
vector. The X,Y,Z are not changed, and they should match for both input
data sets.
15.49.8 WEIGHT-EWEIGHT
WEIGHT=n specifies a weighting factor to multiply the data by before
adding or subtracting it. EWEIGHT=n specifies the error on WEIGHT. This
option must precede the data set number.
15.49.9 Notes
The new value is Y3=Y1*Y2. The errors (DY) are treated as if the data
sets are uncorrelated. DY3=Y3*SQRT((DY1/Y1)**2+(DY2/Y2)**2)
See:Command ADD,DIVIDE.
15.50 NEW_FRAME
NEW [FRAME|PLOT] [RESET] [ALIAS=alias] "Comment about plot"
Starts a new picture. Untreated points are PLOTTED before going on. The
old data points are retained until new ones are read. Parameters are
returned to the default values. If the plot device is interactive and you
are executing commands inside a file the program prompts:
PAUSE:
You press the "Return" key to start the next plot. If instead of "return"
you type in STOP, TOPDRAWER will stop executing the input file and return
to command level. You can also type EXIT, QUIT, HALT, END, or Ctrl_Z
instead of STOP.
If you press Ctrl_C then TOPDRAWER will skip input until another STOP
command is encountered, or the file ends. Pressing Ctrl_C twice rapidly
in succession will abort all file input. Pressing Ctrl_C twice rapidly in
succession again will cause the program to ask you if you wish to abort.
15.50.1 ALIAS
Each picture is given the name PICT001, PICT002 etc., but they may be
given an alias name. If the name is "" then name is Plot0001, Plot002 ...
15.50.2 Comment
The "Comment on plot" is typed on your terminal, or written to the log
file.
15.50.3 RESET
This option resets all PERMANENT options to their original defaults. For
example you have:
TD:SET LIM FROM 1,2 TO 3,4 PERMANENT
The RESET option will set them back to the default of no limits.
note
The STORAGE is not reset back to the default, and the existing data is not
modified.
15.51 NDU
This set the value of the negative error on U.
See command X.
15.52 NDV
This set the value of the negative error on V.
See command V.
15.53 NDW
This set the value of the negative error on W.
See command X.
15.54 NDX
This set the value of the negative error on X.
See command X.
15.55 NDY
This set the value of the negative error on Y.
See command X.
15.56 NDZ
This set the value of the negative error on Z.
See command X.
15.57 PAUSE
{PAUSE|WAIT} ['String'] [FOR n]
This causes TOPDRAWER type the string and PAUSE. This only works in a
file or inside a repeat block. You press the "Return" key to continue.
If instead of "return" you type in STOP, TOPDRAWER will stop executing the
input file or repeat block and return to command level. You can also type
EXIT, QUIT, HALT, END, or Ctrl_Z instead of STOP. You may also use SET
and SHOW commands while paused.
15.57.1 FOR
If FOR n is specified then TOPDRAWER will wait for n seconds, then resume
normal execution. n may be in the range 0 to 200.
(Default:10)
example
TD:REPEAT "NEW;SET HIST NEXT;HIST;WAIT FOR 10" 10
Gets the next histogram, plots it, then waits for 10 seconds before
plotting the next one.
15.58 PLOT
Plots the data as a series of points or symbols
PLOT [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]] [AXES|GRID] [OUTLINE] [TABLE]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[CURSOR] ]
[TITLE[=ON|OFF]]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]
[[NO]SYMBOL[=sym]] [SIZE=n]
[[X|Y|X]ERRORS[=ON|OFF]]
[FILL[=ON|OFF]]
Data plot options
[VECTOR[=ON|OFF]]
Mesh (scatter) plot options
[[NO]RANDOM[=n]] [VARIABLE[=ON|OFF]] [COUNTS]
Non data options
[OUTLINE] [AXES] [GRID] [GRID]
The data points are plotted as a series of symbols with error bars. The
options AXES, OUTLINE, and GRID allow you to add specified elements to a
plot. TABLE plots the actual values for the data as a set of numbers.
15.58.1 Options
1. AXES - Plots axes (if enabled). You may specify where to draw
the ticks.
2. GRID - Plots a grid with specified locations.
3. COUNTS - Controls the number of symbols/bin for a scatter plot
4. EXPAND - Sets the limits so the specified set fills the window
5. FILL - Fills in the symbols that are plotted.
6. INTENSITY - Sets the intensity of the plot
7. LIMITED - Limits the plot to a specified range of X,Y,Z
8. [X|Y|Z]ERRORS=OFF - Disables error bars.
9. RANDOM - Controls the number of symbols/bin for a scatter plot
10. OUTLINE - Draws an outline around the plot (if enabled)
11. SETS - Selects the data sets to plot
12. SLICES - Selects the mesh data points to plot in 2-d.
13. [NO]SYMBOL - Selects the SYMBOL to use when plotting.
14. SIZE - Selects the symbol size.
15. TABLE - Plots the values of the data points as numbers.
16. VARIABLE - Enables symbol sizes proportional to the value for
scatter plots.
17. VECTOR - Plots data as a vector field. (DX,DY,DZ)=vector
18. WHITE... - Selects the color of the plot.
19. SOLID... - Selects the texture of the plot (error bars)
15.58.2 AXES|GRID
PLOT {AXES|GRID} [AT [x [y [z]]]] [[TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y|Z]
[[LABELS|TICKS] [SHORT|LONG] [n1,n2,n3.....] [FROM n TO n BY n N n]
[FFORMAT|GFORMAT|EFORMAT|YERS |MONTHS|DAYS|TIME]]
Puts Axes and grid on the plot, but does not plot points. This command is
not usually necessary as axes are added to the picture when the first
PLOT, HISTOGRAM, or JOIN command is executed. If you use this command
before a PLOT, HISTOGRAM or JOIN command, then the automatic axes are not
produced. The limits of the axes are determined either from the existing
data or from the the SET LIMITS command, or by the LIMITED options. The
format of the axes is determined by the SET AXES command. The origin of
the axes may be specified after the option AT.
This command is mainly useful for special graphs where 2 sets of axes
with different scales are needed. This is also used to plot axes on a 3
dimensional plot where x,y,z specify the origin of the axes. 3-d plots do
not automatically produce axes, so you must use the PLOT AXES command.
The origin may also be specified by the command SET THREE. If not
already specified by SET AXES, LABELS, or TICKS commands, the color,
texture, and intensity options will be used in plotting the axes.
15.58.2.1 AT - This allows you specify the data X,Y,Z at which the axis
is plotted.
15.58.2.2 FROM|TO|BY|N - You may specify a range of ticks with
FROM,TO,BY,N. You may specify any 3.
example
TD:PLOT AXES X FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2
or...
TD:PLOT AXES X FROM 1 BY 2 N=5
Draws ticks at 1,3,5,7, and 9.
15.58.2.3 GRID - If specified without the option AXES then a GRID is
plotted. The grid must be ON to be plotted. See SET GRID. If AXES is
specified, then both are plotted if the GRID is ON. Grid lines or symbols
are plotted only for long ticks.
example
TD:SET GRID ON
TD:PLOT AXES Y 0 X 2,4,6,8 ticks 1,3,5,7,9
The grid is plotted at ticks 2,4,6,8 on the X and 0 on the Y. An axes is
also plotted with labels at X=2,4,6,8 Y=0, and short ticks at X=1,3,5,7,9.
TD:PLOT GRID Y 0 X 2,4,6,8
Only a grid is plotted.
15.58.2.4 HIDE - Controls whether hidden lines are drawn for a 3-d axes
and grid. HIDE=OFF draws the hidden lines, while HIDE=ON omits them.
This assumes that the axes are drawn in the normal position behind the
plot. It may not work properly for other positions. You must specify
which axes are to be plotted.
(Default:HIDE=OFF)
example
For example histogram a mesh with hidden axes:
TD:HISTOGRAM ( Hist mesh data)
TD:PLOT AXES X Y Z HIDE ( Now plot only visible portion of axes)
15.58.2.5 TOP... - Produces only a single axes at the TOP according to
n1,n2.... You may also produce the axes to the LEFT,RIGHT, or BOTTOM.
For 1-d plot X produces both TOP and BOTTOM axes, Y produces both LEFT and
RIGHT, while Z produces only TOP. On 3-d plots they produce X,Y, or Z
axes. The axes are not produced if disabled by the SET AXES command.
After this option the tick values are assumed to be LABELS LONG.
15.58.2.6 LABEL|TICK - LABEL selects long ticks with labels. TICKS
selects short ticks without labels. Labels or ticks are not produced if
disabled by the SET LABELS or SET TICKS command.
15.58.2.7 LIMITED - If this option is used it may be used to specify the
length of the axis, with respect to the data.
15.58.2.8 LONG|SHORT - Selects either long or short ticks. This must be
used after the LABEL or TICK command it modifies.
15.58.2.9 FORMATS... - These determine the number format. They are
analogous to FORTRAN formats.
1. FFORMAT - Numbers are written as nn.nnn or nn The number of
digits to the right or left of the decimal point is determined by
the data. All labels for a selected axis are written with the
same number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
2. GFORMAT - Numbers are written as either F or E format depending
on the range. For example if you specify labels from 0 to 1 by
.25 they are written as. 0,0.25,0.5,1
3. EFORMAT - Labels are written as n.nn with an exponent power of
10.
4. YEARS - Only the year is written
5. MONTHS - The month is written
6. DAYS - The day of the month is written
7. TIME - The time is written.
8. DATE - The date is written in the format dd-mmm-yyyy.
(Default:GFORMAT)
NOTE
If the format is not G,F,or E then SMALL ticks are not reproduced for
labels. This allows you to place the label in any location without any
ticks.
15.58.2.10 N1... - These select the tick/label locations. If omitted
then a set of default ticks and labels are chosen. These are selected
according to the SET LABELS and SET TICKS commands.
15.58.2.11 Restrictions - You may not specify more than 200 total ticks
at one time. If you need more than 200 ticks you need to plot AXES
several times.
example
TD:PLOT AXES X FROM 1 TO 10 by 0.002
generates 500 ticks, and is not allowed.
15.58.2.12 Examples -
example
TD:PLOT AXES
Plot all axes with the current defaults.
TD:PLOT AXES X
Produces default TOP and BOTTOM axes.
TD:PLOT AXES X LABELS 1,2,3,4 TICKS 1.5,2.5,3.5
Produces labels at 1,2.. and short ticks at 1.5,...
TD:PLOT AXES RIGHT EFORMAT LABELS 1,2,3,4 TICKS LONG 1.5,2.5,3.5
Produces the same labels, but in exponential format with long ticks in
between the labels.
TD:PLOT AXES BOTTOM LABELS 1,2,3 TOP 1.5,2.5
Produces labels with long ticks on the top and bottom of the plot. The
labels are at different locations.
TD:PLOT AXES X LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=5 TO X=11 LABELS 1,5,11
This plots an X axis from X=1 to 11 Y=5 with labeled ticks at 1,5,11.
15.58.3 COUNTS
This sets the number of DOTS=ZMAX-ZMIN. This is for data that consists of
counts versus X,Y. ZMIN,ZMAX are either automatically set by the data
set, or by the SET LIMITS command.
15.58.4 CYCLE
When plotting more than 1 data set, CYCLE causes the line symbol, texture,
color, and width to vary from one plot to the next. The cycle table is
set by the SET CYCLE command. If you have specified either symbol,
texture, color or width it overrides the cycle values.
When doing a scatter plot of a mesh, CYCLE causes the symbol, line color
and width to vary according to the cycle table.
When plotting a mesh table the color and width of each number will vary
according to the CYCLE TABLE.
15.58.5 EXPAND
Sets the limits so that the selected data expands to fill the window.
This has no effect unless POINTS, SETS, SLICES are specified or the limits
on MESH data have been set by a SET LIMITS command.
See:SET MODE
15.58.6 FILL
Fills the symbols to make them "more solid". You will have to use the
command SET FILL to achieve the desired effect. Many symbols can not be
filled properly, so you must just try until you find a satisfactory one.
Of the normal ASCII character set the "0O8SZ$" look pretty good when
filled. The centered symbol 1o, 2o, 6o, 8o look good when filled. 3o and
4o look bad when filled, while the rest to not fill at all.
15.58.7 INTENSITY
INTENSITY=n sets line intensity or width (1-5).
15.58.8 LIMITED
This plots only those data points that fall within the specified X,Y,Z
limits. If no limits are specified, then the limits used are those set by
the SET LIMIT command. This option has no effect on the density of dots
or symbol size. If a singe axis is plotted, then the limits determine the
location and length of the axis.
example
TD:PLOT LIMITED FROM 1,2,3 TO 4,5,6
Only points where 1<=X<=4 2<=Y<=5 3<=X<=6 are plotted.
example
TD:PLOT LIMITED FROM Z=.5 to Z=10
Only points where 0.5<=Z<=10 are plotted.
TD:PLOT LIMITED FROM Y=.01
Only points where 0.01<=Y are plotted.
example
TD:PLOT LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR
The cross hair cursor appears on the screen. You move it to the lower X,Y
and press the space bar. Then move it to the upper X,Y and press the
space bar again. The points plotted will lie within the limits you set.
15.58.9 ERRORS
This selects plots with or without error bars. ERRORS=OFF plots without
any errors, while XERRORS=OFF only omits the X error bars. Similarly
YERRORS=OFF or ZERRORS=OFF omit the Y or Z error bars.
(Default:ERRORS=ON)
If you wish to modify the appearance of the error bars see the command:
SET BAR. This modifies the size of the bar at the end of the errors.
If the negative error bars are defined they are subtracted from the data.
15.58.10 RANDOM
RANDOM=n - Sets the maximum number of points per bin for a scatter plot
(3-d) If RANDOM is not specified The number of points in a bin is the
value in the bin-Zmin+1. The default RANDOM is limited to the range 1 to
10. If Zmax is less than 1.0 then the default RANDOM is set to 5. No
points are produced when the data equals ZMIN. Zmin for a scatter plot is
zero unless set by a SET LIMITS command.
If the contents of the bins range from 0 to 100 and RANDOM=10, Then each
dot represents the value 10. Any bin with values less than or equal to 0
will have no points plotted. 0.00001 to 10.0 will get 1 dot, 10.00001 to
20 will have 2 dots and so on.
If the Z axis is logarithmic then the number of points will be
proportional to ALOG10(Z)-ALOG10(ZMIN).
NORANDOM modifies a scatter plot so that only one point is plotted in the
center of each bin. This option should be used with either the option
LIMITED or VARIABLE.
15.58.11 SOLID...
Selects the texture of the plot. This doesn not change the plotted
symbol. Error bars may be drawn as dotted or dashed.
15.58.12 LINES|ROWS
For 3-d plots specifies which lines or rows of the mesh data to list.
15.58.13 OUTLINE
Plots the outline around the plot. Sections of the outline which are
disabled by the SET OUTLINE are not plotted. If not already specified by
SET AXES, or OUTLINE commands, the color, and intensity may be specified
by the PLOT OUTLINE command.
15.58.14 POINTS|COLUMNS
Specifies the range of points or the colums of a mesh to use. For 3-d
this is the range of column numbers.
15.58.15 SETS
This selects the data set to plot. The data must be broken up into sets
using the data set command, for this option to work properly. If n2 is
omitted it is assumed to be n1. You may specify the data set number or
the options FIRST,LAST.
15.58.16 SLICES
This scatter plots either a single slice or several slices from mesh data.
If THREE is OFF the first X,Y,Z determines the view along either the X,Y,
or Z axis. See HISTOGRAM for more details.
15.58.17 SYMBOL
SYMBOL=sym specifies the symbol to use for plotting data. Any legal UGSYS
symbol may be used. Points that do not already have a symbol are normally
plotted using the default symbol (See:Command SET SYMBOL). The symbol you
specify is used instead of the default. You may change the color and
intensity of a symbol, but it may not have a changed texture. You can not
plot symbols dotted or dashed.
NOSYMBOL specifies that all points are plotted with the default symbol, or
the selected SYMBOL instead of the symbol assigned to each point.
If you want a centered symbol use 0o, 1o, 2o, 3o, 4o, 5o, 6o, 7o, 8o, or
9o. Some characters from the ASCII character set are also suitable.
"08OXNSYZ$*" are all possible characters which are centered and reasonably
symmetrical. Lower case characters are too far below the center of the
point.
15.58.18 SIZE
SIZE=n is the size of the symbol to plot. If unspecified the default size
is used. See:Command SET SYMBOL.
15.58.19 TABLE
Options
PLOT TABLE [AT] [ABSOLUTE] [DATA] [VALUE] [TOP] [OFFSET=n|
[CURSOR]]
regular data points, the value of the dependent variable (Z or Y) is drawn
along the X axis as a number at the angle -90 degrees.
Mesh data is plotted as a table of numbers centered on the mesh points,
The number is plotted horizontally.
The size of the numbers is adjusted to fit within the available space with
a maximum size equal to the label size. You may select the size by using
the SIZE=n option.
Options
1. OFFSET=n moves the table up or down by the selected offset.
Normally it is specified in inches from the bottom data axis.
2. DATA - The offset is specified in data units.
3. VALUE - The offset is from the value of the data point.
4. TOP - The offset is down from the top data axis.
5. CURSOR - The cursor is used to select the offset.
6. ABSOLUTE - The offset is an absolute value from the bottom of the
window.
15.58.20 VARIABLE
This modifies scatter plots so that the size of the symbol is proportional
to Z-ZMIN. Normally this is used with the options SIZE, NORANDOM, and
VARIABLE.
15.58.21 VECTOR
This plots regular data as a vector field. Each data point is plotted as
an arrow with the tail located as (X,Y[,Z]) and the head at
(X+DX,Y+DY[,Z+DZ]). The arrow head has a width equal to the BAR size.
15.58.22 WHITE...
WHITE, RED, BLUE, GREEN, YELLOW, CYAN, or MAGENTA sets the line color.
15.58.23 3-d
Mesh data produces a scatter plot if THREE is off and the dependent axis
is Z. If the dependent axis is Y or X then a series of slices are plotted
of mesh data. The scatter plot is truncated with zero dots for data equal
to ZMIN, and the maximum number of dots at ZMAX. The options SYMBOL,
DOTS, COUNTS, NORANDOM, and VARIABLE are used to control the look of the
scatter plot. In addition by setting the Z limits and using the LIMITED
option you can control which data is plotted. If the dependent axis is
not correct for the desired type of plot use the SWAP command to change
them.
Example
TD:PLOT SYMBOL=1O SIZE=10 NORANDOM VARIABLE
Plots the selected symbol in varying sizes. It is 1.0" at ZMAX and
nothing is plotted at ZMIN.
TD:SET LIM ZMAX=4; PLOT BLUE LIMITED
or...
TD:PLOT BLUE LIMITED TO Z=4
TD:SET LIM ZMIN=4; PLOT RED LIMITED
or...
TD:PLOT RED LIMITED FROM Z=4.0001
Points Z=4 and lower are plotted in BLUE. Points above 4 are RED.
The default for PLOT is THREE off.
15.59 PROJECT
PROJECT [ADD|AVERAGE] [INTEGRATE[=ON|OFF]] [SPLIT[=ON|OFF]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [SELECT="name"] {X|Y|Z}=[v|
FROM v1TOv2[BYv3|N=n]]} [...] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]]
Forms 1 or more projections of mesh data parallel to one of the axes. DX
is set to half of the bin width and Y is either the sum or average over
the mesh values. If available Z=the mean over the summed coordinate.
This forms the projections from all selected mesh data.
15.59.1 ADD|AVERAGE
ADD|AVERAGE specifies whether the data is added or averaged to form the
projection. The default is to ADD the data. This option must precede the
X,Y,Z that it modifies.
15.59.2 APPEND
If APPEND is specified, then a new data set is created, containing the
result and the original data is unchanged.
15.59.3 INTEGRATE
This produces a projection of the area under the curve. The projection is
the SUM( DY*Z ) if Y is specified. If AVERAGE is also specified then the
projections is divided by the SUM( DY ). This option must precede the
X,Y,Z that it modifies.
15.59.4 SPLIT
SPLIT=ON splits channels to preserve the total sum over the projections.
For example X channels run from 0 to 1, 1 to 2 ... 9 to 10.
TD:PROJECT X FROM 0 TO 10 BY 2.5 Will produce 4 projections, but the
sum over all projections will not be equal to the original sum.
TD:PROJECT SPLIT X FROM 0 TO 10 BY 2.5
Produces a set of projections and preserves the sum.
(Default:SPLIT=OFF)
15.59.5 X|Y|Z
This specifies the axis to project along. If you specify v then only the
row/column corresponding to v is projected. If specified v1 and v2 may
select a range of values to project. If no values are specified then the
entire mesh is projected. If BY=v3 is specified then a series of
projections are made from v1 to v2 with a width of v3. If N=n is
specified then the range from v1 to v2 is split into n equal intervals.
You need not use this command if you wish to histogram only a single
slice. The SLICE modifier on the HISTOGRAM, or JOIN commands may be used.
If X,Y, or Z are repeated then extra data sets are defined with
projections.
15.59.6 LOG
Each projection is listed on your terminal as it is formed.
15.59.7 SETS
This selects the data sets to project. If n2 is omitted it is assumed to
be n1. You may specify the data set number or the options FIRST,LAST.
All mesh data between n1 and n2 are projected.
15.59.8 Examples
You read in a mesh of X,Y vs Z.
TD:PROJECT Y FROM 5 TO 10
Projects the Y slices corresponding to Y=5 to 10 onto the X axis, and 2-d
array of values is stored. The new array of values is the sum of all Z
values corresponding to the range of Y values. The mesh data is
destroyed.
TD:PROJECT Y FROM 5 TO 10 BY 2
Makes 3 projections from 5 to 7, 7 to 9, and 9 to 10
TD:PROJECT X Y APPEND
TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 2;HIST SET <SETS-1>;TITLE BOTTOM 'X axis'
TD:SET WINDOW X 2 of 2;HIST SET LAST;TITLE BOTTOM 'Y axis'
TD:DELETE SETS FROM <SET-1>
Projects both X and Y. The projection along the X axis is in data next to
last data set while along Y is in the last set. Both projections are then
histogrammed in separate windows. Finally the projections are deleted.
Note: This assumes only 1 mesh data set exists. If n mesh sets exist
then 2n projections will be formed.
TD:PROJECT X 1 2.5 X 3 5 X 6 10;HIST
Projects 3 different bands of data along the X axis. All 3 projections
are then histogrammed.
15.60 READ
READ POINTS - Reads in data to be plotted
READ MESH - Reads in 3-d data to be plotted
15.60.1 POINTS
READ POINTS [APPEND=ON|OFF]] [SET]
This reads in data to be plotted. Once data is read, it is retained until
it has been used to generate a plot. It is then discarded when new data
is read. Normally you plot the data immediately after reading it. When
you start a new plot, the data last plotted is still available for
replotting. It is not discarded until new data is read. The option
APPEND allows you to append more data to the already plotted data. The
option SET starts a new data set. If you do not specify a symbol when
reading points, the default is determined by the last SET SYMBOL command.
This command is not necessary, since TOPDRAWER assumes that a number not
preceded by a command is automatically a point. If you wish to read data
with the symbol as the first item, you must use the READ DATA command, and
terminate the data with a blank line.
Values that are omitted are initially set to 0.0, or to the previous value
for that field.
When reading in data <XVALUE>, <DXVALUE>, <YVALUE>, ... are the X, DX, Y,
... values from the previous point.
15.60.1.1 Examples -
TD:SET ORDER X Y SYMBOL DX DY
TD:0 2
TD:1 4 1o 0.5 0.1
TD:2 8
Produces a data set with The following data:
X=0 Y=2 DX=0.0 DY=0.0 Symbol=""
X=1 Y=4 DX=0.5 DY=0.1 Symbol="1O"
X=2 Y=8 DX=0.5 DY=0.1 Symbol="1O"
TD:SET ORDER SYMBOL X Y
TD:READ POINTS 1O 1,1;
TD:2O 2.5,3.8
TD:(blank line to terminate)
15.60.2 MESH
READ MESH [BINS] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [WITH] [ERRORS[=ON|OFF]]
[FOR] {X|Y|Z}[=] N1,...,Nn [nn+1 ENDBINS]
[FOR] {X|Y|Z}[=]nn {X|Y|Z}[=] N1,...,Nn
[FOR] {X|Y|Z}[=]nn {X|Y|Z}[=] N1,...,Nn
................
[[FOR] {X|Y|Z}[=]nn ENDBINS]
or instead of N1,...Nn
[[FROM=n] [TO=n] [BY|WIDTH|STEP=n] [N=n]]
You must specify the points as an array of X,Y,Z values. If the attribute
BINS is selected you specify the edge of the bins rather than the center
of the bins and the optional END marks the end of the data.
15.60.2.1 APPEND - This creates a new data set containing mesh data. If
not specified or APPEND=OFF, all existing data will be deleted.
15.60.2.2 ERRORS - Storage is allocated for DX,DY,DZ. You must enter
the errors following the values for the dependent variable. The errors on
the independent variables are equal to the bin width.
example
READ MESH WITH ERRORS
FOR X=1,2,3
FOR Y=5
Z=5,.5,6,.2,7,.1
FOR Y=8
Z=9,.1,8,.1,7,.1
15.60.2.3 Bin_spacing - The points/bins must be strictly monotonically
spaced along the axes for good results.
If a histogram has unequal size bins, the last bin edge should be
specified with the option END. If this is not done, the bins may not be
properly represented. If bin edges are not specified, The bin edges are
half way between the points. Mesh points are assumed to be centered
within each bin.
15.60.2.4 Point_example - To Read in an array of 3 dimensional data
READ MESH
Y y1 y2 .... yn
X x1 Z z11 z21 ... zn1
X x2 Z z12 z22 ... zn2
...............
X xm Z z1m z2m ... znm
or...
READ MESH
FOR X= x1 x2 .... xn
FOR Y=y1 Z=z11 z21 ... zn1
FOR Y=y2 Z=z12 z22 ... zn2
...............
FOR Y=ym Z=z1m z2m ... znm
15.60.2.5 Bin_example - To Read in a 4 by 4 array of 3 dimensional data
READ MESH BINS
FOR Y=0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0
X=0.0 Z= 0 0 0 0
X=1.0 Z= 0 1 2 3
X=2.0 Z= 1 2 3 4
X=3.0 Z= 2 3 4 5
Is the same as:
READ MESH
FOR Y=0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5
X=0.5 Z= 0 0 0 0
X=1.5 Z= 0 1 2 3
X=2.5 Z= 1 2 3 4
X=3.5 Z= 2 3 4 5
or......
READ MESH BINS
FOR Y=0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 ENDBINS
X=0.0 Z= 0 0 0 0
X=1.0 Z= 0 1 2 3
X=2.0 Z= 1 2 3 4
X=3.0 Z= 2 3 4 5
X=4.0 ENDBINS
15.61 REPEAT
TD:REPEAT "commands" [n] [FAST[=ON|OFF]]
This repeats the specified commands n times. The commands must be
specified as a string. If n is omitted is assumed to be 9999. ENDREPEAT
terminates all current repeats, while RETURN terminates the current
repeat. You may nest up to 5 repeat commands. If FAST is specified only
the repeat command is journaled otherwise each repeat is journaled
separately. If you abort the repeat with CNTRL_C, or use the cursor
inside a repeat and it is in FAST mode, the journal file will not be
correct. The lexical V_REPEAT[n] is the repeat number
NOTE: The command SET FILE INPUT should not be used inside a repeat
block. The lines from the new file will not be executed until after the
repeat.
(Default:FAST=ON)
15.61.1 Examples
TD:SET WINDOW 1 of V_SETS
TD:REPEAT "HIST SET=V_WINDOW;SET WINDOW NEXT;" V_SETS
produces histograms of all currently available data sets.
TD:DEFINE VALUE THETA=0
TD:DEFINE COMMAND INCR="DEV VAL THETA=<V_THETA +1>;"
TD:DEFINE COMMAND LEND="IF THETA .GT. 180.1 ENDREPEAT"
TD:REPEAT "V_THETA,<SIN(V_THETA)>;INCR;LEND"
or...
TD:REPEAT "V_THETA,<SIN(V_THETA)>;INCR" 181
Produces a SINE function from 0 to 180 degrees in 1 degree steps. This
example breaks the command into small separate commands. This is not
really necessary since the total length of a command may be 256
characters.
TD:REPEAT "<V_REPEAT-1>,<SIN<V_REPEAT-1>>" 181
Also generates a sine function from 0 to 180 degrees, in a much faster
fashion.
15.61.2 Warning
NOTE
This command is very slow if FAST=OFF and JOURNALING is enabled.
15.62 RESTORE
RESTORE {DATA|FIT|HITOGRAMS} [options]
Restores the selected data, fit, or histograms.
15.62.1 DATA
RESTORE DATA [FILE=file_name] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]] [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [SELECT="name"]
Restores data from the specified file. If no file is specified TDSAVE.TDB
is assumed. If you have unplotted data then the new data is automatically
appended to the end of the current data as a new data set. The LOG option
types the number of points and sets of data restored. When restored the
data name is in lexical S_DATA_NAME.
15.62.1.1 APPEND - Normall the current data is deleted. If APPEND is
selected, the new data is sets are appended to the current ones.
15.62.1.2 CONFIRM - You are asked whether you wish to restore each set.
15.62.1.3 SELECT - If the data sets are named, you may select the data
set by name.
15.62.1.4 SETS - If the data file contains several sets of data you may
select which one you wish to restore.
TD:RESTORE DATA SET=5
Restores the 5'th data set from the file.
TD:RESTORE DATA SET 5 TO 8
Restores the 5'th through the 8'th data set from the file.
15.62.2 FIT
RESTORE FIT [FILE=file_name]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]]
Restore the current Topdrawer fit from a file. If no file is specified
TDFIT.TFB is assumed. The SAVE command is used to save a fit.
15.62.3 HISTOGRAMS
RESTORE HISTOGRAMS
[IDENT=[FROM] [n] [TO n]]
[FILE|SECTION=name]
[{FETCH|READ|INPUT]}]
[ADD|SUBTRACT|MULTIPLY|DIVIDE]
[AREA|DIRECTORY[="directory"]]
[RELATIVE=[=ON|OFF]] [SHARE=[=ON|OFF]]
[TReE[=ON|OFF]]
[IOFSET=n]
[APPEND]
[VERSION=n]
Restores histograms from files create by the HBOOK package. FETCH,READ
get histograms in the old HBOOK3 format. Normally you do not need to
specify FETCH or READ as TOPDRAWER uses the file type to determine the
operation needed to restore it.
15.62.3.1 Options -
1. AREA selects the directory of the disk file/global section. If
this is unspecified then the subdirectory on the file/global
section is assumed to be the same as specified by the previous
SET HIST AREA command.
2. FETCH is for histograms stored in machine dependent HBOOK3 format
by HSTORE. Either all histograms or 1 histogram ID may be
fetched.
3. FILE=file_name selects the file name or global section name for
the shared histograms. If FILE is not specified then it defaults
to HBOOK.BIN. If the filename is NONE then no file name is
selected.
4. IDENT Selects the ID of the histogram to get. If unspecified all
histograms are fetched.
5. INPUT gets histograms from a direct access file in HBOOK4 format.
This is the default.
NOTE Topdrawer checks the file and will try to figure out whether
to FETCH, READ, or INPUT the file.
6. READ is for the machine independent HBOOK3 format.
7. RELATIVE saves histograms in a relative file for faster access.
Otherwise a sequential file is used.
(Default:RELATIVE=OFF)
8. SECTION gets histograms from the specified global section. If
SECTION="" the current section is used. SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK
9. SHARE shares the file with other users. SHARE=OFF prohibits file
sharing.
(Default:SHARE=ON)
10. VERSION Selects the cycle (version number) of the histogram to
get. (INPUT only)
11. IOFSET is added to the hist ID when fetched. (INPUT only)
12. APPEND Sets IOFSET=largest hist ID.
13. ADD adds the new histograms to the current ones. Normally all in
the current directory are deleted. ADD works only with INPUT, or
with Global sections.
NOTE: If you have a large number of histograms resident, you may
not have enough memory to RESTORE ADD all at once. You may force
TOPDRAWER to add one at a time by:
RESTORE HISTOGRAM ADD ID FROM 1 TO 99999
14. SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE works in a similar fashion to ADD.
SUBTRACT subtracts the new histogram from the old one... These
do not work for HBOOK3 histograms.
15. TREE restores the entire directory tree. (INPUT/SECTION only) If
this is selected along with AREA it is possible to graft a file
resident directory tree to a new root.
15.63 SAVE
SAVE {DATA|FIT|HITOGRAMS} [options] This command saves things.
SAVE DATA saves the Topdrawer data in a binary format on disk.
SAVE HISTOGRAM saves foreign histograms on disk.
15.63.1 FIT
SAVE FIT [FILE=file_name]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]]
[NAME="name of data"]
Saves the current Topdrawer fit in a file. If no file is specified
TDFIT.TFB is assumed. The optional NAME is stored in the file as a
comment. The RESTORE command is used to get saved fit.
15.63.2 DATA
SAVE DATA [FILE=file_name]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]]
[NAME="name of data"]
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]]
Saves Topdrawer data in a file. If no file is specified TDSAVE.TDB is
assumed. By specifying the range of points, sets and so on you may select
which data is saved. The optional NAME is stored in the file as a
comment. APPEND adds the data to the end of an existing file.
The RESTORE command is used to get saved data.
NOTE: If the data contains NDX,NDY, or NDZ coordinates, it can not be
used with older verson of TD.
15.63.3 HISTOGRAMS
SAVE HISTOGRAMS
[FILE=file_name]
[IDENT=[FROM] [n] [TO n]]
[ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]]
[HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]]
[RELATIVE=[=ON|OFF]] [SHARE=[=ON|OFF]] [RECLENGTH[=n]]
[SELECT|NAME='hist_name']
[{WRITE|STORE}]
[UPDATE[=ON|OFF]]
[AREA|DIRECTORY[="directory"]]
[TReE[=ON|OFF]]
Saves the foreign histograms. Some options apply only to specific
histogram packages.
15.63.3.1 Options -
1. AREA|DIRECTORY selects the base directory of the disk file. If
this is unspecified then it is assumed. to be the same as
specified by the previous SET HIST AREA command.
2. ENTRIES selects only histograms with entries.
3. FILE=file_name selects the file name. If FILE is not specified
then it HBOOK.BIN. If the filename is NONE then no file name is
selected.
4. HISTOGRAM|MESH selects only regular histograms or scatter plots.
5. RECLENGTH specifies the record length for an RZ file.
(default:1024 Words)
6. RELATIVE saves histograms in a relative file for faster access.
Otherwise a sequential file is used. This works only for
HBOOK V4.10 on a VaX.
(Default:RELATIVE=OFF)
7. SELECT selects the name of the histograms to store.
8. SHARE shares the file with other users. SHARE=OFF prohibits file
sharing. This works only for HBOOK V4.10.
(Default:SHARE=ON)
9. UPDATE=ON saves histograms in an existing file.
UPDATE=OFF saves histograms in a new file.
10. TREE saves the entire directory tree. (OUTPUT,PUT only)
(Default:UPDATE=OFF)
15.64 SET
Sets options for plots. These options usually revert to the default when
a new plot is started.
15.64.1 Introduction
The set commands are used to set options. Most set commands set the
option for the duration of the current plot. When a NEW command is
issued, the options revert to the default. You may make the current
option the default by using the option PERMANENT. If no options are
specified for the set command, the options are set back to the original
default value.
For example you wish to do a series of plots with the same limits on the
X,Y scales. Normally TOPDRAWER sets the limits automatically according to
your data, so you use the command:
TD:SET LIMITS X FROM 0 TO 10 Y FROM 0.5 to 1.5 PERMANENT
which sets the limits permanently. When you have done the plots you wish
to revert to the original default:
TD:SET LIMITS
Now the limits are reset to automatic limits for the current plot only.
The next plot will have the PERMANENT limits. To have automatic limits
for all subsequent plots you must:
TD:SET LIMITS;SET LIMITS PERMANENT
After using a set command you may "see" what you have done with a SHOW
command. For each set command there is a SHOW command which shows the
current options. For example you may see the limits you have modified by:
TD:SHOW LIMITS
15.64.2 Options
1. ARROW - Sets default arrow format
2. AXES - Sets default axis
3. BAR - Sets size of ends of error bars and a break in error bars
4. BOX - Sets default box size
5. BLINK - Sets the BLINK attribute.
6. CARD - Maximum length of input lines
7. CHARACTER - The character set used
8. CIRCLE - Same as SET ELLIPSE
9. CLEAR - Selects deferred or immediate screen clearing
10. COLOR - Sets default color or pen number
11. Ctrl_Z - Enables or disables the Ctrl_Z key.
12. CYCLE - The color,width, texture to cycle through.
13. DATE - Set base date for date\time.
14. DEVICE - Chooses I/O device
15. DIAMOND - Sets default diamond size
16. DIGITS - Sets number of digits for show command.
17. ELLIPSE - Sets default ellipse size
18. ERRORS - Changes the output of errors
19. FILE - Selects files for input, output, and journaling.
20. FILL - Selects the fill style.
21. FLUSH - Sets automatic flush mode.
22. FONT - Chooses UGSYS character set
23. FORMAT - Format for input lines (256A1)
24. GRID - Specifies grid marks overlay plot
25. INTENSITY - Sets default intensity (line width)
26. LABELS - Sets defaults for numeric labels on axes
27. LIMITS - Sets X,Y,Z limits for plot (range of data to plot)
28. MODE - Set misc. functions
29. MONITOR - Set type of monitor plots
30. ORDER - Determines interpretation of input data
31. OUTLINE - Controls outline around plot
32. PATTERN - Sets the pattern for PATTERNED lines
33. PAUSE - Controls pause at end of plot
34. PEN - Selects the default pen or color to use in plotting.
35. POLAR - Selects polar coordinates.
36. PROMPT - Sets the prompt string.
37. REVISION - Sets the revision level (what features TD has)
38. SECONDARY - Controls the attributes of secondary contour lines.
39. SEGMENTS - Controls breaking the plot into segments
40. SHADOW - Sets 3-d plots to shadow plot to make the point location
more obvious.
41. SHIELD - Sets an area to be shielded so that no more plotting is
done there.
42. SCALE - Controls scale (log/linear...), and the number of default
labels and ticks.
43. SIZE - Defines size of screen or paper
44. STATISTICS - Sets the range of data to use in subsequent
lexicals.
45. STORAGE - Defines what is kept in storage
46. SYMBOL - Sets default symbol to plot
47. TEXTURE - Sets default line style (DOTTED,SOLID...)
48. THREE - Sets parameters for 3-dimensional plots
49. TICKS - Controls tick marks on axes
50. TITLE - Sets size of title
51. UNITS - Sets the units of the TEXT coordinates, and character
sizes.
52. WIDTH - Sets the line width or intensity
53. WINDOW - Defines the plotting area (labels may be outside area)
15.64.3 AREA
See:Command SET WINDOW
15.64.4 ARROW
SET ARROW [SIZE=n] [FLARE|FLAIR=n] [PERMANENT]
1. SIZE=n - length of arrow head in tenths of an inch. The units
may be modified by SET UNITS CHARACTER.
(Default:2)
2. FLARE=n - is ratio of the base to the height of the arrow head
(fatness).
(Default:0.2)
3. PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.
If no options are specified all parameters are set to the default.
15.64.5 AXES
Controls the presence or absence of each axes and sets the attributes of
the axis.
SET AXES|AXIS [INHIBIT|ENABLE] [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y|Z] [ON|OFF]
[FRONT[=[ON|OFF]]
[BOTH[=[ON|OFF]]
[THREE[=[ON|OFF]]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[PERMANENT]
Normally AXES are drawn at the first HIST, JOIN, BARGRAPH, PLOT, or PLOT
AXES command unless inhibited or turned off. To control individual
elements of the axes use:
SET TICKS, SET LABELS, SET OUTLINE, SET SCALES
15.64.5.1 Options -
1. INHIBIT|ENABLE - inhibits or enables the automatic axes
generation for the current plot or window. You may still draw
the outline and axes with the PLOT OUTLINE, PLOT AXES commands.
(Default:ENABLE)
2. ALL - enables axes for top, bottom, right and left.
3. TOP - enables an axis for the TOP of plot
4. BOTTOM - selects the axis for the bottom of the plot.
5. RIGHT - selects the axis for the right hand side
6. LEFT - selects the axis for the left hand side.
7. X,Y,Z - selects the axis to plot. For 2 dimensional plot X turns
on both top and bottom, Y turns on both right and left.
8. ON - allows drawing all three
9. OFF - prevents drawing outline, label and ticks. If an axis is
off then no space is allocated for either ticks or labels.
10. THREE - If on it then axes are plotted by default when 3-d plots
are made.
(Default:OFF)
11. FRONT - If on then 3-d axes are plotted in the front, for PHI>0
and in the back for PHI<0. This prevents them from interfering
with the plot.
(Default:OFF)
12. BOTH - If on then 3-d axes are plotted both in the front and
back.
(Default:OFF)
13. INTENSITY - Sets line intensity or width (0-5). 0 gets the
intensity from the SET INTENSITY command.
14. WHITE... - Sets the line color.
15. SOLID... - Sets the line texture.
(Default:SOLID) See:Command SET TEXTURE.
16. PERMANENT - Makes the current settings permanent from plot to
plot.
This acts on the current plot only a new SET AXES is required for each
plot or the options need to be made permanent. The command must be
followed by either a HIST, JOIN, BARGRAPH or PLOT command to be effective.
(Default:ALL ON)
15.64.5.2 Example -
TD:SET AXES ALL ON TOP OFF RIGHT OFF
This produces axes only on the left and bottom.
TD:SET AXES X ON Y ON Z OFF
This produces X,Y axes, but no Z axes on a 3 dimensional plot.
TD:SET AXES FRONT THREE PERMANENT
This automatically produces X,Y,Z axes for a 3 dimensional plot.
15.64.6 BAR
This sets options for error bars.
SET BAR [ALL|X|Y|Z] [BREAK=[n]] [SIZE=[n]] [SUPPRESS=[ON|OFF]] [PERMANENT]
15.64.6.1 ALL-X-Y-Z - ALL,X,Y,Z select the error bar to change. You may
set the bar size and break independently for X,Y, or Z errors.
(Default:ALL)
If the SIZE or BREAK are not specified they revert to the default value.
15.64.6.2 SIZE - SIZE=n in inches sets the half width of the bar at the
end of error bars. If n is negative n is the fraction of the symbol size
on the data point. If unspecified it is automatically set to 1/2 of the
symbol size.
In 3-D plots the bar always is perpendicular to the error and to the Z
axis. This should make the directions fairly easy to see.
(Default:0.1)
15.64.6.3 BREAK - BREAK=n in inches sets the size of a break in the
error bars at the symbol. When set to a non zero value the error bar
"breaks" at the symbol. Essentially it is not drawn for a distance n from
the center of the symbol. By setting this the error bar is not drawn
through the symbol. It is drawn only on either side of the symbol.
If n is negative n is the fraction of the symbol size for the data point.
If n is not specified it is assumed to be -1. This is ignored if there is
no symbol or SYMBOL=NONE.
(Default:0)
15.64.6.4 SUPPRESS - SUPPRESS does not the bar at the end of the error
bars when they are smaller than either the symbol size, or the BREAK size.
This is ignored if there is no symbol or SYMBOL=NONE.
(Default:OFF)
15.64.6.5 PERMANENT - PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new
default.
15.64.6.6 Examples -
example
TD:SET BAR SIZE=0.2 BREAK=-1.1 SUPPRESS
Sets all bars to 0.2 inches and break the error bar just outside the the
symbol by 10%. In addition any error bars smaller than 1.1 times the
symbol size are suppressed.
TD:SET BAR Z SIZE=0.0 X SIZE=0.1
Sets the bar to 0.0 inches for Z errors and to 0.1 for X errors. The Y
error remains at the current setting.
15.64.7 BOX
This sets the default size for boxes.
SET BOX [SIZE=dx[,dy]] [PERMANENT]
PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.
If dx is omitted it is set to the default. If dy is omitted it is the
same as dx.
15.64.8 BLINK
SET BLINK [ON|OFF]
Text or data plotted while this is on will blink. This will only work
with certain devices. The blink attrubute is reset to off at the
beginning of each new plot. If ON or OFF are omitted BLINK is set ON.
(Default:OFF)
15.64.9 CARD
This sets the number of columns per input line for non interactive input.
SET CARD|INPUT [LENGTH]=[length]
All data past the length is ignored The length must be in the range 20 to
256. See also SET FORMAT. This parameter remains the same when a new
plot is started.
(Default:256)
You should be careful when using this command. If you extend the input
line before extending the format, TOPDRAWER will expect multiple input
lines per command.
If length is omitted it is reset to the default value. For interactive
input on the VAX the length is 256 and it is independent of the set card
command.
15.64.10 CHARACTER
SET CHARACTER {TERMINATOR|SEPARATOR|SPECIAL|ALPHA|ILLEGAL|COMMENT |
ENDCOMMENT} "characters"
This redefines the input character set. You may not redefine the letters
"A" to "Z", the numbers "0" to "9", the period "." or the minus and plus
signs "-+". The current definitions are:
1. SEPARATORS = ",/="
2. TERMINATOR = ";"
3. SPECIAL = "@!#$%^&*~`{}|\[]"
4. COMMENT = "("
5. ENDCOMMENT = "("
6. ALPHA = "_"
7. ILLEGAL = all non printable characters.
Special characters may be imbedded inside an option, but may not be the
first character in an option.
15.64.11 CIRCLE
This sets the default size for circles.
SET CIRCLE [SIZE=dx[,dy]] [PERMANENT]
This is same as SET ELLIPSE
PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.
(Default:1.0)
If dx is omitted it is set to the default. If dy is omitted it is the
same as dx.
15.64.12 CLEAR
SET {CLEAR|ERASE} {DEFERRED|IMMEDIATE}
1. DEFERRED - After a CLEAR or NEW PLOT command the screen is not
cleared until data is plotted. In other words the current plot
remains on the screen until the new plot appears.
2. IMMEDIATE - The screen is cleared immediately after a CLEAR or
NEW PLOT command.
15.64.13 COLOR
SET COLOR [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[PERMANENT]
(Default:WHITE) This sets the default color of the display or the pen
number. This is effective only for the current plot, or until another SET
COLOR or SET PEN command. If PERMANENT is specified the current color is
the permanent default. See:Command SET PEN
If no options are specified it is set to the WHITE.
15.64.14 COMMAND
SET COMMAND [MAXSUBSTITUTION=n]
This sets the maximum number of command substitutions allowed on a single
line.
(Default:MAXSUBSTITUTIONS=1000)
15.64.15 Ctrl_Z
SE Ctrl_Z [ON|OFF]
Enables or disables the Ctrl_Z key as a means of stopping TOPDRAWER.
15.64.16 CYCLE
SET CYCLE [NUMBER=n] [ENTRY[=n]] [WIDTH|INTENSITY=n] [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|
GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|
DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] [SYMBOL=sym] [PERMANENT]
This selects a cycle of attributes to be used when the CYCLE option is
used with HISTOGRAM, JOIN, CONTOUR, or PLOT.
15.64.16.1 Options -
1. NUMBER selects the number of entries up to a maximum of 20
(Default:5)
2. ENTRY selects the cycle entry to change. If n is omitted the
next entry is selected. If no entry is specified then all
entries are set. ENTRY must follow the options you wish to
change.
3. PERMANENT saves the current settings as the default.
4. SYMBOL selects the symbol to use.
Once you select a color, texture, symbol, or width they remain in effect
until changed, or the next NEW command. If no options are selected, the
entries all revert back to the default values.
15.64.16.2 Examples -
TD:SET CYCLE WIDTH=3 ENTRY=3 RED ENTRY BLUE ENTRY GREEN
Will set entries 3 to 5 to colors RED, BLUE, GREEN and entry 3 is set to
WIDTH=3. All other attributes are unchanged.
TD:SET CYCLE SOLID WHITE
Will set all entries to SOLID WHITE.
15.64.16.3 Defaults -
The default is:
NUMBER=5
1. BLUE DOTS SYMBOL=0o
2. CYAN DOT DASH SYMBOL=1o
3. GREEN DASH SYMBOL=2o
4. YELLOW DAASH SYMBOL=3o
5. RED SOLID SYMBOL=4o
6. MAGNETA SOLID SYMBOL=5o
7. WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=6o
8. WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=7o
9. WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=8o
10. WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=9o
All others are WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=9o
15.64.17 DATE
SET DATE [YYYY\MM\DD] [MONTH=n] [YEAR=n] [DAY=n] [JANUARY,...,DECEMBER]
This sets the base date for date\time values. Date\time is normally
expressed in hours. However since it is only single precision it is
accurate to only 7 digits or about 1 day on the date 1900. If greater
accuracy is needed you may set the base date to a value within the range
of time you need to express. If you do not specify any options the base
date is reset to the original default.
(Default:0\1\1)
Options YEAR,MONTH, or DAY allow you to reset just the selected value.
Instead of MONTH=3 you may also specify MARCH. All 3 may be modified
using the standard YEAR\MONTH\DAY notation.
15.64.18 DEVICE
This selects the unified graphics device and sets options back to default
values. This is equivalent to starting a new plot on another device.
SET DEVICE [name] ["option_string"]
[SIDEWAYS|ROTATED|ORIENTATION=n]
[LANDSCAPE|PORTRAIT]
[COlOR[=ON|OFF]
[FILE|OUTPUT|DDNAME=filename|CHANNEL=dev:]
[INTERACTIVE|SEQUENTIAL|SLAVE]
[ADD|UNIT=n]
[IDENT=aaaa] [NUMBER=nnnn] [PERMANENT] [WIDTH=n] [HEIGHT=n] [REVERSE]
This selects the device name. It is modified by the option_string. If
omitted the default is used. See:PERMANENT.
(Interactive Default:TEK)
(Batch Default:PS)
15.64.18.1 Names -
1. TEST - null device
2. CALCOMP - Calcomp plotters
3. PRINTRONIX - Printronix printer plotter
4. QMS-1200 - QMS Lasergrafix 1200 laser printer
5. EXCL - Talaris 1590 printer
6. REGIS - Dec VT-24x, Dec GIGI, and other devices supporting REGIS
protocol.
7. SIXEL - Dec VT-240, LN-03, LA-50, LA-100 , Talaris 1590 and any
other device using SIXEL graphics.
8. TEKTRONIX - Tektronix 4010/4014 terminals or emulators. This
includes: Dec VT-240, Terminals with retrographics, Selanar
100XL, Visual 102, CIT-467, Talaris 1590, Falco, and Macintosh
with VERSATERM.
9. VERSATEK - Versatek printer/plotter
10. TEKEMUL - Tektronix 4010/4014 emulators, using the SLAC driver.
11. TEK4027 - Tektronix 4027 color terminal
12. GKS - Interface To DEC GKS package
13. GRINNELL - Grinnell graphics device
14. IMAGEN - Imagen laser printer
15. POSTSCRIPT - Postscript printer
16. GPOSTSCRIPT - Postscript driver using DEC-GKS
17. EPS - Encapsulate postscript driver using DEC-GKS
18. HPGL - Hewlett packard plotters
19. XWINDOW - Vax station using DECwindows.
Note: Some of these device drivers may not be available. You will get an
error message if they do not exist.
15.64.18.2 COLOR - Selects the DEC GKS color driver rather than the
Monochrome driver.
15.64.18.3 LANDSCAPE-PORTRAIT -
LANDSCAPE or PORTRAIT select the orientation of the plot on paper, for GKS
printer drivers. This applies to Gpostscript, EPS, QMS1200, EXCL,
Versatek, IMAGEN and all DEC-GKS drivers that support page orientation.
This applies only to the selected driver, and not to any additional
drivers selected, unlike the SIDEWAYS and ORIENTATION commands.
It does not apply to workstation windows or TEKtronix graphics. To rotate
them use the SIDEWAYS or ORIENTATION option.
It will be applied in addition to the ORIENTATION option. The final
rotation will be the sum of the 2 rotations applied.
(Default:LANDSCAPE)
15.64.18.4 TEST - This is a null device. You must specify the device
driver in the "option_string".
15.64.18.5 CALCOMP -
1. SMALL CALCOMP - 10inch Calcomp
2. LARGE CALCOMP
15.64.18.6 EXCL - This if for laser printers using Talaris extended
control language (EXCL). This includes the Talaris 1590 printstation.
This device is capable of intensity (line width) variation, and erasing
data. The line width is the intensity/150 inches. It produces a plot
11.0 by 8.5 inches in size with 0.25 inch margins.
The advantage of this driver over TEK4010 on the Talaris is the number of
line widths, and the correct reproduction of scatter plots. The
disadvantage is that the file size is larger, and you can not send the
file to a TEK-4010 emulator, to see the contents.
Warning
Previously it was stated that this will work on LN-03+. Due to a
misunderstanding this is not true. For LN-03 printers use SIXELS or
TEK-4010 for LN-03+.
15.64.18.6.1 Options - The following options may be specified inside the
string:
1. DM=n - The default margin in cm. (Default:0.25in.)
2. TM=n - The top margin in cm. (Default:DM)
3. LM=n - The left margin in cm. (Default:DM)
4. BM=n - The bottom margin in cm. (Default:DM)
5. RM=n - The right margin in cm. (Default:DM) If the margins are
set to 0, then no margin, or orientation commands are in the
output file.
6. PENLIST=n1n2n3n4n5 - maps penwidths to number of pixels. Setting
is number from 01 to 99. 1 pixel=0.0033 in. If the penwidth is
00 then the default is assumed. (Default:0204060810)
7. WIDTH=size - The width of the paper in cm. (Default:8.5in.)
8. LENGTH=size - The length of the paper in cm. (Default:11.0in.)
9. inches - The WIDTH/LENGTH/margins must be expressed in inches
rather than cm.
10. ROTAXIS - Rotates the axis from landscape to portrait.
15.64.18.6.2 Examples -
TD:SET DEVICE EXCL
Selects the EXCL driver.
TD:SET DEVICE EXCL "DM=1,LM=1.5,inches,ROTAXIS"
Selects the EXCL driver, and sets 1 inch margins on the left,top, and
bottom, with 1.5in. margins on the left. The plot will be produced on
8.5x11 paper with portrait orientation.
TD:SET DEVICE EXCL "DM=.375,PENLIST=0202020404"
Produces plots approximately the same as
TD:SET DEVICE TEK "TAL1590" SEQUENTIAL
15.64.18.7 GKS - This is an interface to the DEC GKS package.
It allows access to a whole class of devices available through DEC GKS.
15.64.18.7.1 Options -
Options
1. WSTYPE=nnn - Selects the DEC GKS workstation If you do not
specify a WSTYPE then the logical GKS$WSTYPE is used to define
the work station. Normally you specify the workstation name.
2. ERRLUN - Selects an output logical unit for GKS messages
(Default:6)
3. OUTLUN - Selects an output logical unit for GKS files. You
normally do not specify this.
4. WIDTH=n.n - Window width in cm (Default:25.4 (10 inches))
5. HEIGHT=n.n - Window height in cm (Default:20.32 (8 inches))
6. XSCREEN=n.n - X Location of lower left corner of window in cm
(Default:0)
7. YSCREEN=n.n - Y Location of lower left corner of window in cm
(Default:0)
8. XSIZE - Actual physical X size of screen if known (Default: size
reported by GKS or 10 inches for metafile). Normally you do not
need to set this.
9. YSIZE - Actual physical Y size of screen if known (Default: size
reported by GKS or 8 inches for metafile). If XSIZE is picked,
but Y is not then the YSIZE is assumed to scale as the selected
XSIZE
10. REVERSE - Sets background to black with white foreground.
11. color=rrggbb - Specifies the mixture of red,green,blue to mix to
obtain the desired color. Each value may vary from 0 to 99. The
default colors are:
A. BLACK=008900
B. WHITE=999999
C. RED=992020
D. GREEN=009900
E. BLUE=202099
F. YELLOW=998000
G. MAGENTA=992099
H. CYAN=008000
12. DDNAME=filename - Specifies the output file name.
13. PENLIST=n1n2n3n4n5 - maps penwidths to .01 cm. from 01 to 99.
(Default:PENLIST=0103050709) 01 is the minimum pen width.
If both OUTLUN and DDNAME are unspecified then logical GKS$CONID is used
to specify the output device.
15.64.18.7.2 Devices - In addition a whole set of devices are defined to
interface through DEC GKS. You may specify these instead of GKS. If it
is both sequential an interactive you may specify SEQUENTIAL. Sequential
output is sent to the default file if you have not specified a file name
(FILE=xxxx). These are:
1. METAFILE WSTYPE=2 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.AGM
2. CGM WSTYPE=7 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.CGM
3. VT125 WSTYPE=11 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.SIX
4. VT125BW WSTYPE=12 (INTERACTIVE)
5. VT240 WSTYPE=13 - VT-240 color (INTERACTIVE)
6. VT240BW WSTYPE=14 - VT-240 in Black and white mode (INTERACTIVE)
7. LCP01 WSTYPE=15 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.SIX
8. VT330 WSTYPE=16 (INTERACTIVE)
9. VT340 WSTYPE=17 (INTERACTIVE)
10. VSXXX WSTYPE=41 - A variety of VAX stations using UIS
(INTERACTIVE)
11. LVP16A WSTYPE=51 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.SIX
12. LVP16B WSTYPE=52 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.SIX
13. HP7550 WSTYPE=53 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.HP
14. HP7580 WSTYPE=54 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.HP
15. HP7585 WSTYPE=56 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.HP
16. GPOSTSCRIPT WSTYPE=61 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.PS
17. EPS WSTYPE=65 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.EPS
18. TEK4107 WSTYPE=83 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.TEK
19. TEK4207 WSTYPE=83 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.TEK
20. TEK4128 WSTYPE=85 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.TEK
21. TEK4129 WSTYPE=85 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.TEK
22. LJ250 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.LJ
23. LJ250_180DPI (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.LJ
24. XWINDOW WSTYPE=211 - X or (DEC) window (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE)
This uses the logical DECW$DISPLAY to specify the connection. To
do this you must:
$ DEFINE DECW$DISPLAY nodename::0.0
For example you may select interactive XWINDOWS (DEC windows) by:
TD:SET DEVICE XWINDOW To select VT125 output to a file named
"VT125.PLOT"
TD:SET DEVICE VT125 SEQUENTIAL FILE=VT125.PLOT
15.64.18.7.3 Examples -
TD:SET DEVICE TEK4014
For a Tektronix 4014.
TD:SET DEVICE SEQUENTIAL TEK4010 DDNAME=TEK4014.PLOT
For a Tektronix 4014 plot sent to a file.
TD:SET DEVICE TEK4010 DDNAME=TKA0:
For a Tektronix 4014 plot sent to a TEK-4014 window on a VAXstation.
TD:SET DEVICE VSX "RED=990000,GREEN=009900,BLUE=009900'
For a plot on a VAXstation with "pure" colors.
TD:SET DEVICE HP7585
For a Hewlett Packard 7578 plotter
15.64.18.7.4 Assignments - If you wish to default to GKS then you should
DEFINE PLOT_TERM "UGGKSWM,[options]"
15.64.18.8 GRINNELL - This is a slave raster graphics device only.
Options are:
1. CHANNEL=<value> - Identification of I/O controller (Default:GRA0)
2. UNITS=<value> - Selects the monitors to use. This is sum of the
display units (1,2,4...). (Default:1)
3. BWTYPE=<value> - Selects black and white monitor type.
(Default:1)
1 = 1 memory plane no look-up
2 = 2 memory planes no look-up
3 = 2 memory planew with look-up
4. COLTYPE=<value> - Selects the type of color monitor.
1 = 4 memory planes (7 colors 2 levels)
2 = 4 memory planes (7 colors + blink mode)
3 = 3 memory planes (color, intensity, blink)
4 = Same as 2 but with look up table.
5. XMAX=<value> Maximum raster value (Default:511)
6. YMAX=<value> Maximum raster value (Default:511)
7. CSIZ=<value> Character spacing. (Default:7)
8. EXTCHR - Indicates the controller produces extended char. set.
9. REPCHR - Character data replaces existing data
10. XSIZ=<value> - Size of monitor in cm (Default:25.4)
11. YSIZ=<value> - Size of monitor in cm (Default:25.4)
15.64.18.9 HPGL - This is for a generic Hewlett Packard plotter. The
plotter pauses in between each plot to wait for a new sheet of paper. The
colors you select are mapped to pen numbers as:
1. WHITE
2. Red
3. Green
4. Blue
5. Yellow
6. Magenta
7. Cyan
Options are:
1. WIDTH=n.n - Paper width in cm (Default:26.0)
2. HEIGHT=n.n - Paper height in cm (Default:20.0)
3. XSCREEN=n.n - X Offset of plot in cm (Default:0.0)
4. YSCREEN=n.n - Y Offset of plot in cm (Default:0.0)
5. UNITS=nn.n - Number of pixels/cm (Default:400)
6. MAXCOLOR=n - Maximum number of pens (Default:7) This may be set
within the range of 1 to 7. All pens requested larger than this
value will revert to to the maximum.
7. PENLIST=n1n2n3n4n5 - maps penwidths to .01 cm. from 01 to 99.
(Default:PENLIST=0103050709) 01 is the minimum pen width.
8. GENIL simulate intensity levels by doing multiple passes with the
pen. If not specified then the PENLIST is ignored.
9. PENWIDTH=n.n - The width of the pen points in cm (Default:0.03)
If you wish to default to HP plotter output:
$ DEFINE PLOT_TERM "UGHPGLD[,options]"
These options may work differently depending on the plotter. Most of the
big plotters have the origin at the center of tha page, while the small
ones use an origin at a corner. By suitably adjusting the
WIDTH,HEIGHT,XSCREEN,YSCREEN any coordinate system or page size may be
accomadated. MAXCOLOR=1 is useful when you wish to reduce a color plot to
a single color.
example
TD:SET DEVICE HPGL "PENLIST=0309152430"
Sets up to draw with much wider lines.
15.64.18.10 IMAGEN - This is for an IMAGEN laser printer using the
IMPRESS language. It has a resolution of 1/3150 in the horizontal
direction. Options are:
1. ROTAXIS
2. BIGMAR
3. GENIL
4. EXPA=LETTER or LEGAL
The default is to send output to UGS$IMGN300:
15.64.18.11 POSTSCRIPT - This is for output on a postscript printer It
has a resolution of 1/3387 in the horizontal direction. The output file
type is PS .
15.64.18.12 PRINTRONIX - Printronix model MVP printer/plotter.
15.64.18.13 QMS-1200 - This is the QMS Lasergrafix 1200 laser printer
The options are:
1. FLUNIT=n - Logical unit number (Default:29)
2. TRAY=nnnn - 4 character code to specify the tray/stacker
0000=upper tray, 0001=lower tray, XXXX=keep old setting.
3. PENLIST=n1n2n3n4n5 - maps penwidths to setting. Setting is odd
number from 03 to 99. (Default:0303050709)
4. LANDSCAPE,PORTRAIT - Selects orientation
5. LM,RM,BM,TM=n - Selects margins in inches (Default:0.9)
6. NR,NC=n - Selects number of rows/colums of subplots on page. For
example NR=2,NC=3 will plot 6 pictures on 1 page.
(Default:NR=1,NC=1)
15.64.18.14 REGIS - This is for interactive GIGI, VT-240, VT-241 color
monitor, or suitable emulator such as the VT-300 emulation on a
VAXstation. (note:VT-241 can only reproduce the colors RED,GREEN,BLUE or
WHITE,RED,GREEN). The TEKTRONIX driver is slightly faster on a VT-240
than the REGIS driver. The physical screen size is set to 10.56 by 6.6
inches or 26.85 by 16.76 cm. These devices support Hardware structure and
hardware characters in any size. The GIGI also supports BLINK mode.
15.64.18.14.1 Options -
1. COLOR=xxxxxxxx This specifies the color mapping
(default:WRGBYMCD) You may modify this to suit your tastes. This
corresponds to the colors White, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow,
Magenta, Cyan, Dark(black). The eighth color "D" is the
background color.
2. HARDST or SOFTST to select hardware, or software line structure.
HARDST is faster, but SOFTST will give identical results on all
devices.
Example
TD:SET DEVICE REGIS
Sets up to plot on a normal REGIS device
TD:SET DEVICE REGIS "HARDST,COLOR=WWWWWWWD"
Sets up to plot quickly in black and white only.
TD:SET DEVICE REGIS "COLOR=WRGBRGBD"
Plots only in white,red,green, and blue. Yellow, magenta, and cyan are
mapped to red, green, and blue respectively.
15.64.18.14.2 Answerback - You should set the answerback to be
"DECGIGI,COLOR=WRGWWWWD,<CR>" for a VT241 terminal.
15.64.18.14.3 Windows - Normally when you do plots in REGIS the cursor
is left at the top of the screen. If your terminal is capable of more
than 24 lines, you may wish to freeze the top 24 lines, and create a
scrolling region underneath the plot. Assume your terminal has more than
24 lines and less than 100. This is possible if it is an emulated
terminal using a windowing system. To move the cursor to the bottom of
the screen:
TD:SET PROMPT BOTTOM,'TD:'
To freeze or thaw the top few lines:
TD:define command freeze 'type 27,"7",27,"[24;r",27,"8",27,"M"'
TD:define command thaw 'type 27,"7",27,"[0;r",27,"8",27,"M"'
You issue the command FREEZE to freeze the top lines, and THAW to unfreeze
them. You will want to FREEZE when you are doing plots, and the thaw when
you are showing data, or parameters, so you can use the whole window.
For your convenience you may do all of this by:
TD:SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FREEZE
Now when you do plot the top part of your screen is used to view the plot
while the bottom is used to give the commands.
If your screen has only 24 lines you may wish to reduce the plot size and
freeze the top 22 lines. This will give you a 2 line command window. To
do this:
SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FREEZE22
Similarly there is a FREEZE30 and FREEZE40 file.
15.64.18.15 SIXELS - This is for the LA-50, LA-100, VT-240, LN-03 and
any other device that uses sixel graphics. The size is about 10 by 8"
except for an LA-100 which is 14 by 10. To specify this device:
TD:SET DEVICE SIXELS "type,options"
Where type is LA50, LA100, VT240, LN03, LN03HI, LN03LO, or LN03MED.
HI,LO,MED select the resolution for the LN-03 printer. If you do not have
lots of memory inside the LN-03 you shoule use LN03LO or possibly LN03MED.
If you wish to get sixel output on a Talaris 1590 printer You specify
option LN03, and then print the file with /SET=LN03.
example
TD:SET DEVICE SIXEL "LN03"
15.64.18.16 TEKTRONIX - Tektronix 4010/4014 compatible terminals
TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "type,options"
15.64.18.16.1 Type -
1. "RADM3A" - For ADM-3A+Retrographics terminal
2. "RVT100" - A VT-100+Retrographics terminal
3. "RVT100A" - High resolution Retrographics (Green screen).
4. "SEL100XL" - For a Selanar HiREZ 100XL
5. "VIS102" - For a Visual 102 with graphics.
6. "KERMIT" - Kermit simulation of TEK-4010 with color
7. "LSI7107" - LSI model 7107 color terminal
8. "TEK4207" - For Tektronix model 4207 with Dialog box.
9. "TEEMTALK" - For Tektronix 4207 emulators which support simultaneous
Tek and terminal windows.
10. "VT240" - For a VT-240 terminal, or C.ITOH 328 For a VT-240 or 241
terminal you will get better results using the REGIS protocol. Both TEK
and REGIS are supported on the VT-240. When using the TEK protocol on a
VT-240 the keypad is disabled in graphics mode, and the screen is erased
when you leave graphics mode.
11. "CIT467" - for a CIT-467 color graphics terminal
12. "TAL1590" - for a Talaris 1590 laser printer. This produces a plot
approximately 10.24 by 7.8 inches with 3/8 inch margins.
If you do not specify a terminal type, then a plain vanilla 4010 is
assumed.
15.64.18.16.2 Terminal_setup - It is important that your terminal be
setup properly for Tek-4010. The following settings must be observed.
1. <CR> should generate only <CR>
2. <LF> should generate only <LF>
3. GIN terminator must be <CR>. In particular you do not want <EOT>
as a terminator.
4. <DEL> must be enabled as a valid graphics character or it implies
Lo Y.
5. You may wish to enable Automatic Tek entry.
6. You probably do not want screen clear when Tek is entered.
15.64.18.16.3 Falco - The Falco infinity series can display up to 49
lines of FBG-II graphics. You should calculate the number of available y
pixels as
For FBG-II
pixels=3120*(lines/49)
For FBG-I
pixels=3120*(lines/23)
Then you set:
TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "RVT100,YPIXELS=pixels"
15.64.18.16.4 Options -
1. "HARDST" or "SOFTST" select hardware structure, or software line
structure. HARDST is faster, but SOFTST will give identical
results on all devices.
2. "HIRES" or "LORES" select the resolution (4096 or 1024). HIRES
is slower, and will only work on some devices. For example HIRES
messes up the plots on a Visual-102.
3. "HARDCH" or "SOFTCH" selects the range of character generation.
HARDCH generates 4 character sizes by hardware. SOFTCH generates
only 1.
4. "NOINTEN" or "INTEN" selects intensity variation. This only
works on "real" 4010 terminals, and VT-240. There are only 2
levels of variation 1,2,3 or 4,5.
5. "HEIGHT=n" selects the screen height in cm. This componsates for
emulators without "good" aspect ratios.
6. "YPIXELS=n" selects the number of Y pixels for emulators with a
different number from the standard 3120. This may be in the
range of 1024 to 4096. Xpixels are assumed to be 4096.
7. "WIDTH=n" selects the screen width in cm.
8. "SLOW" selects full rather than compressed output for each point.
All redundant characters are transmitted.
9. "RECSIZE=nnn" selects the record size (72-512)
10. "RSEGM" or "NSEGM" - Selecte [no]return to terminal mode at end
of each segment. This is useful for terminals that support
simultaneous ANSI, and Tek graphics on screen at the same time.
11. "COLOR=WRGBYMCB" - specifies the 8 color mapping characters for
White, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black. Each
escape sequence has a unique single character to select color,
which may be specified by the color option. Spaces indicate keep
the color the same. For example KERMIT uses "COLOR=71243560"
12. "PRECOL=sequence" specifies the "escape" sequence to use before
the color character. For example KERMIT uses "PRECOL=[3"
13. "POSTCOL=sequence" specifies the sequence to use after the color
character. For example KERMIT uses "POSTCOL=m"
14. "ENTER=sequence" specifies the "escape" sequence to enter
TEK-4010 mode from terminal mode. For example VT-240 and KERMIT
use "ENTER='[?38h'"
15. "EXIT=sequence" specifies the "escape" sequence to Exit TEK-4010
mode to terminal mode. This sequence is executed whenever the
screen is erased or at the end of each segment if RSEGM is
selected. For example VT-240 and KERMIT use "EXIT='[?38l'"
NOTE: It is assumed that the escape character "27" begins each escape
sequence, and it need not be entered. Escape sequences containing
lowercase letters need to be inside quotes. In addition escape sequences
are limited to 7 characters and they may not contain blanks.
15.64.18.16.5 Table_of_types -
Type Width Height Features
TEK4010 19.97 15.21
TEK4014 19.97 15.21 HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN
TEK4207 19.97 15.21 HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN,EXIT,COLOR
TEEMTALK 19.97 15.21 HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN,EXIT,RSEGM,COLOR
VT240 21.59 16.45 HARDCH,INTEN,EXIT
SEL100XL 22.00 16.76 HIRES,HARDCH,RSEGM
VIS102 21.66 16.50 EXIT,RSEGM
RVT100 21.09 15.76 EXIT,RSEGM
RVT100A 21.09 15.76 EXIT,RSEGM
RADM3A 19.95 15.21 EXIT,RSEGM
CIT467 19.97 15.21 EXIT,RSEGM,COLOR
TAL1590 25.92 19.75 HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN
KERMIT 19.97 15.21 HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN,EXIT,COLOR
LSI7107 19.97 15.21 HARDCH,EXIT,COLOR
All use HARDST.
15.64.18.16.6 Windows - Sone TEK4010 emulators are capable of
simultaneous graphics and text where the graphics scrolls off of the
screen. An example of such a terminal is the Visual-630. For this type
of terminal you may wish to reduce the plot size and freeze the top 22
lines. This will give you a 2 line command window with a fixed graphics
window. To do this:
TD:SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FREEZE22
When you wish to use the whole window for listings you type:
TD:THAW
and then to restore the 2 line command window:
TD:FREEZE
15.64.18.16.7 Escape_seq - Each TEK4010 emulator uses slightly different
escape sequences. The following is a listing of the sequences which
differ from one device to another.
1. ENTER Tek mode
A. <ESC>[?38h - VT240,Kermit
B. <ESC>#!1 - TEK4207
C. <GS> - Most other devices
2. EXIT Tek mode or Resume ANSI terminal mode
A. <ESC>[?38l - VT240,Kermit
B. <ESC>#!0 - TEK4207
C. <ESC>2 - CIT467
D. <CAN> - most other devices
3. Set color (X=single color character)
(White,Red,Green,Blue,Yellow,Magenta,Cyan,Black)
A. <ESC>[3Xm - Kermit X=71243560
The KERMIT color emulation uses <ESC>[3F;Bm
Where F is the Foreground color and B is the background.
B. <ESC>MLX - TEK4207 X=12347650
Alternate colors for TEK4207 are:
< ; : 9
Violet Lt.Blue Blue-Grn Yellow-Grn
8 = > ?
Orange Salmon Dk.Gray Lt.Gray
C. <ESC>X - CIT467 X=oiljmknh
D. <ESC>CX - LSI7107 X=71243560 The LIS7107 additionally must
return to terminal mode to setup a new color.
4. Set mode ERASE/DRAW
A. Color terminals use color black
B. <ESC><RUB>/<ESC>a - RADM3A
C. <ESC>1d/<ESC>0d - RVT100,VIS102
D. <ESC>OW b` @@/<ESC>OW `` @@ - SEL100XL
Codes (decimal)
3. <ESC> = 27
4. <CAN> = 24
5. <GS> = 29
6. <RUB> = 127
15.64.18.16.8 Example -
TD:SET DEVICE TEK "SEL100XL"
Selects the SEL100XL terminal protocol.
TD:SET DEVICE TEK "SEL100XL,SOFTST,LORES"
Selects the SEL100XL but in 1024 resolution, with software structure.
This produces faster plots that look identical to those produced by
hardcopy devices that do not have hardware structure.
15.64.18.16.9 Hints - Some terminals such as the KERMIT emulation do not
support simultaneous display of graphics and text. This may be fixed in
several ways. You can specify the "RSEGM" option, and do a SHOW CURSOR
whenever you wish to look at the graphics page.
Some terminals such as the CIT328 , and the VT-240 clear the display
when switching from graphics to text. For such devices the "NSEGM"
options should be specified. This returns to terminal mode only when the
device is closed, or when the screen is erased.
You may modify the actual color mapping by specifying the appropriate
escape sequences. For example for KERMIT you may draw black against a
white backround by specifying:
SET DEVICE TEKTR "KERMIT,COLOR=01243567,POSTCOL=';7m'"
You may modify the color mapping for TEK4027 to substitute Violet for
blue.
SET DEVICE "COLOR=' <'
15.64.18.17 TEK4027 - This is for the Tektronix 4027 color terminal.
15.64.18.18 VERSATEC - Versatec 1200 printer/plotter. The plotting
space is 10.55" by 7.8" (26.8cm by 19.81cm) 2110 by 1560 pixels. Plotting
nominally begins 0.35" from the perforations. The 7.8" is nominal due to
variations in the paper feed. There is always a margin of 0.225" on the
short side of the paper. The following options may be specified inside
the string.
1. "LENGTH=n,inches" - n is the length of the paper in inches. This
allows you to make long plots on roll paper, or plots that bleed
across the page boundaries. You can also make a plot smaller
using this parameter.
15.64.18.19 Xwindows - If you wish to serve the Xwindows to another node
on DECnet (HEPNET) you must declare the node before entering Topdrawer, by
entering the line:
$ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=nodename
If you do not have a DECnet connection, but you are connected via TCP/IP
(Arpanet or Internet) you must use one of the following commands:
If you have Multinet TCP/IP software:
$ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=nodename/TRANSPORT=TCPIP
If you have Wollengong TCP/IP software (WINTCP):
$ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=nodename/TRANSPORT=WINTCP
15.64.18.20 String - This is passed to UGOPEN. This selects options for
the selected device. The options are separated by commas. For more
information see:UGSYS. An example of using the string is:
TD:SET DEVICE SIXELS "LN03HI,NOCLEAR,NORESET,LENGTH=n,inches"
This selects output for the LN-03 with no imbedded formfeeds or reset
commands. You might produce a plot in this form so you can add it to an
existing text file. The result is a plot imbedded in the text.
LENGTH=n adjusts the page length where n is the length of the paper in
inches. Shortening the plot size is useful for imbedded plots. You may
also lengthen the page length on the LA50 and LA100 printers.
If the option inches is omitted the length is in centimeters.
15.64.18.21 ADD - This adds another device so now you have 2 device
open. You may select the unit number by using UNIT=n.
15.64.18.22 FILE - FILE=filename - This selects the device and filename
for output. This option only works for non-interactive or sequential
devices. If you wish to specify a file name containing either semicolons
or blanks, it must be enclosed in parenthesis.
CHANNEL=DEV: - This selects the output device. For interactive devices
or slave devices this is your terminal by default.
You either select a device or filename. Interactive and slave devices
generally accept CHANNEL, while sequential devices accept FILE. The
TEKTRONIX and REGIS devices treat FILE and CHANNEL as synonyms.
15.64.18.23 WIDTH|HEIGHT - Sets the width and height of the display in
the current units. This only applies to some drivers.
15.64.18.24 IDENT - IDENT=aaaa - This selects an identification to be
added to a sequential output file before each plot. For TEKTRONIX and
REGIS, if aaaa='NONE' then there is no identification for each plot.
This is equivalent to "PICTID=aaaa"
15.64.18.25 INTERACTIVE - This plots on your terminal. INTERACTIVE
turns on both PAUSE and FLUSH. When this is selected TOPDRAWER stops
after each plot and waits for you to hit the "Return" key. If you wish to
stop you type STOP, EXIT, QUIT, HALT, or END. In addition data is flushed
after each line of interactive input. INTERACTIVE devices support extra
features such as cursor input. INTERACTIVE devices produce output on
device TT:. If you attempt interactive output to TT: in a batch queue,
your output will vanish, as TT is assigned to NLA0:.
SEQUENTIAL - Produces plots in an output file
SLAVE - Produces the plots at another device. This is similar to
INTERACTIVE, but the CURSOR is not supported for a slave device.
The default is:
INTERACTIVE if you are running interactively
SEQUENTIAL in BATCH mode
15.64.18.26 NUMBER - NUMBER=nnnn - This selects the sequence number for
the first plot in the set. This is only used by sequential devices.
15.64.18.27 ORIENTATION - This is an integer value from 0 to 3
specifying the orientation of the plot. It rotates all plots on all
opened devices, unlike the LANDSCAPE and PORTRAIT options.
*** 0 Normal orientation
*** 1 Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. This is the same as sideways. X
goes from top to bottom, while Y points to the right.
*** 2 Rotated 180 degrees or Upside down
*** 3 Rotated 270 degrees clockwise, appropriate for TeX
15.64.18.28 REVERSE - This reverses the foreground/background colors on
the plot.
15.64.18.29 SIDEWAYS - SIDEWAYS - Rotates the plot by 90 degrees.
See:Command SET SIZE. This rotates all plots on all opened devices.
15.64.18.30 PERMANENT - This sets the currently selected device as the
Default. The Default may be restored by a SET DEVICE command with no
device specified.
15.64.18.31 UNIT - You may select the unit to open UNITS range from 1 to
8. This allows you send the output to several devices at once.
15.64.18.32 Example - To get plots on your terminal a VT-100 with
retrographics.
TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "RVT100"
To get plots on another terminal (TTAn:) a VT-100 with retrographics.
TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "RVT100" FILE=TTAn:
To get output on a Postscript printer:
TD:SET DEVICE POSTSCR
The actual output will be a file called filename.PS which must be printed
on a Postscript printer.
To get direct output to a spooled printer:
TD:SET DEVICE POSTSCR FILE=LPA0:DUMMY.PS
15.64.19 DIAMOND
This sets the default size for diamonds.
SET DIAMOND [SIZE=dx[,dy]] [PERMANENT]
PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.
(Default:1.0)
If dx is omitted it is set to the default. If dy is omitted it is the
same as dx.
15.64.20 DIGITS
SET DIGITS=n
Sets the number of significant digits displayed in a SHOW DATA command and
the lexicals. The number of digits may be set to a value from 0 to 7. If
n=0 then the number of digits is adjusted to suit the display. If n is
omitted it is assumed to be 0.
(Default:DIGITS=0)
15.64.21 ELLIPSE
This sets the default size for the major and semi-major ellipse sizes. If
dy is omitted the ellipse becomes a circle.
SET ELLIPSE [SIZE=dx[,dy]] [PERMANENT]
PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.
If dx is omitted it is set to the default. If dy is omitted it is the
same as dx.
15.64.22 ERRORS
SET ERRORS [{DEFERRED|IMMEDIATE|LIST}] [WAIT|PAUSE[=ON|OFF]]
1. DEFERRED - The error messages appear after the plot is finished.
2. IMMEDIATE - The error messages appear when the command is
entered.
3. LIST - The error messages appear only in the listing file.
4. WAIT - When error messages are immediate, WAIT causes TOPDRAWER
to wait after each message. PAUSE is a synonym for wait.
This option remains the same until changed by a SET ERRORS command.
(Default:IMMEDIATE,NOWAIT)
15.64.23 EXACT
SET EXACT [ON|OFF] [PERMANENT]
Sets the character comparison to be exact rather than case blind.
(Default:OFF)
15.64.24 FILE
This selects the file names for data input, output, and journaling.
SET FILE
[INPUT=filename]
[LIST|OUTPUT=filename]
[JOURNAL=filename]
NOTE
This command is very different from the original SLAC version of
TOPDRAWER.
15.64.24.1 INPUT - Selects the input file. Once a file is selected,
TOPDRAWER looks for all commands in that file. After the last command in
the file, TOPDRAWER looks for more input in the current file.
(Default:TOPDRAWER.TOP)
WARNING
If any commands follow SET FILE INPUT, they will be executed
before the commands in the input file.
15.64.24.2 LIST - Selects the listing output (Default:TD.LIS). This
lists all the commands you give TOPDRAWER. Both commands entered at the
keyboard, and from an input file are listed. It is also the default file
for a LIST command.
15.64.24.3 JOURNAL - Selects the journal file name (Default:TD.TDJ) The
journal file contains any commands you type at the keyboard. Commands
from a disk file are not incuded in the journal file. There is no journal
file when TOPDRAWER is run from a batch job.
15.64.24.4 Filename - The file specification may include device and
directory. If the filename contains a semicolon ";", or begins with "V_"
or "S_" or a special character such as a dollar sign "$" it must be
enclosed in quotes or apostrophes "'". For example you may get the sample
input file.
TD:SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TDINTRO
This is a modification of the original Topdrawer syntax. The original
required a Fortran unit number. By performing a logical assignment you
may simulate the original syntax. For example:
$ ASSIGN FOR009.DAT "9"
defines 9 as the usual input on unit 9.
15.64.24.5 Example -
TD:SET FILE INPUT TEST
Input will be taken from file TEST.TOP.
TD:SET FILE INPUT myfile.dat
Input will be taken from file MYFILE.DAT.
TD:SET FILE INPUT 'myfile.dat;1'
Input will be taken from file MYFILE.DAT;1. Notice, that if you use a
semicolon ";" in the file name you must enclose it in apostrophes or
quotes.
TD:SET FILE INPUT="$TEST" LIST=TESTD
Input will be $TEST.TOP the output will be TESTD.LIS.
TD:SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TDINTRO
The input will be from TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES] file TDINTRO.TOP
TD:SET FILE INPUT DRA0:[USER.SUBDIR]MY_PLOTS.PLT
The input will be from device DRA0:, directory [USER.SUBDIR], file
MY_PLOTS.PLT
TD:SET FILE JOURNAL NL:
This discards the journal output a better way to do this is:
SET MODE JOURNAL OFF.
15.64.25 FILL
SET FILL [ENTRY[=n]] [FULL] [SIZE[=n]] [ANGLE[=n]] [ALTERNATE=[ON|OFF]]
[WIDTH|INTENSITY=n] [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|
MAGENTA|CYAN] [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|
PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
This selects a fill attributes to be used when the FILL option is used
with HISTOGRAM, JOIN, or PLOT. This selects the type of cross hatch fill.
Up to 4 different lines may be used.
1. ALTERNATE selects filling alternate areas. If off the entire
area bounded by the outside of the curve is filled. (Default:ON)
2. ENTRY selects the fill entry to change. If n is omitted the next
entry is selected.
3. FULL sets the fill size to be the same as the screen resolution,
the angle is set to 90, and the WIDTH is set to 1.
4. SOLID... selects the line texture to use. (Default:NONE)
5. WHITE... selects the line color to use. (Default:NONE)
6. ANGLE the angle that the line is to be drawn at. 0 is
horizontal, while 90 is straight up and down.
(Default:+-45 degrees)
7. SIZE the separation between the lines. If negative this is
specified in pixels. If positive it is specified in inch.
(Default:0.1)
8. WIDTH selects the line width to use (0 to 5). A width of 0
indicates no width is selected.
(Default:NONE)
IF no options are specified, the fill patterns are reset to the default
value.
15.64.26 FIT
SET FIT [options]
Sets the fitting options.
See:Command FIT.
15.64.27 FLUSH
FLUSH [ON|OFF]
This selects automatic flush of plot data. When automatic flushing of
data is on, plot data is displayed immediately after each interactive line
of input. When OFF plot data is only displayed after a FLUSH command or
when the plot buffer is full. Pause is normally on for interactive
devices, and off for non interactive.
15.64.28 FONT
This selects which fonts are used in generating plots.
SET FONT [BASIC|EXTENDED|DUPLEX]
1. BASIC - 64 character uppercase font (not useful)
2. EXTENDED - Full font with Greek and lowercase (Default)
3. DUPLEX - Fancy font. This one may not look good on devices such
as Tektronix 4010 with limited resolution. This also requires
the most memory and time to generate.
This option remains in effect until changed by a SET FONT command. The
EXTENDED and DUPLEX fonts both use proportional spacing. If you wish to
use a fixed spacing font See:Command SET MODE PROPORTIONAL.
15.64.29 FORMAT
Sets the format used by the Fortran READ statement.
SET FORMAT "format"
This is useful if you wish to skip lines at the beginning of a line when
you are using a list file as input to TOPDRAWER. Normally you do not need
to use this command, unless the data is in an extremely weird format. The
format is limited to 64 characters. (Default:(256A1) The number of
columns is also limited by SET CARD. This option remains the same until
changed by a SET FORMAT command. This option has no effect on input you
enter interactively at the terminal.
Example
If you wish to skip the first 10 columns:
TD:SET FORMAT "(10x,256A1)"
15.64.30 GRID
This causes a grid to overlay the plot when axes are drawn. The grid
lines are lined up with the large tick marks. This acts on the current
plot only a new SET GRID is required for each plot or the options
PERMANENT must be specified. The command must be followed by either a
HIST, JOIN, BARGRAPH or PLOT command to be effective.
SET GRID [ON|OFF] [Y|HORIZONTAL|X|VERTICAL!Z[=ON|OFF]] [SYMBOL[=sym]] [XY|
YZ|ZX[=ON|OFF]] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] [OUTLINE[=ON|OFF]]
[SIZE=n]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[THETA=n] [PHI=n] [ANGLE=n]
[PERMANENT]
15.64.30.1 Options -
1. ON - Draws horizontal, vertical, and Z lines.
2. OFF - No grid is drawn. (Default)
3. Y|HORIZONTAL - Draws horizontal lines at Y major tics.
4. X|VERTICAL - Draws vertical lines at X major tics.
5. Z - Draws line perpendicular to Z at Z major tics.
6. :XY - Draws lines in XY plane.
7. YZ - Draws lines in YZ plane when THREE=ON.
8. ZX - Draws lines in ZX plane when THREE=ON.
If XY,YZ,ZX are not specified, then all 3 are assumed to be on.
9. CYCLE - Draws the grid lines corresponding to Z major ticks in
different colors, textures... according to the SET CYCLE
command. (Default:OFF)
10. OUTLINE - Draws outline around 3-d grid. (Default:OFF)
11. INTENSITY - Sets line intensity or width (0-5). 0 gets the
intensity from the SET INTENSITY or SET AXES command.
12. WHITE... - Sets the line color. (Default:Same as axes)
13. SOLID... - Sets the line texture. (Default:Same as axes)
See:Command SET TEXTURE.
14. SYMBOL - Draws a symbol [sym] to be plotted at intersection of
vertical and horizontal lines. (Default:sym=0O)
15. SIZE - sets the size of the grid symbols If the size is not set
then it is adjusted automatically by the window size.
16. THETA,PHI - specify the normal to the grid symbol for 3-d plots.
17. ANGLE - rotates the symbol around the normal for 3-d plots.
18. PERMANENT - Sets the current grid options permanently for all NEW
plots.
If no options are specified, then all grid parameters are reset to the
original defaults.
(Default:OFF SYM='0O' INTEN=0 NOCOLOR NOTEXTURE THETA=0 PHI=0 ANGLE=0)
15.64.30.2 Example -
TD:SET GRID DOTS VERT SYM=1O
When the axes are plotted, a grid is drawn consisting of vertical dotted
lines at each large X tick, and symbols at the intersection of large X and
Y ticks.
TD:SET GRID DOTS VERT HORIZ
is the same as ...
TD:SET GRID DOTS ON
TD:SET GRID RED ON PERMANENT
All subsequent plots with axes have red grids.
TD:SET GRID SYM=0O THETA=90 PHI=90
The grid will be plotted with crosses as the grid symbol, oriented normal
to the Y axis. The symbol lies in the XZ plane.
TD:SET GRID X Y Z YZ ZX DOTS OUTLINE PERM
Plots grids only on the YZ and ZX planes. Since only the XY plane exists
for normal plots, TD will only put grids on 3-D plots.
15.64.31 HISTOGRAM
SET HISTOGRAM [HBOOK|HANDYPAK|RICE] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [CHECK[=ON|OFF]]
[CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] [ERRORS[=ON|OFF]]
[OVERFLOWS[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] [SECTION=section_name]
[FILE=filename] [NUMBER=n] [SELECT|NAME='hist_name'] [IDENT=nnn]
[EXACT[=ON|OFF]] [CURRENT|NEXT|PREVIOUS|FIRST|LAST]
[PROCESS='Process_name'] [PID='nnnn'] [TITLE[=ON|OFF]]
[WRAP[=ON|OFF] [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] [MESH[=ON|OFF]]
HBOOK4 only
[AREA|DIRECTORY[="directory"]] [TREE[=ON|OFF]] [WILD[=ON|OFF]]
[SHRE=section_id] [IOFFSET=n] [CYCLE=n]
NTUPLES
[NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]] [EVENTS[=[FROM] n [TO] n] [[N][D]{X|Y|Z|U|V|W
|THETA|RADIUS|PHI}=N] [NLIMIT[=n [FROM] n [TO] n]
[NMASK[=n [IDENT=n] [X=n] [Y=n]]
This selects a histogram and puts it into data storage. Once a histogram
is selected, the data is available for plotting. The command:
SHOW HISTOGRAMS
Shows the current list of histograms available.
LIST HISTOGRAMS
Produces a listing of the current histograms.
15.64.31.1 Options -
1. APPEND - The hist is appended as a new data set
2. AREA="xxx/yyy/zzz" - Selects the histogram area.
3. CHECK - Turns on or off duplicate checking.
4. CONFIRM - You are asked before the histogram is set.
5. ENTRIES - Selects only histograms which have entries (data).
6. ERRORS - Sets the errors (DY).
7. EXACT - Histogram names are treated as exact strings, and they
are not searched in a case independent manner. This must precede
the option NAME="...".
8. SECTION=sectionname - Sets up a global section to RESTORE hists
from. SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK
9. FILE - Specifies a direct access file to get histograms from.
10. HISTOGRAM - Selects only histogram (non mesh) data.
11. IDENT - The histogram number to set.
12. LOG - Informs you when it gets the data.
13. MESH - Chooses only MESH data.
14. NAME - Selects hist by name.
15. NUMBER - Then number of hists to fetch from the file.
16. NTUPLES - Selects only NTUPLES.
17. OVERFLOWS - Includes the overflows in the data set.
18. CURRENT|NEXT|PREVIOUS|FIRST|LAST - Selects the hist to get.
19. TITLE - Plots the histogram name as a title.
20. TREE - Searches through the entire directory tree.
21. WILD - Allows wild searches of areas in SHOW, MONITOR, SET, SAVE,
RESTORE HISTOGRAM. If WILD=ON then the star "*" and percent "%"
signs are reserved for wild searches.
(Default:WILD=ON)
22. WRAP - Continues or terminates the search at the end of the list
of histograms.
15.64.31.2 APPEND - The new data is appended to the current data as a
new set rather than replacing it. If you omit ON or OFF then ON is
assumed.
(Default:APPEND=OFF)
15.64.31.3 AREA|DIRECTORY - This selects the histogram AREA or
DIRECTORY. If you specify "//" or "/" then the "root" directory or
"//PAWC" is selected. If the area begins with "/" then it is considered
to be a subdirectory of the root. "" moves down the directory tree.
"AAAA" move up the tree to subdirectory AAAA. and "aAAA" moves over to
the adjacent subdirectory AAAA. Note that "" may need to be enclosed in
quotes, unless you have SET CHAR ALPHA "". Unfortunately if you modify
the meaning of "" then dates must be entered enclosed in angle brakets
<1989523>. This is generally not necessary unless you have directories
which consist entirely of numbers.
If you use "wild" characters in an area name then a directory tree search
is automatically done using the wild characters to select subdirectories.
Wild characters are "*" which means and string, and "%" which means any
character.
example
Assume you are in directory "//PAWC/X"
TD:SET HIST AREA Y
moves you to //PAWC/X/Y
TD:SET HIST AREA "q"
moves to //PAWC/X/Q
TD:SET HIST AREA /A
moves to //PAWC/A
TD:SET HIST AREA //
moves to //PAWC
TD:SET HIST AREA /E* ID=2
Gets the first histogram with ID=2 from area //PAWC/ENERGY or
//PAWC/ERROR...
15.64.31.4 CHECK - If on it TOPDRAWER issues a warining if there is a
duplicate histogram for the selected one. This is normally on except when
the options CURRENT, NEXT,PREVIOUS,LAST,FIRST are used.
15.64.31.5 CONFIRM - Each histogram that matches the specifications is
logged, then you are asked whether you want to accept it. You reply:
* Y,A - Yes accept it.
* N - No, do not accept it (Default).
* Q - Quit and stop asking questions.
If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.
(Default:CONFIRM=OFF)
15.64.31.6 ENTRIES - If ON it selects only histograms which have entries
(contain data). If OFF it selects only histograms without entries. The
default is ON.
15.64.31.7 ERRORS - Set the error array DY or DZ. If this is specified
for HBOOK and the histogram contains no errors, garbage may be collected
in DY. For 2 dimensional or RICE histograms the ERROR=SQRT(Y). If you
omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.
(Default:ERROR=ON when REVISION>4.30)
15.64.31.8 FILE - FILE=filename - Selects the filename to restore the
histograms from. If IDENT is specified then the selected histogram is
fetched from the file. If the filename is NONE then no file name is
selected. If the filename is blank (FILE='') then the last opened file is
used, or if none has been opened.
HBOOK.BIN - For HBOOK4 direct access files.
example
TD:SET HIST FILE=MY_HISTS.BIN
Gets the histograms from file MY_HISTS.BIN.
TD:SET HIST FILE="MY_HISTS.BIN;1"
Gets histograms from the first version of the file.
15.64.31.9 HISTOGRAM - If HISTOGRAM=ON selects only histograms. IDENT
IDENT=nnn - Selects the histogram by id number. The data in the histogram
is loaded into the data buffer. If this is combined with NAME='hist_name'
then the next histogram that first matches either the ID or NAME is
selected.
15.64.31.10 LOG - This causes TOPDRAWER to type the histogram name when
it sets it. The histogram ID,NAME,size, and range of values is typed on
your terminal. If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.
(Default:LOG=OFF)
15.64.31.11 MESH - If MESH=ON only histograms with 3-d or mesh data are
set. If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.
example
TD:SET HISTOGRAM NEXT MESH
Gets the next mesh plot.
15.64.31.12 NTUPLES - You may select the NTUPLE data and put it into a
1-d histogram. These options remain the same, unless respecified. If the
option is used without any parameters it is reset to the initial value.
You may show the options by: SHOW HISTOGRAM SELECT These options are also
used to control NTUPL usage by: DEFINE HISTOGRAM ADD/SUBTRACT commands
1. NTUPLES selects only NTUPLES. Normall NTUPLES are excluded, so
you must use this option to look at NTUPLE data.
2. EVENTS FROM n1 TO N2 selects the event range The event selection
remains the same, unless respecified.
3. X/DX/Y/DY...NDW=n selects the value to put into X/DX... from
each NTUPLE Initially they are X=1, Y=2, ...W=6, DX=-1, DY=-2,
DZ=-3. 0 is the event number while positive values are each of
the variables in an NTUPLE.
4. NLIMIT=n FROM n1 TO N2 places limits on the selected value n.
Where n is the coordinate in the NTUPLE. If specified without a
value n or with n=0 then all limits are set. If all parameters
are unspecified then all limits are reset to large values.
5. NMASK=n Sets MASK number n. If 0 all masks are cleared.
A. IDENT=n Will mask the data by histogram n
B. X=m Specifies which Variable to check against the X of
histogram n Zero is the event number.
C. Y=m Specifies which Variable to check against Y of histogram
n
The data is checked against the histogram and if the
correspoinding bin of the histogram is non zero the NTUPL is
kept, and discarded if not. These options are also use by the
DEFINE HISTOGRAM command to ADD or SUBTRACT NTUPL data from
histograms.
example
You have an NTUPLE with 6 coordinate values A,B,C,D,E,F You may place all
of the C values into X and the F values into Y While limiting the B values
to the range -1 to 1.
TD:SET HIST ID=5 EVENTS X=3 Y=6 NLIMIT=2 FROM -1 TO 1
The resulting data may then be histogrammed using the BIN command.
15.64.31.13 NUMBER - The number of hists to fetch when specifying
FILE=name. This only works it the ID was specified along with the FILE
name.
example
TD:SET HIST FILE=my_file IDENT=200 NUMBER=25
Fetches 25 histograms from my_file beginning from number 200. Hist number
200 is put into data.
15.64.31.14 OVERFLOWS - Selects underflow and overflow data in the first
and last bin of the histogram. If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.
(Default:OVERFLOWS=OFF)
15.64.31.15 CURRENT|NEXT|PREVIOUS|FIRST|LAST - Selects the current,
next, previous, first or last histogram. This may be modified by ID=n,
NAME='hist_name', MESH... to select the next histogram with the desired
ID, NAME, or type. When NEXT, PREVIOUS, FIRST or LAST are specified, no
error messages are issued for duplicate histograms selected one.
15.64.31.16 SECTION - SECTION=SECTION_NAME maps a global section to
Topdrawer, for getting histograms. If IDENT is specified then the
selected histogram is fetched from the global section. If the section has
a blank name (SECTION="") the already mapped section is used.
SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK
To show available global sections:
$ INSTALL :==$sys$system:install/command
$ INSTALL LIST/GLOBALS
The available globals sections will be near the end under the category
Group Globals.
15.64.31.17 SELECT - NAME='hist_name' Selects the histogram by name or
title. The data in the histogram is loaded into the data buffer. The
entire list of histograms is searched starting at the first one for a name
matching the hist_name. If a histogram has more characters in its name
than the hist_name, the extra characters are ignored. If the option NEXT,
PREVIOUS, FIRST, or LAST is used, the search begins from the NEXT,
PREVIOUS, FIRST, or LAST histogram. Percent '%' and star '*' are wild
characters. '%' means any single character while '*' means any character
string. For example NAME='*ENERGY' will select a histogram name
containing the word ENERGY. However NAME='ENERGY' will select a histogram
beginning with the word ENERGY. NAME='*PI*ENERGY' will find all
histograms with the name containing the string 'PI' followed by the word
ENERGY separated by any number of characters. The case of the hist_name
is ignored.
If more than 1 histogram match the selected name, a warning message is
issued.
15.64.31.18 TITLE - This plots the histogram name as a title. The name
may be split into 4 parts, Top, X, Y, and Z by separating them with
semicolons.
Top label;X label;Y label;Z label
If the number of lines is insufficient for a title, then it is omitted.
For example you wish to omit the Y title so you:
TD:SET TITLE LEFT LINES=0
WARNING For 3-D histograms the title should not be plotted until after the
histogram has been plotted. If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.
(Default:TITLE=OFF)
15.64.31.19 TREE - Searches the entire directory tree for the histogram
starting with the current area. This option remains set from one SET
HISTOGRAM command to the next. You may only search a directory tree in a
forward directions so this does not work for the option PREVIOUS or LAST.
Essentially the first time you specify TREE the entire directory tree is
setup for a search. Subsequent SET HISTOGRAM commands should not use the
TREE option unless a new search is desired.
15.64.31.20 WILD - If WILD is on then the characters "*" and "%" are
"wild" and may be used in AREA names. A wild character in an area causes
a directory tree search, of only the selected subdirectories.
15.64.31.21 WRAP - If WRAP is on then when you SET HIST NEXT and the
current histogram is the last one, the histogram number will wrap around
to the first number. Similarly SET HIST PREVIOUS will wrap around to the
last one. If you specify WRAP=OFF then you will get a warning message
instead of wrapping. If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed. By
default WRAP is ON when TOPDRAWER is used interactively, but OFF when it
is used in a batch stream.
15.64.31.22 Lexicals - When a histogram is set S_HIST_NAME contains the
the current histogram name.
If the histogram package has limits or markers set on the histogram they
are put into V_XMARKER[n] and V_YMARKER[n]. HBOOK has no markers. The
number of markers is limited to n=8. The lexicals are set to a very large
number 1.0E+30 if they do not contain markers.
15.64.31.23 Restrictions - The maximum number of histograms you may
restore is 499. The maximum memory for HBOOK histograms is 150,000 words.
(1.2 Mbyte) The maximum title length is 256 characters. If you have a
file exceeding these restrictions you must restore each histogram
individually by:
TD:SET HISTOGRAM HBOOK FILE=name ID=n
15.64.31.24 Examples - The following sequence will plot a histogram
stored by HSTORE.
TD:RESTORE HIST FETCH FILE=filename (Get the hists)
TD:SET HIST ID=5;HIST
or...
TD:SET HIST NAME='title of hist 5'
TD:HISTOGRAM
or...
TD:SET HIST HBOOK FILE=filename ID=5
TD:HISTOGRAM
TD:SET HIST NAME='ENERGY'
sets the first histogram named "ENERGY...." into the data array.
TD:SET HIST NEXT NAME="*ENERGY"
sets the next histogram with a title containing the word "ENERGY".
TD:SET HIST NEXT NAME='*ENERGY' CONFIRM
types the name of each histogram containing the word "ENERGY", then you
are asked if it is acceptable. You type "Y" if it is, and press "Return"
if it is not.
TD:SET HIST LAST HIST NAME='ENERGY'
sets the last 1 dimensional histogram named "ENERGY...." into the data
array.
15.64.32 INPUT
See command: SET CARD
15.64.33 INTENSITY
SET {INTENSITY|WIDTH} level [PERMANENT]
This sets the intensity level or line width of a plot. The permanent
default is restored when a new plot is started.
level=1 to 5. (Default:2) 5 is the brightest (widest). If no intensity
is specified it is set to 2.
PERMANENT - Sets the current width to be the new default.
15.64.34 LABELS
This sets the size and enables the numeric labels on each axis. To
control the default number of ticks see SET SCALE.
SET LABELS [SIZE=n] [CHARACTERS=n] [INSIDE[=ON|OFF] [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|
LEFT|X|Y|Z] [ON|OFF] [SHIFT=n]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[PERMANENT]
This acts on the current plot only if PERMANENT not specified. If the
parameters are omitted they are reset to the original default. To control
other individual elements of the axes use:
SET AXES, SET TICKS, SET OUTLINE, SET SCALES
(DEFAULT:LEFT ON,BOTTOM ON)
15.64.34.1 ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT - Selects labels for top, bottom,
right and left. Top selects labels for the TOP of plot and so on.
15.64.34.2 X|Y|Z - selects the axis to plot. Y selects both LEFT and
RIGHT, while X selects TOP and BOTTOM.
15.64.34.3 CHARACTERS - CHARACTERS=n specifies the maximum number of
characters in left or right titles. When setting up the windows room is
allocated for the specified number of characters. The room is only
allocated if the corresponding axis and labels are enabled. If negative
the actual number of characters needed is used to locate titles. LEFT or
RIGHT titles are only moved over according to the number of actual
characters if they are plotted after the corresponding axes.
Example
TD:SET LABELS CHARACTERS=4 PERMANENT
All plots will allocate room for 4 character labels on the left and right.
TD:SET LABELS CHARACTERS=-6
TD:PLOT AXES
TD:TITLE LEFT 'Flush title
First the window is allocated leaving room for 6 characters, then the
title is located according to the actual number of characters used to form
the labels.
15.64.34.4 INSIDE - INSIDE=OFF turns off labels for adjacent axes of
negative windows. If you wish to plot data in a set of windows with the
same scales and limits, you may want to have each window flush against the
next one. This is achieved by using negative windows. Unfortunately when
plotting the axes, you will get labels inside the windows. With
INSIDE=OFF you will only get labels on the perimeter.
Example
Assume you have 6 data sets to plot in separate windows.
TD:SET LABELS INDIDE=OFF
TD:SET WINDOW X 1.2 OF -3.5 Y 1.2 OF -2.5
SET WINDOW 1;PLOT SET=1
SET WINDOW 2;PLOT SET=2
SET WINDOW 3;PLOT SET=3
....
15.64.34.5 SIZE - SIZE=n is the character size in tenths of an inch
Normally this is automatically set according to the paper size, and window
to give you pleasing results. This applies to all labels. The units may
be modified by SET UNITS CHARACTER.
(Default:2)
15.64.34.6 SHIFT - selects the amount to shift the label from the edge
of the plot to the center of the first character. It is specified as the
number of characters. This should be preceded by the option
ALL,BOTTOM.... If the axis is not specified ALL is assumed.
15.64.34.7 ON|OFF - Allows or prevents drawing labels This should be
preceded by the option ALL,BOTTOM.... If the axis is not specified ALL is
assumed.
15.64.34.8 INTENSITY - Sets line intensity or width (0-5). 0 gets the
intensity from the SET INTENSITY command.
15.64.34.9 WHITE... - Sets the line color.
15.64.34.10 PERMANENT - Makes the current settings permanent from plot
to plot.
15.64.34.11 Examples -
TD:SET LABELS ON SHIFT=2
Selects labels on all axes shifted by 2.
TD:SET LABELS RIGHT ON SHIFT=2
Selects labels for the right hand axis shifted by 2. All other axes
remain the same.
TD:SET LABELS ALL OFF TOP ON RIGHT ON SHIFT=2
Selects labels on the top,right axes only. The right label will be
shifted by 2. The shift for the other axes remains the same.
15.64.35 LIMITS
SET LIMITS [CURSOR] [PERMANENT] [SCALE n1 [[TO] n2]]
either...
FROM [X=]nx,[[Y=]ny,[[Z=]nz]]] TO [X=]nx,[[Y=]ny,[[Z=]nz]]]
or...
[X [FROM] x [TO] x]
[Y [FROM] y [TO] y]
[Z [FROM] z [TO] z]
[XMIN=x] [XMAX=x] [YMIN=y] [YMAX=y] [ZMIN=z] [ZMAX=z] [PERMANENT]
Limits define the space to draw the data. They do not necessarily limit
the data points plotted. Normally limits are automatically set from all
available data during the first plot. If you read data, plot and then
read more data and plot again, the first data set determines the limits.
This command allows you to set the limits of the plot independently of the
data. This should be used before the first PLOT, JOIN, HIST, or BARGRAPH
command. The limits are reset when a new plot is started. If this
command is issued without any limits specified, all currently set limits
are removed.
WARNING
If this command is issued in between 2 plots overlaying each
other, they will not have the same scales.
See also:SET WINDOW
15.64.35.1 SCALE - This sets a uniform scale for both X,Y. The window
size is n1/n2 of the displayed X,Y. If n2 is omitted it is assumed to be
1.0. If both n1 and n2 are omitted, both x,y have the same scale as
determined by the limits, and window size. The plot is centered with
respect to any selected limits.
TD:SET LIMITS X 20,40 Y 40,60 SCALE 1 to 10
TD:SET WINDOW X 1 to 4 Y 1 to 2
The X is displayed from 10 to 50 Y is displayed from 40 to 60.
15.64.35.2 CURSOR - CURSOR puts a cursor on the screen. Move the cursor
to the desired first limits. Then hit the space bar. Next move the
cursor to the desired second limits, and again hit the space bar. A new
set of limits are now set for the next graph. If you wish to set only the
X limit hit "X" instead of "space". Likewise hit "Y" or "Z" if you wish
to set only Y or Z limits. The new limits are entered into the journal
file.
If both X limits are the same, then they are ignored. Likewise identical
Y or Z limits are ignored. For 3-d data the limits are not changed.
Instead the parameters SCRD, THETA, PHI, and CENTER are adjusted. The
CURSOR option should be the last option in the command line for 3-d plots.
For example the following command will set new limits, and replot the
current data:
TD:SET LIM CUR;NEW;PLOT
15.64.35.3 PERMANENT - PERMANENT sets the current limits permanently or
until the next SET LIMIT command. If you wish to unset permanent limits,
set them permanently immediately after an NEW PLOT command.
15.64.35.4 Example - The following commands are equivalent:
TD:SET LIMITS X FROM 0 to 10.0 Y 5 6
TD:SET LIMITS X 0 10 Y FROM 5.0 to 6.0
TD:SET LIMITS XMIN=0.0 XMAX=10.0 YMIN=5 YMAX=6
TD:SET LIMITS FROM 0.0,5 TO 10.0,6
TD:SET LIMITS FROM Y=5 X=0.0 TO Y=6 X=10.0
15.64.36 MODE
This controls a grab-bag of options.
SET MODE
[AUTOPLOT[=ON|OFF]]
[ABORT[=ON|OFF]]
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]]
[CHECK[=ON|OFF]]
[CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]]
[ERASE[=ON|OFF]]
[DEBUG[=ON|OFF]]
[ECHO=[n]|NOECHO]
[EXPAND[=ON|OFF]]
[FILECASE=UPPER|LOWER|MIXED]
[HARDTEXTURE[=ON|OFF]]
[JOURNALING[=ON|OFF]]
[LISTING[=ON|OFF]]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]]
[MONITOR[=ON|OFF]]
[PROPORTIONAL[=ON|OFF]]
[QUICK|SLOW]
[SHOW[=ON|OFF]]
[TITLE[=ON|OFF]]
[TRACE[=ON|OFF]]
[TREE[=ON|OFF]]
[VECTOR[=ON|OFF]]
[VLOG[=ON|OFF]]
If ON|OFF is omitted ON is assumed. Most of these options remain the same
until explicitly reset. They are generally not reset by a NEW PLOT
command.
(Default:AUTOPLOT=ON, ABORT=ON, APPEND=OFF, CONFIRM=OFF, ERASE=OFF,
DEBUG=OFF, ECHO=20, HARD=ON, JOURNALING=ON, LISTING=ON, LOG=OFF,
MONITOR=OFF, PROPORTIONAL=ON, SHOW=OFF, TRACE=OFF, TREE=OFF, VECTOR=ON)
15.64.36.1 AUTOPLOT - If an EXIT or CLEAR command occurs and none of the
current data set has been histogrammed, plotted, or joined, then it is
plotted. When AUTOPLOT is off no plotting is automatically done.
15.64.36.2 ABORT - If an error occurs during a command the command is
aborted. This applies generally to commands that produce output such as
ARROW, BOX, CIRCLE, HISTOGRAM, PLOT, BAR, JOIN, and LIST as well as
SMOOTH, BIN, X=, and so on. It does not apply to the SET commands. In
addition ABORT just prevents journaling of inconvenient commands such as
SHOW, SPAWN, and HELP.
15.64.36.3 APPEND - This is equivalent to using the APPEND option for
all commands that create new data sets.
15.64.36.4 CONFIRM - This is equivalent to using the CONFIRM option for
any command that uses this option. When this mode is on you must confirm
all data deletions with a YES, NO, QUIT, or ALL answer.
15.64.36.5 CHECK - CHECK=OFF is equivalent to using the CHECK=OFF option
for commands such as ADD, SMOOTH, FFT, DEFINE HIST .... It turns off the
checks for appropriate data. Usually this means that the data must be a
histogram with equally spaced bins. For commands that take 2 data sets
there is the requirement that the data sets must match.
15.64.36.6 DATAVECTOR - This modifies the interpretation of DX,DY,DZ to
be vector components. It modifies only the PLOT, ADD, SUBTRACT, and
MULTIPLY commands.
15.64.36.7 DEBUG - Automatic flush at the end of each command. If you
SET FILE LIST=TT: and DEBUG=ON you can see each command and its result in
order. For compatability with previous versions NODEBUG is a synonym for
DEBUG=OFF.
15.64.36.8 ECHO - ECHO=n selects n data points to be listed when read.
NOECHO is the same as ECHO=0 If you do not specify n it is assumed to be
1000.
15.64.36.9 ERASE - Selects erase mode for plotting. While plotting in
this mode The plotted data erases previous data. This mode is reset to
ERASE=OFF whenever a new plot is begun.
15.64.36.10 EXPAND - Selects EXPAND=ON whenever you PLOT, JOIN, or
HISTOGRAM.
15.64.36.11 FILECASE - Selects the case of file names.
1. Upper - File names are converted to upper case
2. Lower - File names are converted to lower case
3. Mixed - The case remains the same as typed.
If a file name is enclosed in quotes, then it is never converted.
15.64.36.12 HARDTEXTURE - Selects hardware or software texture
generation.
15.64.36.13 JOURNALING - Turns on or off output to the journal file.
15.64.36.14 LISTING - Turns on or off the output to the listing file.
15.64.36.15 LOG - Turns on or off automatic logging. Many commands use
the option LOG to tell you what they are doint. When logging mode is on
these commands automatically log teir actions. For example with LOG=ON
when you use the MULTIPLY command, it informs you which data sets are
multiplied.
15.64.36.16 MONITOR - This is the same as using the MONITOR option for
all commands where it is legal. For example if MODE MONITOR=ON then when
you do a fit the result is automatically plotted.
15.64.36.17 PROPORTIONAL - Selects proportional or fixed spacing for the
text.
15.64.36.18 QUICK - This turns off certain calculations to make plotting
faster. One side effect of this is to prevent proper centering or
justification of titles, and labels. If you wish both speed and proper
justification, you can get proper justification for titles with no
sub/superscripts by:
TD:SET MODE PROPORTIONAL=OFF
Plots can be made still faster by:
TD:SET MODE VECTOR=OFF
This only works if your output device has hardware character generation
for the size characters you select.
15.64.36.19 SHOW - Show mode automatically generates a SHOW command
after any SET command is used.
15.64.36.20 TITLE - Automatically plots the title of a data set along
with the data when you use a CONTOUR, HISTOGRAM, JOIN, or PLOT command.
This is equivalent to specifying TITLE=ON along with the commmand.
15.64.36.21 TRACE - Produces traceback whenever an error occurrs. For
compatability with previous versions NOTRACE is a synonym for TRACE=OFF.
15.64.36.22 TREE - Setting mode TREE=ON is the same as specifying
TREE=ON for any command that uses this option. This is used when
searching HBOOK4 for histograms.
15.64.36.23 VECTOR - VECTOR=ON requires software drawn characters
instead of hardware chars. Character generation is slower, but more
uniform. Software characters are always drawn when a non blank case
string is supplied, or if your output device can not produce hardware
characters in the size selected. You may request hardware characters by
setting the title/label size to a negative value. For compatability with
previous versions NOVECTOR is a synonym for VECTOR=OFF.
15.64.36.24 VLOG - Enables Video logging. When you use the cursor a
Cross will be drawn at the selected cursor location, and a dotted line
will be drawn around the resulting limits.
15.64.37 MONITOR
This sets the type of plot each monitor mode produces.
SET MONITOR [{ALL|DATA|MESH} {BIN|CONTOUR|JOIN|HISTOGRAM|PLOT "options"}]
The options may be any legitimate options for the type of plot selected.
If you do not supply any options then the defaults are used.
example
TD:SET MONITOR MESH HISTOGRAM "BLOCK"
Produces a block or "Lego" plot when you monitor a mesh histogram.
TD:SET MONITOR DATA JOIN "1 dots
Joins normal data sets with single dotted line segments.
TD:SET MONITOR DATA PLOT "SYM=5O" MESH JOIN
Plots normal data and joins mesh data.
(Default:MESH PLOT "NORAN VAR SYM=10" DATA HISTOGRAM "")
15.64.38 NAME
SET NAME "New data set name" [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="old name"]
Sets a new name for all the selected data sets. If no sets are specified,
then all data set names are modified. If the name ends in "%" then the
old name is appended to the new name.
Options
1. CONFIRM - If selected Topdrawer will prompt you for each data
set. You repy YES, NO, ALL, or QUIT. ALL will do the rest
without any more prompts, while QUIT skips all the rest.
2. SETS - Selects a range of data sets to rename.
3. SELECT - Selects the data sets by name. WIld characters are
permitted "*" or "%" See:SET EXACT.
Example
TD:SET NAME "My data" SET=5
Data set number 5 has the new name "My data"
TD:SET NAME "My %" SELECT="Your*"
All data sets beginning with the name "Your" are renamed to "My Your..."
15.64.39 ORDER
This sets the order in which data must be entered. The order is the same
as specified in the set order command. This option remains the same until
the next SET ORDER or NEW PLOT command. This has no effect on mesh data
input.
SET ORDER [[N][R|D]{X|THETA} [fctr]] [[N][R|D]{Y|RADIUS} [fctr]] [[N][R|
D]{Z|PHI} [fctr]] [[N][R|D]U [fctr]] [[N][R|D]V [fctr]] [[N][R|
D]W [fctr]] [SYMBOL] [DUMMY[=n]] [PACKED[=ON|OFF]] [PERMANENT]
15.64.39.1 Options -
1. X,Y,Z - The data to plot
2. U,V,W - Auxiliary coordinate data
3. DX,DY,...DW - The error on the data as half width for the error
bars.
4. NDX,NDY,...NDW - The negative half of the error bar. If not
defined then it is the same as the error (DX...).
5. RX,RY,...NRX,...NDW - Errors given relative to the central value.
(DX=RX*X)
6. RADIUS,DRADIUS,THETA,DTHETA - Polar coordinates are also enabled
for the current plot.
7. PHI,DPHI - Spherical coordinates are enabled for the current
plot.
8. RRADIUS,RTHETA,RPHI - Errors given relative to a central value.
If PHI is used SPHERICAL is enabled, otherwise POLAR is enabled.
9. SYMBOL - The symbol to plot. This should not be the first item.
If you need to have the symbol first, then you must use the READ
POINTS command, or omit the symbol for the first data point.
10. DUMMY - Specifies this entry is a dummy and should be ignored.
If n is specified then n entries are ignored. Only numbers are
ignored.
11. fctr - Is a scale factor to multiply the data by when it is read.
(Default:1.0)
12. PACKED - Specifies that dats is in packed format with several
points per line and no semicolons ";" between them.
13. PERMANENT - Specifies that this order is permanent until the next
SET ORDER command.
(Default:X 1.0,Y 1.0,DX 1.0,DY 1.0,SYMBOL)
If this command is used without any options other than PERMANENT, the
order is set to the default. Numeric fields preceding the symbol may be
onitted.
15.64.39.2 Examples -
TD:SET ORDER X,Y,DX,DY,SYMBOL,Z,DZ
TD:1,2 1O 3,4,5,6,7
Enters a point X=1, Y=2, DX=DY=0, SYMBOL=1O, Z=3, DZ=4 The numbers 5,6,
and 7 are ignored.
SET ORDER X Y PACKED
1 2 3 4
Enters 2 points X=1,Y=2 and X=3,Y=4
SET ORDER Y PACKED
1 3 5
X=0 BY 1
Enters 3 points (0,1), (1,3) and (2,5)
15.64.40 OUTLINE
This enables the outline on each axis. The outline is the line drawn at
the edge of the plot.
SET {OUTLINE|FRAME} [INHIBIT|ENABLE] [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT] [ON|OFF]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[PERMANENT]
This acts on the current plot only if PERMANENT not specified. To control
other individual elements of the axes use:
SET AXES, SET TICKS, SET LABELS, SET SCALES
(Default:ON)
15.64.40.1 Options -
1. INHIBIT|ENABLE - inhibits or enables the automatic outline
generation for the current plot or window. (Default:ENABLE) You
may still draw the outline with the PLOT OUTLINE command.
2. ALL - enables outlines for top, bottom, right and left.
3. TOP - enables outline for the TOP of plot
4. BOTTOM - selects outline for the bottom of the plot.
5. RIGHT - selects outline for the right hand side
6. LEFT - selects outline for the left hand side.
7. ON - allows drawing outlines
8. OFF - prevents drawing outlines
9. INTENSITY - Sets line intensity or width (0-5). 0 gets the
intensity from the SET INTENSITY or SET AXES command.
10. WHITE... - Sets the line color.
11. SOLID... - Sets the line texture. (Default:SOLID)
See:Command SET TEXTURE
12. PERMANENT - Makes the current settings permanent from plot to
plot.
15.64.41 PATTERN
This selects the pattern for patterned lines. These are produced by JOIN,
HIST, PLOT, or BAR commands. This option remains the same until changed
by a SET PATTERN command.
SET PATTERN [RANDOM|FUNNY] [DOT] [DASH] [DAASH] [SPACE] [SIZE=n]
[PERMANENT]
SET PATTERN p1 s1 p2 s2 ....p10 s10
1. RANDOM - The distance following this is random.
2. DOT - Draws a single dot followed by a 0.1" space.
3. DASH - Draws a short dash 0.1" long followed by 0.1" space.
4. DAASH - Draws a long dash 0.3" followed by 0.1" space.
5. SPACE - Adds 0.05" of blank space.
6. SIZE=n - Size of dashes, and the distance between dashes and
dots.
(Default:0.1)
7. p = distance to draw in inches. If negative it varies randomly.
8. s = distance to skip in inches. If negative it varies randomly.
9. PERMANENT - Makes the current SIZE the permanent default.
You may enter up to a maximum of 20 values or 10 DOT/DASH/DAASH
specifiers. Random values vary from zero to the value specified. You may
also specify patterns as part of any drawing command. For example:
TD:HISTOGRAM PATTERN DOT DOT DASH
is the same as ...
TD:SET PATTERN DOT DOT DASH; HISTOGRAM PATTERN
or...
TD:HISTOGRAM DOT DOT DASH
See:Command SET TEXTURE
15.64.41.1 Example -
TD:SET PATTERN DOT DOT DASH DASH
or...
TD:SET PATTERN 0.,.1,0.,.1,.1,.1,.1,.1
is a dot,dot,dash,dash pattern
TD:SET PATTERN DOT DOT SPACE
or...
TD:SET PATTERN 0,.1,0,.15
is an assymmetrical dot,dot pattern.
TD:SET PATTERN .3,.1,.1,.1
or...
TD:SET PATTERN DAASH DASH
is a long,short dash pattern.
TD:SET PATTERN -.2,.1
is a dash pattern where the dash varies in length from 0.0 to 0.2
TD:SET PATTERN RANDOM DOT
or...
TD:SET PATTERN 0.0,-0.1
is a randomly spaced dot pattern.
TD:SET PATTERN RANDOM DOT DASH
or...
TD:SET PATTERN 0,-.1,.1,.1
is a random dot,fixed dash pattern.
TD:SET PATTERN SIZE=.05 DOT DASH
or...
TD:SET PATTERN 0,.05,.05,.05
is a small dot dash pattern.
15.64.42 PAUSE
SET PAUSE|WAIT [ON|OFF]
Pause is normally set on for interactive devices, and off for non
interactive. The Pause occurrs at each NEW PLOT command inside an input
file, or when deferred errors must be typed.
15.64.43 PEN
This selects the default Calcomp plotter pens or the color. This is
effective only for the current plot, or until another SET COLOR or SET PEN
command.
SET PEN 1|2|3|4|5|6|7
See:Command SET COLOR
(Default:1)
If no pen number is specified it is set to 1.
15.64.44 POLAR
SET POLAR [ON|OFF] [DEGREES|RADIANS|GRAD|PERCENT|FULLCIRCLE=n] [PERMANENT]
This sets up to plot in polar coordinates. Coordinates are (R,THETA,Z)
representaton. This affects not only the plotting of data, but also the
FFT and TRANSFORM commands.
1. ON|OFF turn the polar coordinates on or off. (Default:ON)
2. PERMANENT - Sets these parameters permanently.
3. DEGREES... - Selects angle representation (Default:DEGREES)
A. GRAD - (0-400)
B. DEGREES - (0-360)
C. PERCENT - (0-100)
D. RADIANS - (0-6.2831853)
E. FULLCIRCLE=n - (0-n)
This feature is not fully implemented. You still set the limits in X,Y,Z
coordinates, and automatic scaling centers the origin. When you plot, the
axes are not automatically generated if polar coordinates are on. You
must manually plot the axes with the command: PLOT AXES. If you wish the
X and Y axes to be scaled the same way you should.
TD:SET LIMITS SCALE
See commands:X,SET ORDER,SET STORAGE,SET SPHERICAL
Example
TD:SET POLAR FULL=1.0
Angles represented by a number from 0 to 1.0 range from 0 to 360 degrees.
15.64.45 PROMPT
SET PROMPT [MAIN|PAUSE] [ERASE] [TOP] [BOTTOM] [BELL] [nn]
["prompt_string"]
This sets the current prompt string with a maximum of 80 characters. If a
null or blank string is used, then there is no prompt. If a prompt has
imbedded blanks it must be enclosed in quotes. The prompt string remains
the same until a new one is selected.
1. MAIN - Is the main prompt string.
(Default:"TD:")
2. PAUSE - Is the prompt string used when a NEW PLOT is started.
(Default:"PAUSE:")
3. ERASE - The prompt erases the screen (ANSI terminal). This
erases text from a VT-1xx/2xx compatible terminal. This does not
erase TEKTRONIX graphics, but REGIS graphics will be erased.
This must be precede the string.
4. TOP - The prompt is at the top of the screen (ANSI terminal).
5. BOTTOM - The prompt is at the bottom of the screen (ANSI
terminal).
6. BELL - This rings the bell for each prompt.
7. nn - This inserts a control character (0-255) into the string.
8.
This command is useful for controlling the prompt for different types of
terminals. On some terminals you can control the position of the prompt,
so that it will not interfere with the plot, while on others, you may not
want any prompts.
15.64.45.1 Examples -
TD:SET PROMPT MAIN TOPDRAWER: PAUSE " "
Changes the main prompt and sets no prompt for pause.
TD:SET PROMPT MAIN "TD: "
This puts a space at the end of the prompt.
TD:SET PROMPT MAIN=TOP "TD:"
or...
TD:SET PROMPT MAIN=27,"[f",27,"[KTD:"
Puts the prompt at the top of an ANSI (VT100 etc.) terminal for the
prompt.
15.64.46 REVISION
SET REVISION=n.m
Sets the current revision level. This affects the operation of TOPDRAWER.
By lowering the revision level you may return to old behavior. Some of
the old revision levels are:
* 1.0 - Original version
* 2.0 - SET THREE THETA modified to conform to documentation.
* 2.2 - X= SET=n FROM=n1 TO=n2... Worked incorrectly if n>1.
15.64.47 SECONDARY
SET SECONDARY
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
15.64.48 SEGMENTS
SET SEGMENTS [ALL |AXES |LABELS |OULINE |POINTS |PLOTS |TICKS |TITLES
=[ON|OFF]]
Breaks the selected objects into separate segments. Each segment is
immediately flushed.
15.64.49 SCALE
This selects the scales to use. To select the range of data to plot
See:Command SET LIMITS.
SET SCALE {X|Y|Z|ALL}
[LINEAR] [MONTHS] [YEARS] [DAYS|TIME|HOURS|MINUTES|SECONDS]
[POWER[=n]|ROOT[=n]] [USER=[n1[,n2,...n10]]]
[LABELS|TICKS=n [LONG|SHORT|NONE]]
[NORMAL [MEAN=x] [DEVIATION=s] ]
[[-]LOGARITHMIC]
[LABELS=n1,n2... [EXPONENTIAL[=ON|OFF]][NONE]]
[TICKS=n1,n2... [LONG|SHORT|ALL|NONE]]
[DECADES=n] [SUBTICKS=n]
[REVERSE[=ON|OFF]] [BASE=n] [PERMANENT]
To control other individual elements of the axes use:
SET AXES, SET TICKS, SET LABELS, SET OUTLINE
(Default:ALL LINEAR LABELS=6 TICKS=5)
15.64.49.1 X|Y|Z|ALL - Selects which axis to set. You may set all three
axes with one set axes command.
15.64.49.2 BASE -
BASE=n - Selects the base for the plot.
* LINEAR this is useful for non-decimal units. The labeled ticks are
put at locations BASE*ROUND*POWER where:
POWER = a power of 10 1,10,100
ROUND = 1.0,1.0,2.5, or 5.0
* LOG scaling large ticks are put at powers of the base. This
determines where ticks are put. BASE 2 would put labels at 1, 2, 4,
8, 16,.... If exponential notation is selected then the base is used
in the notation.
15.64.49.3 DAYS - Values are the number of days from the base date.
See:Command SET SCALE TIME
15.64.49.4 LABELS - This selects the maximum number of ticks with
labels. For more information See:LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC.
15.64.49.5 LINEAR - Linear scale is used
* LABELS - maximum number of big ticks with labels. (Default:6)
* TICKS - number of subintervals with unlabeled ticks. SHORT|LONG
determine whether the unlabeled ticks are short or long. If
unspecified SHORT is assumed.
(Default:5 SHORT)
If TICKS=1 then there are no unlabeled ticks.
15.64.49.6 LOGARITHMIC - Log scale is used. Each decade may be divided
into subintervals corresponding to the leading digit of the scale
(1,2...,9). -LOGARITHMIC generates a log scale for negative values.
* LABELS=n1,n2.. - Specify which subintervals within a decade are
labeled (2-9). ALL labels all subintervals while NONE labels no
subintervals. If you specify NONE then no subintervals are labelled.
If EXPONENTIAL is specified exponential notation is used.
* TICKS=n1... - specifies which subintervals have unlabeled ticks
(2-9). ALL puts ticks on all subintervals while NONE draws no ticks.
SHORT|LONG determine whether labelled ticks are short or long. If
unspecified LONG is assumed. Labelled ticks at each decade are
always long.
* DECADES=n - (1 to 31) Specifies how often decades are labelled. For
example DECADES=2 labels every other decade.
* SUBTICKS=n - (0-9) Specifies how many subticks are between
subinterval ticks. If n is greater than 0 then long ticks are drawn
at for each interval and n short subticks are drawn in between.
If unspecified labels, and ticks are picked for "pleasing" results.
Generally if less than one half decade is plotted the rules for making
linear scales and ticks are followed. Otherwise a maximum of 6 or 7
labels are produced. Exponential notation is only used if specified or
when the the label would exceed 6 digits or more than 3 decades are
plotted.
15.64.49.7 MINUTES - Values are the number of minutes from the base
date. See:Command SET SCALE TIME.
15.64.49.8 MONTHS - This selects labels of the form Jan, Feb etc.
This invokes a special scale where Noon Jan 1=1.01 An entire day is from
1.005 to 1.015. 1,13,25 are labeled January. 2,14 is February and so on.
No year titles are generated. Every 4'th year is a leap year with 366
days. Year 1,2,3 are non leap years while years 4,8,12 are leap years.
The current year is number 1.
1. LABELS - The value n specifies the maximum number of labels.
SHORT,LONG generate either 1 Letter labels or 3 Letter labels.
(Default:1)
2. TICKS - Specify the maximum number of small ticks between labels.
SHORT,LONG specify either long or short ticks.
(Default:6 SHORT)
15.64.49.9 NORMAL - The scale is in units of standard deviation from
the center of a normal curve. MEAN, DEVIATION set the center, and width
of the normal curve.
15.64.49.10 POWER|ROOT - This sets the scale to be the selected power or
root. N must be in the range 0.1 to 100. If n is not specified it is
assumed to be 2. The sign of the axes is preserved to avoid multiple
values. The rules for determining ticks and labels are the same as for
linear scales.
Example
TD:SET SCALE Y ROOT=3
Y is scaled as Y'=SIGN(ABS(Y)**(1/3),Y)
TD:SET SCALE X POWER=2
X is scaled as X'=SIGN(ABS(X)**2,X)
15.64.49.11 REVERSE - If this is specified before any data is plotter
it makes the scale go from large to small rather than small to large. For
example the limits on the x scale are 0.0 and 1.1. The left hand side of
the X axis would be 0.0 and the right would be 1.0. REVERSE makes the
left hand side 1.0 and the right hand side 0.0.
If this is specified for 3-d plots after the data is plotted, it moves the
origin of the axes to the other side of the specified axis. For example
the following will plot axes along the sides of a 3-d cube.
TD:plot axes
TD:set scale x reverse y reverse;plot axes
TD:set scale x reverse=off y reverse z reverse;plot axes
TD:set scale x reverse=on y reverse=off;plot axes
15.64.49.12 SECONDS - Values are the number of seconds from the base
date. See:Command SET SCALE TIME
15.64.49.13 TICKS - This selects the maximum number of unlabeled
ticks. This varies with the type of scale selected. For more inforation
see:LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC.
15.64.49.14 TIME-HOURS - Values are the number of hours from the base
date. Normally date/time may be expressed as YYY\MM\DD or
YYY\MM\DD\HH:MM:SS.SS or HH:MM:SS.SS. This is translated into the number
of hours from the base date. See:Command SET DATE. You may have the axes
labels in date/time format by selecting either a time or hour scale. If
the time is stored as seconds,minutes, or days then you may select the
scale appropriately.
15.64.49.15 USER -
USER=n1,n1... specifies the type of user scale. This is only useful
if you supply your own scaling routines. n1 is the scale type. n2...n10
are values passed to the user routine. The user function is called:
Value=TDFNCT(X,SCALE)
X is the value to rescale.
SCALE(10) is the array of values n1...n10.
For example a log scale would be: TDFNCT=ALOG(X)
15.64.49.16 YEARS - Values are given by year and Julian day.
YEAR+DAY*.001
Example
Jan 1 1976=1976.001
1. LABELS - Specifies the maximum number of labelled years.
(Default:6)
2. TICKS - Specifies the maximum number of ticks per year.
SHORT,LONG specify either long or short ticks.
15.64.49.17 PERMANENT - sets the values permanently for the current
axis. Other axes are not affected. Any values specified to the right of
the option permanent are not set permanently.
15.64.49.18 Example -
TD:SET SCALE X LOG Y LINEAR
Sets the X scale to logarithmic, and Y to linear.
TD:SET SCALE X LOG SCALE 1,5 TICKS 2,3,4,6,7,8,9
This sets the log scales on the X axis so that labels will be drawn at
1,10,100... and 5,50,500... All subintervals will have small ticks
2,3,4,6,7,8,9,20,30,40,60....
TD:SET SCALE X LINEAR LABELS=10 TICKS=8 LONG
Selects a linear scale for X with a maximum of 10 labelled ticks, and a
maximum of 8 unlabelled ticks. All ticks will be the same length.
TD:SET SCALE ALL LOG Z LINEAR
Sets X,Y scales logarithmic, and Z linear.
TD:SET SCALE ALL LOG
Sets all scales logarithmic.
15.64.50 SHADOW
This causes a 3-d plot to be shadowed onto the back side where the grid is
drawn.
SET SHADOW [ALL[=ON|OFF]] [SYMBOL[=ON|OFF]] [Y|X!Z[=ON|OFF]] [XY|YZ|
ZX[=ON|OFF]]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[PERMANENT]
To produce shadowing you must select at least one plane to shadow the plot
in (XY,YZ,ZX).
15.64.50.1 Options -
1. ALL - Turns on or off all shadowing options.
2. SYMBOL - Shadows the symbol.
3. X - Draws lines from point to back plane along the X axis.
4. Y - Draws lines from point to back plane along the Y axis.
5. Z - Draws lines from point to back plane along the Z axis.
6. :XY - Shadows in XY plane.
7. YZ - Shadows in YZ plane when THREE=ON.
8. ZX - Shadows in ZX plane when THREE=ON.
9. INTENSITY - Sets line intensity or width (0-5). 0 gets the
intensity from the SET INTENSITY or SET AXES command.
10. WHITE... - Sets the line color. (Default:Same as axes)
11. SOLID... - Sets the line texture. (Default:Same as axes)
See:Command SET TEXTURE.
12. SYMBOL - Draws a symbol [sym] to be plotted at intersection of
vertical and horizontal lines. (Default:sym=0O)
13. PERMANENT - Sets the current shadow options permanently for all
NEW plots.
If no options are specified, then all shadow parameters are reset to the
original defaults.
(Default:ALL=OFF)
15.64.50.2 Example -
TD:SET SHADOW DOTS YZ ZX X SYM
This shadows the PLOT in 2 planes. The plot symbol will be shadowed in
both planes. In addition a dotted line parallel to X will be drawn from
the point to the YZ plane.
15.64.51 SHIELD
Sets an area to be shielded. Nothing may be drawn inside this area while
shielded.
SET SHIELD [=n] [OFF] [DAtA|TExT] [FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[Y=]ny,[Z=]nz]]
[CURSOR]
1. n - The shield number between 1 and 4. If unspecified the next
available shield is used.
2. OFF - Turns the n'th shield off. If n is not specied all
shielded areas are turned off.
3. FROM|TO - Allows you to specify the limit of the shielded area.
If no limits are specified the current window is shielded.
4. DATA - Specifies the limit in data coordinates.
5. TEXT - Specifies the limit in text coordinates.
6. CURSOR - You use the cursor to specify the limits.
example
TD:SET SHIELD FROM 1,2 to 3,5
Sets a shielded area in text coordinates.
TD:SET SHIELD DATA FROM Y=5
Shield all data from Y=5 for all X values.
15.64.52 SIZE
This sets the physical size of the plot. Once set it remains the same
until a new SET SIZE command is issued. This command should only be used
immediately after a NEW PLOT command or a SET DEVICE command. It may not
be used after any commands that plot data.
SET SIZE [[X=]x [BY|Y=] y]
[UNITS=units] [CM|CENTIMETERS|MM|MILLIMTERS|METERS|INCHES]
[MAGNIFY|REDUCE=factor]
[SIDEWAYS|ROTATED|NORMAL|ORIENTATION=n]
[MARGINS=[nl,[nr,[nb,[nt]]]]] [LEFT=n] [RIGHT=n] [BOTTOM=n] [TOP=n]
If no options are specified the sizes are reset to the defaults.
(Default:NORMAL 13 by 10 inches MARGINS=0)
15.64.52.1 X,y - Set the overall size of the plot The final size is the
selected size plus the margins. The actual size of the plot depends on
the device you are using. The x,y are the size of the TEXT system. If
the final size plus margins is larger than the physical size of the
display, the plot is automatically reduced to fit. If the final size is
smaller than the physical size of the device, the plot plus margins is
centered.
15.64.52.2 UNITS - Sets the units of x and y. For example UNITS=2.54
sets the units to centimeters. This changes only the position units. All
character sizes are still measured in tenths of an inch. If you wish to
set the units without changing the size of the plot or you wish to change
the character size measurement use the command SET UNITS
15.64.52.3 CM.... - This sets the units to a standard set of units.
15.64.52.4 MAGNIFY|REDUCE - Magnifies or reduces the overall plot by the
specified factor. This modifies the entire plot including the character
sizes. If the requested final size is too big for the device, REDUCE is
automatically set to a value smaller than 1. The magnification or
reduction is limited to the range 1.0E-5 to 1.0E+5.
example
TD:SET SIZE REDUCE=2
or...
TD:SET SIZE MAGNIFY=0.5
reduce the plot from 13 by 10 to 6.5 by 5.0 inches in size.
15.64.52.5 ORIENTATION - This is an integer value from 0 to 3 specifying
the orientation of the plot.
*** 0 Normal orientation
*** 1 Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. This is the same as sideways. X
goes from top to bottom, while Y points to the right.
*** 2 Rotated 180 degrees or Upside down
*** 3 Rotated 270 degrees clockwise, appropriate for TeX
15.64.52.6 SIDEWAYS - Rotates the entire plot by 90 degrees. If
SIDEWAYS was specified by SET DEVICE, the plot is already rotated, in
which case NORMAL will rotate it back.
15.64.52.7 MARGINS - Sets the left,right,bottom, and top margins. Any
unspecified margins are set equal to the left margin. If no margins are
specified then all margins are set to zero.
15.64.52.8 LEFT|RIGHT|TOP|BOTTOM - Sets just the specified margin.
15.64.52.9 Examples -
TD:SET SIZE 10 BY 13 SIDEWAYS
or...
TD:SET SIZE X=10 Y=13 SIDEWAYS
This rotates the normal plot from landscape to portrait and uses the full
page.
TD:SET SIZE Y=13
Sets Y to 13 while leaving X at the previous settting.
TD:SET SIZE SIDEWAYS
This rotates the plot and it occupies 13 by 10.
TD:SET SIZE 6.0 BY 9.0 SIDEWAYS MARGINS=1.15,.65,.775,.775
This sets the size and margins to produce a 1.5" margin on the left, and
1" on all other sides for a portrait plot on the VERSATEC.
TD:SET SIZE 9.0 BY 13.5 SIDEWAYS MARGINS=1.725,.975
This sets the size and margins to produce a 1.5" margin on the left, and
1" on all other sides for a portrait plot on the VERSATEC. This example
uses a 9 by 13.5 drawing space instead of a 6 by 9 space. There will be
an automatic reduction of .666667.
15.64.53 SPHERICAL
SET POLAR [ON|OFF] [RADIANS|DEGREES|FULLCIRCLE=n|GRAD] [PEERMANENT]
This sets up to plot in spherical coordinates. (THETA,R,PHI) instead of
(X,Y,Z). The data in X is now interpreted as THETA, Y is intepreted as R
and Z is intepreted as PHI. The data is not modified, just reinterpreted.
R=sqrt(X**2=Y**2+Z**2)
THETA=ATAN2(Y,X)
PHI=ATAN2(sqrt(x**2+Y**2),Z)
NOTE: There is no universally accepted convention for THETA or PHI.
Various books use different conventons. I have adopted a convention that
gives THETA the same definition in both spherical and polar coordinates.
1. ON|OFF turn the spherical coordinates on or off. (Default:ON)
2. PERMANENT - Sets these parameters permanently.
3. DEGREES... - Selects angle representation (Default:DEGREES)
A. GRAD - (0-400)
B. DEGREES - (0-360)
C. PERCENT - (0-100)
D. RADIANS - (0-6.2831853)
E. FULLCIRCLE=n - (0-n)
You still set the limits in X,Y,Z coordinates, and automatic scaling
centers the origin. When you plot, the axes are not automatically
generated if spherical coordinates are on. You must manually plot the
axes with the command: PLOT AXES.
15.64.54 STATISTICS
SET STATISTICS
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
This sets the range of data used by the lexicals. If any changes are made
to the data you need to use this command again.
15.64.54.1 LIMITED - Limits the data to the specified range. For 3-d
data the limit on the dependent variable is ignored. If limits are not
specified, the default is the current plot limits.
See:Command SET LIMITS.
1. X - Specifies X limit
2. Y - Specifies Y limit
3. Z - Specifies the Z limit
4. CURSOR - Brings up the cursor. You move it to the X,Y value you
wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to enter X
or Y to enter Y.
5. RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.
TD:SET STATISTICS LIMITED RECURSOR
is the same as...
TD:SET STATISTICS LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR
6. VLOG - Draws a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
dotted line around the final limits.
15.64.54.2 LINES|ROWS - For 3-d plots specifies which lines or rows of
the mesh data to use.
15.64.54.3 POINTS|COLUMNS - This specifies which points to use. For 3-d
this is the range of column numbers.
15.64.54.4 SETS - This specifies which data set to use.
15.64.55 STORAGE
This defines what is kept in storage. SET ORDER automatically calls SET
STORAGE if room for extra data is needed. This option remains the same
until changed by a SET ORDER or SET STORAGE command. The VAX uses virtual
memory, so the actual amount of storage is not not limited, but expands as
needed. If you have a virtual memory allocation failure, you may prevent
it by preallocating the needed memory with the SIZE option. If you still
get memory allocation failures, ask your system manager to increase the
available virtual memory.
SET STORAGE [ALL] [[N][R|D]X|THETA] [[N][R|D]Y|RADIUS] [[N][R|D]Z|PHI]
[[N][R|D]U] [[N][R|D]V] [[N][R|D]W] [SYMBOL]
[SIZE=n]
(Default:SYMBOL,X,Y,DX,DY)
ALL selects all coordinates. If this command is used without any options,
the storage is reset to the default. If all 3 coordinates X,Y,Z are
included in storage, 3-d plots are turned on.
If DX, the error on X, is selected then X is also selected. If NDX is
selected then both DX and X are selected. Likewise DY,DZ,..DPHI
automatically select Y....PHI. SYMBOL, X and Y are always included in the
storage. All other variables must be declared.
The NDX is the negative half of the error bar while DX is the positive
half. If NDX is not in stoage then DX specifies both halves. Similarly
NDY and NDZ are the negative halves of the Y,Z error bars.
If THETA is specified polar coordinates are enabled permanently. If PHI
is specified spherical coordinates are enabled.
SIZE=n allows you to pick the number of words of storage to allocate for
the VAX. This is not necessary, but it may save time since you may
preallocate the storage and avoid multiple automatic storage expansion.
Normally the amount of storage needed for regular data is about n*d+4
where n is the number of points and d is the number of coordinates
available in storage (SYMBOL,X,DX,Y,DY,....). For mesh data it is
((n+1)*(m+1)+4)*d+4 where n and m are the mesh dimensions and d is 1 for
regular mesh data or 2 for data with errors. If you have a name for the
data set it takes up 1 storage location for every 4 characters.
Example
TD:SET STORAGE X Y SYMBOL
To see the current storage use the command: SHOW STORAGE.
TD:SET STORAGE SIZE=<4+101*201+20>
Preallocates storage for a 100 by 200 mesh with an 80 character name.
15.64.56 SYMBOL
This selects the default symbol
SET SYMBOL "xx" [SIZE=n] [THETA=n] [PHI=n] [ANGLE=n] [PERMANENT]
If no parameters are specified the symbol and size are set to NONE and 2
and the angles are turned off. In other words SET SYMBOL is the same as
SET SYMBOL=NONE SIZE=2.
This command determines the symbol plotted data that have no symbol. If
you SET SYMBOL before reading data the symbol is assumed for the data you
are reading. See:Command READ POINTS and PLOT.
15.64.56.1 Xx - is the symbol to plot 0O to 9O or any duplex character.
DOT or " " produces a dot. The second character in the xx pair selects
the case or font to use. Only plot symbols 0O to 9O are guaranteed to be
properly centered. If no symbol is desired specify NONE.
15.64.56.2 ANGLE - Specifies the orientation angle of the symbol in a
plot of 3-d data. This is the rotation angle around the axis specified by
THETA and PHI.
15.64.56.3 SIZE - is the size in tenths of an inch If the size is
negative then it is adjusted automatically by the window size. The units
may be modified by SET UNITS CHARACTER.
(Default:2)
15.64.56.4 THETA - Specifies the polar angle of the normal to the symbol
in a plot of 3-d data.
15.64.57 PERMANENT
Makes the current symbol the permanent default. Normally a NEW PLOT
command resets the symbol to the permanent default.
15.64.57.1 PHI - Specifies the azimuthal angle of the normal to the
symbol in a plot of 3-d data. A negative value makes the symbols plot
with the normal perpendicular to the screen. In other words you are
looking normally at the symbol for a negative value.
15.64.57.2 3-d - If you plot 3-d data and PHI is greater than 0, the
symbol is oriented according to the specified THETA, PHI, and ANGLE.
15.64.57.3 Example -
TD:SET SYMBOL "$" SIZE=3.5
plots dollar signs .35 inches in size.
TD:SET SYMBOL 0O SIZE=10
plots "X" 1 inch high.
TD:SET SYMBOL GF
plots uppercase Greek Gammas. See:FONTS
TD:SET SYMBOL 0O PHI=0 ANGLE=45
plot crosses with the arms along the X,Y axes
TD:SET SYMBOL 0O PHI=90 THETA=90 ANGLE=45
plot crosses with the arms along the X,Z axes
15.64.58 TEXTURE
SET TEXTURE|STRUCTURE [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|
SPACE]
[PERMANENT]
This sets the default texture of a line drawn by a BOX, CIRCLE, ELLIPSE,
DIAMOND, PLOT, BAR, JOIN, or HIST command. To set the Texture of the
axes, ticks, or outline See:Command SET AXIS, SET OUTLINE, or SET TICKS.
You may also specify the texture with any command that draws. For example
you may JOIN DOTS or JOIN PATTERN and so on.
1. SOLID - Solid line
2. DOTS - Dotted line
3. DASHES - Short dashed line
4. DAASHES - Long dashed line (3x)
5. DOTDASH - Dot-dash line
6. SPACE - Adds an extra space between dots/dashes
7. PATTERNED - Line determined by SET PATTERN.
8. FUNNY - is a dot at the ends of each line segment. This is
generally only useful for joined and smoothed curves.
9. PERMANENT - Sets the current texture to be the permanent default.
(Default:SOLID)
If no options are specified it is set to SOLID. When a new plot is
started the texture is set to the permanent default.
If you specify more than 1 texture option, or use the option PATTERN, then
a patterned texture is assumed and the pattern is generated. When FUNNY
precedes any other texture specifier then it is generated randomly.
15.64.58.1 Example -
TD:SET TEXTURE DAASH
This generates a "hardware" texture or long dashes.
TD:SET TEXTURE DOT DOT DASH
or...
TD:SET PATTERN DOT DOT DASH; SET TEXTURE PATTERN
This is a dot-dot-dash texture, which is also set to be the current
pattern.
TD:SET TEXTURE DOT FUNNY DASH
or...
TD:SET PATTERN DOT RANDOM DASH; SET TEXTURE PATTERN
This is a uniformly spaced dot 0.1" followed by a random length dash.
TD:SET TEXTURE PATTERN DASH; JOIN
or...
TD:SET PATTERN DASH; SET TEXTURE PATTERN; JOIN
Sets the texture to be a patterned dash. This will produce device
independent pictures, but they will be slower than:
TD:SET TEXTURE DASH; JOIN
or...
TD:JOIN DASH
15.64.59 THREE
This sets parameters for 3-dimensional plots and turns ON 3-d graphics.
Essentially you must set up the viewpoint for 3-D. The plot is seen by an
observer through a "screen" or window. The location of the screen and
observers eye may be specified.
SET THREE [ON|OFF|AUTOMATIC]]
[CENTER=x,y,z]
[VERTICAL=xv,yv,zv]
[DIRECTION=xv,yv,zv] [THETA=angle] [PHI=angle]
[DISTANCE|RDISTANCE=n] [SCRD=n]
[REDUCE|MAGNIFY=n]
[ORIGIN=x,y,z]
[SEPARATION=s|LEFT|RIGHT|MIDDLE]
[WORLD=x [BY] y [BY] z]
[XAXIS|YAXIS|ZAXIS=angle]
[PERMANENT]
NOTE: The actual view also depends on the window size selected by SET
WINDOW.
WARNING
If this command is issued in between 2 plots overlaying each
other, they will not have the same scales.
15.64.59.1 Options -
1. CENTER=x,y,z - Is the center of the 3-d view. This moves the
plot around.
2. DIRECTION=xv,yv,zv - Controls the direction you are "looking"
from.
3. THETA=angle - The direction you are looking from (polar angle)
4. PHI=angle - The direction you are looking from (Azimuthal angle)
5. DISTANCE - Distance from you to the object.
6. SCRD - Distance from you to the viewing window.
7. RDISTANCE - Modifies DISTANCE + SCRD together (DISTANCE from you
to object)
8. REDUCE|MAGNIFY - Modifies size of the object relative to current
size.
9. ON|OFF - Turns 3-d plot on or off.
10. AUTOMATICE - 3-d plots are on if the data is 3-d.
11. ORIGIN=x,y,z - Set origin of axes for a PLOT AXES command.
12. PERMANENT - Makes current parameters permanent for subsequent
plots.
13. SEPARATION=n - Specifies left, right separation for stereo plots
14. LEFT - Specifies left eye view.
15. RIGHT - Specifies right eye view.
16. MIDDLE - Specifies center view (neither left nor right "Cyclops")
17. VERTICAL=xv,yv,zv - Direction of vertical.
18. WORLD=x BY y BY z - Limits on x,y,z coordinates.
19. X|Y|ZANGLE=n - Specifies orientation of labels and titles around
axis.
15.64.59.2 CENTER -
CENTER=x,y,z
The center of the picture in 3-d WORLD coordinates. This defines the
center of the object being viewed. If unspecified it is at the center of
the WORLD size.
(Default:6.5,5,5 inches)
15.64.59.3 DIRECTION -
DIRECTION=xv,yv,zv
Direction vector from CENTER to eye.
THETA=angle PHI=angle br;Alternate specification of DIRECTION in
polar coordinates. This is probably an easier number to specify. You
should specify either the DIRECTION or THETA and PHI. These are specified
relative to the VERTICAL vector.
PHI is the angle in degrees from vertical to line through the eye. PHI is
the azimuthal angle of the viewers eye.
(Default:60.0)
WARNING
The alogorithm used in Histogramming or Joining the data
requires that the viewpoint can not be "over" the structure
being plotted. The hidden line removal algorithm will not work
for an improperly placed viewpoint. You should avoid PHI=0 or
PHI=180.
THETA is the angle between projections in the horizontal plane of the
X-Axis and the line to the viewing position. THETA is the polar angle of
the viewers eye.
(Default:30.0)
Example
You wish to look at the plot from the +X axis:
TD:SET THREE THETA=0
You wish to lood at the plot from the +Y axis:
TD:SET THREE THETA=90
15.64.59.4 DISTANCE,SCRD,RDIST -
DISTANCE=nnn
Distance from CENTER to the EYE (Default:35in.)
SCRD=nnn
Distance from screen or viewing window to EYE. (Default:-18in.)
RDISTANCE=nnn
Same as distance, but the SCRD is changed also to keep the view the same.
(Relative distance)
If SCRD is negative then the actual SCRD is adjusted so that the view is
the same independent of the current window size. If |SCRD| = 0.5*DISTANCE
then the plot will fill the current window.
Essentially the SCRD is the distance from you to the screen, and DISTANCE
is the distance to the object being viewed. The ratio of SCRD/DISTANCE
determines the plot size while the absolute distance determines the
perspective of the plot. Large distances produce essentially a parallel
projection. If you wish to modify the plot size use the MAGNIFY or REDUCE
option.
Sometimes vertical lines are treated as being hidden when in fact they are
visible. This may be corrected by moving the view point far from the
screen. To set a distant viewpoint:
TD:SET THREE RDIST=8000
RDIST adjusts the viewpoint without changing the size of the resulting
plot.
15.64.59.5 REDUCE|MAGNIFY - These change the size of the plot without
changing the perspective. REDUCE=0.5 or MAGNIFY=2 both increase the size
by a factor of 2. The SCRD is modified but not the DISTANCE. The
magnification or reduction is limited to the range 1.0E-5 to 1.0E+5.
15.64.59.6 ON|OFF|AUTOMATIC - This turns on or off 3 dimensional
graphics. AUTOMATIC specifies that 3-d graphics is determined by the
data. 3-d is turned on only for Mesh data or if all 3 coordinates X,Y,Z
are in storage. (Default:ON)
15.64.59.7 ORIGIN -
ORIGIN=x,y,z
Sets the position in DATA system at which 3 axes will intersect when
drawn. (For MESH data, PLOT AXES is needed to draw them) The origin is
normally set to be the minimum X,Y,Z value entered. When set this value
is used locate the axes and the title.
15.64.59.8 PERMANENT - This makes all currently set parameters the
default. Since the command line is parsed from left to right, options on
the left side of this option are permanent, but options to the right are
not. When a new plot is started the current options revert to the
permanent value.
15.64.59.9 SEPARATION -
This specifies the distance between the true viewing point and viewing
axis. This is used for making stereo pairs.
(Default:SEPARATION=0)
1. LEFT - SEPARATION = -1.5
2. RIGHT - SEPARATION = 1.5
3. MIDDLE - SEPARATION = 0
15.64.59.10 VERTICAL -
VERTICAL=xv,yv,zv
Direction vector in WORLD system which projects onto a vertical line in
the window. (Default:0,0,1 - Z axis)
15.64.59.11 WORLD -
WORLD x [BY] y [BY] z
This sets the limits in inches on x,y,z in the world coordinates. All
data outside of these limits is clipped. This is not set to the default
when a new plot is started.
(Default:13,10,10 inches)
15.64.59.12 XAXIS -
XAXIS|YAXIS|ZAXIS angle
These options are used to control how the ticks and labels are drawn
relative to the axes. If the angle is not specified or it is greater than
360 degrees the axes are drawn in either the XY,YZ, or ZX plane for
maximum visibility. The angle allows you to rotate the labels,ticks, and
title around the axis. The rotation is specified by permuting the axes
XYZ. For a given axis n the angle 0 lies in the n,n+1 plane, and angle 90
lies in the n,n+2 plane, with the labels in the negative side.
Table of axes
This gives the plane and direction of the labels. The sign indicates the
side the labels are drawn on.
Axis 0 90 180 270 degrees
X -XY -ZX XY ZX
Y -YZ -XY YZ XY
Z -ZX -YZ ZX YZ
TD:SET THREE XAXIS=0
This draws the X labels and ticks in the XY plane with the labels in the
negative X side of the axis.
TD:SET THREE YAXIS=90
This draws the X labels and ticks in the YZ plane with the labels in the
negative Z side of the axis.
15.64.59.13 Revisions - Originally there was a major problem with
TOPDRAWER. The documented definition of THETA was not the same as the
actual definition. THETA was actually measured from the Y axis and
positive valued put the eye closer to the positive X axis. The actual
definition has been modified to conform to both the documentation and
conventional notation. If this is a problem, you may return to the old
definition by:
SET REVISION=1.
15.64.59.14 Examples - There is a set of sample plots you may view.
They include a drawing of the various angles and distances. They are:
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TD3D.TOP
15.64.60 TICKS
This determines the presence or absence of tick marks and their sizes. To
control the default number of ticks see SET SCALE.
SET TICKS [SIZE=n] [LONG=n]
[ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y|Z] [ON|OFF]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE]
[PERMANENT]
This acts on the current plot only if PERMANENT not specified. If the
parameters are omitted they are reset to the original default. To control
other individual elements of the axes use:
SET AXES, SET TICKS, SET LABELS, SET OUTLINE
(Default:ALL ON)
15.64.60.1 Options -
1. SIZE - Sets the size of the smaller ticks in inches. The larger
ones are normally 3 times the small ones. If unspecified this is
automatically set according to the paper size, and window to give
you pleasing results.
(Default:0.1)
2. LONG - Sets the ratio of long ticks to short ticks. This may be
varied from 0.1 to 10. (Default:3)
3. ALL - enables ticks for top, bottom, right and left.
4. TOP - enables tick for the TOP of plot
5. BOTTOM - selects tick for the bottom of the plot.
6. RIGHT - selects tick for the right hand side
7. LEFT - selects tick for the left hand side.
8. X,Y,Z - selects the axis to plot.
9. ON - allows drawing ticks
10. OFF - prevents drawing ticks
11. INTENSITY - Sets line intensity or width (0-5). 0 gets the
intensity from the SET INTENSITY command.
12. WHITE... - Sets the line color.
13. SOLID... - Sets the line texture. (Default:SOLID)
See:Command SET TEXTURE
14. PERMANENT - Makes the current settings permanent from plot to
plot.
15.64.60.2 Examples -
TD:SET TICKS ALL OFF BOTTOM ON LEFT ON
specifies ticks only on the bottom and left of the plot.
TD:SET TICKS RED DOTS SIZE=0.2 LONG=2
specifies dotted red ticks with short ticks 0.2 inches long and long ticks
0.4 inches.
15.64.61 TITLES
This sets default title values.
SET TITLES [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y]
[INDEX=n] [LINES=n] [MARGIN=n] [SCALE=n] [SHIFT=n] [SIZE=n]
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n]
[NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
[PERMANENT]
[ESCAPE="char"] [SUBSTITUTE="char1char2"]
If the parameters are omitted they are reset to the original default. You
should make modifications to the title options before any plotting is
done. The MARGIN, SIZE, SCALE, INDEX, and LINES all modify the location
and size of relative windows. See:Command SET WINDOWS.
15.64.61.1 Options -
1. ALL,TOP,BOTTOM,RIGHT,LEFT,X,Y - Selects title to modify
2. INDEX=n - The separation between consecutive lines for all titles
3. INTENSITY=n - The intensity (width) of all titles
4. LINES=n - The maximum number of lines to reserve for a title
5. MARGIN=n - Extra margin around the window for titles
6. PERMANENT - Makes values permanent
7. SCALE=n - Multiply title size by n
8. SIZE=n - Character size for all titles
9. WHITE... - Title color for all titles
10. ESCAPE - Sets the escape character for imbedded text/case
11. SUBSTITUTE - Sets the begin, end substititute characters. This
allows you to include predefined text strings.
15.64.61.2 ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT|X|Y - Selects the title you wish to
change.
(Default:ALL)
15.64.61.3 INDEX - Sets the height of a title line. The actual
character height is the same as the size. This determines the separation
between 2 lines of text for the titles. The INDEX applies to all titles
LEFT...TOP.
(Default:2)
15.64.61.4 INTENSITY - Sets the title intensity or line width. (0-5)
(Default:NONE) 0 gets the intensity from the SET INTENSITY command.
15.64.61.5 LINES - Sets the number of lines to reserve for a title. For
example if you wish to have a 2 line title at the top of the plot you
should:
TD:SET TITLE TOP LINES=2
Negative lines puts the title inside the window.
TD:SET TITLE BOTTOM LINES=-2
puts the bottom title inside the window and allocates room for 2 lines of
title.
(Default:1.2 BOTTOM 2)
15.64.61.6 MARGIN - This sets a fractional margin around each window.
Normally this is 0.025 or 2.5% of the total window size. You may set it
to any value from 0.0 to 0.4. If you use relative or numbered windows the
final window size is reduced by the margin as well as the number of title
lines, and labels. The margin is not absulute. You may still put titles
inside the margin, by specifying the title location.
(Default:0.025)
15.64.61.7 PERMANENT - makes the current values the permanent values.
15.64.61.8 SCALE - This sets a scale factor on the title size. Normally
LEFT,RIGHT, and BOTTOM are 1.0 while TOP is 1.5. This makes the Top title
50% bigger than other titles. You may modify this to range from 0.1 to
10.0.
(Default:1.0 TOP 1.5)
15.64.61.9 SIZE - SIZE=n gives the approximate spacing between chars.
in tenths of an inch. If n is negative hardware characters will be used
when available. If n is positive software characters will be used when
mode VECTOR=OFF. This size determines the title size when a
TOP,BOTTOM,... title is specified. The TOP title is normally 1.5 times
this value. Normally the size is automatically set according to the paper
size, and window to give you pleasing results. The SIZE applies to all
titles LEFT...TOP. The units may be modified by SET UNITS CHARACTER.
(Default:2)
15.64.61.10 WHITE... - sets the title color. (Default:NONE)
15.64.61.11 Windows - When you specify a relative or numbered window the
window is first reduced by the margin fraction. Then each title is
allocated INDEX*LINES*SIZE*SCALE around the window. Finally the window is
reduced to make room for labels. Each title except for the bottom will be
positioned INDEX*SIZE*SCALE*(LINES-.5) from the edge of the window+labels.
The bottom is positioned INDEX*SIZE*SCALE/2 from the window+labels.
15.64.61.12 ESCAPE - This defines a character to use as an "escape"
character. After the escape character you enter a "text","case" pair.
This allows you to imbed text case pairs in the text, without using a
separate case line. When used with the substitution you can define macros
for expressions. To output the ESCAPE character you must enter it twice
followed by a space.
example
TD:SET TITLE ESCAPE="@"
TD:TITLE TOP "This is a Greek alpha @AG"
Writes a title with an imbedded alpha.
TD:TITLE TOP "This an at symbol @@ ."
Writes the title:"This an at symbol @."
15.64.61.13 SUBSTITUTE - This defines a pair of characters to delimit a
substitution. Substitutions may not be nested. You define a string, and
then it will be included in your text when the name is bracketed by the
substitute pair. When used with the escape character, you can build
complicated expressions and include them in your titles in a simple
fashion. If you need to output the begin substitute character you should
define a substitution for it.
example
TD:SET TITLE SUBSTITUTE="{}"
TD:DEFINE STRING curly "{"
TD:DEFINE STRING SEASONS "spring,summer,winter,fall"
TD:TITLE TOP "The seasons are {SEASONS}."
Writes the title:
"The seasons are spring,summer,winter,fall."
TD:TITLE TOP "A left curly bracket is {curly}"
Writes the title:
"A left curly bracket is {"
TD:SET TITLE SUBSTITUTE="\\"
TD:TITLE TOP "The seasons are \SEASONS\."
Writes the title:
"The seasons are spring,summer,winter,fall."
TD:SET TITLE SUBSTITUTE="\"
TD:TITLE TOP "The seasons are \SEASONS ."
Writes the title:
"The seasons are spring,summer,winter,fall."
NOTE: in this example the trailing substitute char is a blank.
15.64.61.14 Examples -
TD:SET TITLE INDEX=3
increases the space per line to make room for sub/superscripts.
TD:SET TITLE TOP LINE=2.5
allocates room for 2 lines of title at the top, with a half line margin
between the titles and the window.
TD:SET TITLE SCALE=1.0 RIGHT MARGIN=0 BOTTOM MARGIN=0 LINE=-1
sets all titles to the same size and removes the margin at the right and
bottom. The bottom title is allocated 1 line of space inside the window.
15.64.62 UNITS
This sets the units that you may use to specify sizes and locations.
SET UNITS
[REDUCE=units] [ALL|TEXT|CHARACTERS] [CM|CENTIMETERS| DM|DECIMETERS|
MM|MILLIMTERS|METERS|INCHES| POINTS|MILS]
If no options are specified the sizes are reset to the defaults.
(Default:TEXT INCHES CHARACTERS REDUCE=10)
15.64.62.1 CM.... - This sets the units to a "standard" set of units.
1. MM = CM/10
2. DM = 10 CM
3. METERS = 100 CM
4. INCHES = 1.54 CM
5. MILS = INCHES/1000
6. POINTS = INCHES/72
7. FEET = 12 INCHES
8. YARDS = 3 FEET
9. FATHOMS = 6 FEET
10. RODS = 16.5 FEET
11. FURLONGS = 40 RODS
12. MILES = 8 FURLONGS
13. LEAGUES = 3 MILES
15.64.62.2 REDUCE - Sets the units by the specified value. This is the
number of units per standard unit.
15.64.62.3 ALL... - This selects which set of units to modify. There
are 2 sets of units. One is the TEXT units which specify the location in
TEXT space, while the other is used to specify the character and symbol
sizes. The character units are also used to speicify the fill sizes.
Normall text sizes are in inches while the character units are one tenth
of the text units.
15.64.63 WAIT
See:Command SET PAUSE
15.64.64 WIDTH
This sets the default line width or intensity of a plot.
SET WIDTH level [PERMANENT]
level=1 to 5.
(Default:2) 5 is the widest (brightest).
PERMANENT - Sets the current width to be the new default.
If no options are specified it is set to 2.
15.64.65 WINDOWS
There are 3 ways to set windows, absolute, numbered, or relative.
Absolute windows
SET WINDOW|AREA [CURSOR] {X|Y}[FROM] n1 [TO] n2] [AT n1 [SIZE] n2]
[LEVEL=n]
or...
SET WINDOW|AREA [FROM] nx,ny [TO] nx,ny] [AT nx,ny [SIZE] nx,ny]
Sets the X,Y axes to run between the specified limits in inches.
Numbered
SET WINDOW [{FIRST|LAST|NEXT|PREVIOUS|n1 [OF n2]}] [LEVEL=n|INSIDE|
OUTSIDE]
Divides the entire screen into n2 windows of equal size, and sets the
current window to number n1. The windows are as close to square as
possible.
Relative
SET WINDOW [{X|Y} n1 [OF n2]] [LEVEL=n]
Divides one axis of the screen into n2 windows of equal size and selects
one of them.
WARNING
If this command is issued in between 2 plots overlaying each
other, they will not have the same scales.
15.64.65.1 ABSOLUTE - The window may not exceed the current plot SIZE.
See:Command SET SIZE. If CURSOR is specified, the cursor may be used to
set windows. Simply move the cursor to one corner of the window and hit
the space bar. Them move the cursor to the diagonally oppostte corner and
hit the space bar. The new limits are entered into the journal file.
example
TD:SET WINDOW X FROM 1 to 6 Y FROM 1.5 to 9.0
or...
TD:SET WINDOW FROM 1,1.5 TO 6,9.0
or...
TD:SET WINDOW AT 3.5,5.25 SIZE=5,7.5
or...
TD:SET WINDOW X AT 3.5 SIZE=5 Y AT 5.25,7.5
All produce the same window in inches.
TD:SET WINDOW CURSOR
You move the cursor to diagonally opposite corners of the window and press
the space bar to enter the cursor location.
15.64.65.2 NUMBERED - A numbered window is a special type of relative
window. If n2 is omitted then the n2 is assumed to be the last n2. Both
n1 and n2 must be greater than or equal to 1.0. n2 must be smaller than
or equal to n2. You may initially set up a window as relative, and
specify it as a set of numbered windows. When you do this the window
number modifies only the integer part of the relative window. For
example:
TD:SET WINDOW 1 OF 4
This sets the lower left window out of 6.
TD:SET WINDOW 6 OF 6
Sets the upper right window out of 6.
TD:SET WINDOW X 1.1 of 3.2 Y 1.2 of 2.4
TD:SET WINDOW 5
is the same as
TD:SET WINDOW X 2.1 of 3.2 Y 2.2 of 2.4
15.64.65.3 RELATIVE - If n2 is omitted then the last n2 for the current
plot is assumed. Both n1 and n2 must be larger than 0.8 and n1 may not be
larger than 1.2*n2. If both n1 and n2 are positive the window is reduced
in size to allow for labels and titles. If negative the window occupies
the entire space. If you do not specify a fixed symbol, grid, label,
title, or tick size then they are adjusted to be in proportion to the
window size. Absolute windows do not adjust the sizes. If n2 is omitted
then the current n2 is assumed.
For windows which do not occupy the entire space, the actual size of the
window depends on the location and position of labels and titles. The
size is set to allow a 5% border with room for titles and labels. The
default is a window with approximately 8.5% left on the right and top for
titles, and 13% on the bottom and left for labels and titles. For 3-d
plots it is assumed that no labels will be produced. To change the size
available for titles and labels use the SET TITLE and SET LABELS commands.
Non integral n1 or n2 may be used for fine adjustment. If you use
negative windows you may also need to turn off INSIDE labels.
See:Command SET LABELS INSIDE
15.64.65.3.1 Example -
TD:SET WINDOW Y 1.2 OF 2.5
Divides y into 2.5 windows and sets the current window to 1.2. Assuming
the y size is the default 10 inches, the total window runs from 0.8 inches
to 4.8 inches. Since the window is positive, the actual window area is
reduced to make room for labels. The actual plot area would be
approximately 1.6 inches to 4.3 inches.
TD:SET WINDOW Y 1.2 OF -2.5
Divides y in the same fashion as above, except that the actual window
occupies the entire specified area from y=0.8 inches to y=4.8 inches. If
a second window is then specified:
TD:SET WINDOW Y=2.2
it is adjacent to the first one, with the top axes of the first window in
the same location as the bottom axes of the second window.
15.64.65.4 LEVEL - INSIDE,OUSIDE, or LEVEL=n sets the window level.
Levels may range from 1 to 4. INSIDE increases the level by 1 and OUTSIDE
decreases the level by 1. Using this option you may inset windows inside
other windows. When you increase the LEVEL by 1 the current window is
used to set the maximum limits of the new window. You may increase LEVEL
by 1 or decrease it to any number from 1 to the current level. When you
increase the level, you have effectively decreased the plot size to the
current window size.
example
As an example you wish to create a set of six windows within a definite
location.
TD:SET WINDOW X FROM 1 TO 12 Y FROM 1 TO 7
Set the outer level
TD:SET WINDOW 1 OF 6 INSIDE
or...
TD:SET WINDOW 1 OF 6 LEVEL=2
Now you have 6 equal size windows bounded by 1,1 and 12,7. To return to
having only 1 window
TD:SET WINDOW LEVEL=1
example
TD:SET WINDOW X FROM 1 TO 12 Y FROM 5 TO 7
TD:SET WINDOW LEVEL=2 FROM 1,1 TO 2,2
Insets a window within another. The actual physical location of the new
window is X=2 to X=3 and Y=6 to Y=7.
15.64.65.5 Labels - Normally space for labels is allocated according to
the current AXES, and LABEL settings. For example if you SET LABELS LEFT
OFF, no space will be allocated for labels on the left side, so the window
will be larger. If you need to have several plots all sharing the same
scale, use either negative windows or absolute windows. For example 2
plots which share the same X axis may be plotted.
TD:SET WINDOW Y 1.2 OF -2.6
TD:PLOT SET=1
TD:SET LABELS BOTTOM OFF
TD:SET WINDOW Y 2.2
TD:PLOT SET=2
Only 1 bottom axes is plotted for both windows.
It is assumed that LEFT or RIGHT labels will occupy 6 characters. If this
is incorrect you may adjust this value when you set the window with the
CHARACTERS parameter.
TD:SET LABEL CHARACTERS=4
allocates only 4 characters for the labels. This gives you more usable
plotting area.
15.64.65.6 Examples - Assuming you have a plot size of 13 by 10 you may
setup 6 windows, and start with the window in the middle, bottom:
TD:SET WINDOW 2 of 6
or...
TD:SET WINDOW X 2 OF 3 Y 1 OF 2
you may select the next window (Right, bottom) by:
TD:SET WINDOW X NEXT
or...
TD:SET WINDOW X 3
or...
TD:SET WINDOW 3
You may set the previous window by:
TD:SET WINDOW X PREVIOUS
or...
TD:SET WINDOW X 1
you may select the last window (right, upper corner) by:
TD:SET WINDOW 6
or...
TD:SET WINDOW X 3 Y 2
15.64.65.7 3-d - When setting the windows for 3-d plots there is
compensation for the viewing distance from the object if SCRD is negative.
For the same DISTANCE and positive SCRD a window which is half the size of
a normal window will only show half of the view. You may compensate for
this effect by changing DISTANCE or SCRD. The effect is similar to what
you would see if you, and the window remained in the same position and
only the window size changed. The following will plot approximately the
data with the same view.
TD:SET THREE DISTANCE 100 SCRD 50
TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 1 Y 1 of 1
TD:HISTOGRAM
or ...
TD:SET THREE DISTANCE 100 SCRD -50
TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 2 Y 1 of 2
TD:HISTOGRAM
or ...
TD:SET THREE DISTANCE 100 SCRD 25
TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 2 Y 1 of 2
TD:HISTOGRAM
The following will show a similar view, but from a more distant
perspective:
TD:SET THREE DISTANCE 200 SCRD 50
TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 2 Y 1 of 2
TD:HISTOGRAM
Since the size of 2 windows is less than half of a single window the
example with 2 windows shows slightly less than 1 window.
15.65 SHOW
SHOW opt1 opt2 ,.... optn
Shows options for the current plot. Most options for SET may be used for
show. The options are:
ALL ARROW AXIS BAR BOX BLINK CARD
CHARACTER CYCLE CIRCLE CLEAR COLOR COMMAND Ctrl_Z
CURSOR DATA DATE DEVICE DIAMOND DIGITS ELLIPSE
ERRORS EXACT FIT FILE FLUSH FONT FORMAT
GRID HISTOGRAM INTENSITY KEYS LABELS LEXICALS LIMITS
MODE MONITOR ORDER OUTLINE PATTERN PAUSE PEN
PLOTS POLAR REVISION SCALE SECONDARY SHIELD SIZE
STATISTICS STORAGE STRINGS SYMBOL TEXTURE THREE
TICKS TIME TITLE UNITS WIDTH VALUES VERSION
WINDOW
The "Default" values are the values that are automatically set for the
next plot. These are controlled by the "PERMANENT" option on the SET
commands. The SHOW commands are not usually journaled with the exception
of SHOW CURSOR.
15.65.1 Options
1. ALL - Shows all options except for CURSOR, FLAGS, and HISTOGRAM.
2. ARROW - default arrow format
3. AXIS - default axis
4. BAR - ends of error bars
5. BOX - default box size
6. BLINK - whether plots are in blink mode
7. CARD - Maximum length of input lines
8. CYCLE - The color,width, texture to cycle through.
9. CHARACTERS - Shows character definitions
10. CIRCLE - Same as SHOW ELLIPSE
11. CLEAR - Clear setting is Deferred or Immediate.
12. COLOR - default color or pen number
13. COMMAND - Shows the currently defined commands.
14. Ctrl_Z - Whether Ctrl_Z stops TOPDRAWER.
15. CURSOR - Shows the location of the cursor.
16. DATA [options] - Show current data.
17. DATE - Show current base date.
18. DEVICE - Show current device being used
19. DIAMOND - default diamond size
20. DIGITS - The number of digits to use for output
21. ELLIPSE - default ellipse size
22. ERRORS - Shows status of error messages, and any errors for the
current plot are displayed.
23. FILE - shows current files open, and line number.
24. FILL - the current fill patterns
25. FIT [FULL] - shows the current fit [with error matrix].
26. FLUSH - Controls automatic flushing of plot data
27. FONT - the current character set
28. FORMAT - Format for input lines
29. GRID - grid marks that overlay plot
30. HISTOGRAM - Shows the list of histograms available.
31. INTENSITY - default intensity (line width)
32. KEYS [key names] - the defined keypad keys
33. LABELS - numeric labels on axes
34. LEXICALS [lexical] - exams the current values of lexicals.
35. LIMITS - limits for plot axis
36. MODE - Misc. options. These change the mode of operation.
37. MONITOR - Plot options for monitor command.
38. ORDER - Determines interpretation of input data
39. OUTLINE - outline around plot
40. PATTERN - the pattern for PATTERNED lines
41. PAUSE - controls whether TOPDRAWR pauses at NEW PLOT
42. PEN - the pen or color to use in plotting.
43. PLOTS - The number of plots produced
44. POLAR - Whether mode is polar or spherical plots
45. REVISION - The current revision level.
46. SECONDARY - Secondary contour line options.
47. SCALE - scale (log/linear) and units.
48. SHIELD - the location and sizes of shielded areas.
49. SIZE - size and orientation of screen or paper
50. STATISTICS - The statistics set by the last SET STATISTICS or
SHOW DATA command.
51. STORAGE - what is kept in storage
52. STRINGS - strings defined by DEFINE STRING
53. SYMBOL - default symbol to plot
54. TEXTURE - default line style (DOTTED,SOLID...)
55. THREE - parameters for 3-dimensional plots
56. TICKS - tick marks on axes
57. TITLE - size of title
58. UNITS - the units of measurement
59. VALUES - The user defined Lexical values.
60. VERSION - The current version number of TOPDRAWER
61. WIDTH - the line width or intensity
62. WINDOW - the plotting area (labels may be outside area)
15.65.2 CURSOR
SHOW CURSOR
This puts a cursor on the graph. After moving the cursor to the desired
location, press any key. The current location of the cursor will be typed
and entered into the journal file as a comment. This does not work if the
device has no cursor. If you have not plotted any data this command will
not work.
The position of the cursor is given in both TEXT and DATA units. If a 3-d
plot is displayed, The X,Y,Z given are on a plane through the origin
parallel to the screen.
15.65.3 DATA
SHOW DATA
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[BRIEF|FULL|STATISTICS|TOTAL[=ON|OFF]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[OUTPUT=file]
This types the current data and statistics on the data. You may terminate
the listing in the middle by pressing Ctrl_C.
15.65.3.1 BRIEF... -
1. BRIEF=ON or FULL=OFF displays only the number of data points and
sets.
2. FULL=ON or BRIEF=OFF displays both data and statistics.
(Default:FULL)
3. STATISTICS=ON displays the statistics on the data for each set,
and the grand total if more than 1 set.
4. STATISTICS=OFF displays the data without statistics.
5. TOTAL=ON displays only the total statistics for all data sets.
6. TOTAL=OFF displays the data with statistics, but no total.
If you do not specify ON or OFF then ON is assumed.
15.65.3.2 LIMITED - Limits the data shown to the specified range. For
3-d data the limit on the dependent variable fully modifies the
statistics. The actual data shown my include data outside the Z limits,
but the statistics reflects only the data within all limits. If limits
are not specified, the default is the current plot limits.
See:Command SET LIMITS.
1. X - Specifies X limit
2. Y - Specifies Y limit
3. Z - Specifies the Z limit
4. CURSOR - Brings up the cursor. You move it to the X,Y value you
wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to enter X
or Y to enter Y.
5. RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.
TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED RECURSOR
is the same as...
TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR
6. VLOG - Draws a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
dotted line around the final limits.
example
TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM 1,1 to 2,5
or...
TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=1 TO X=2 Y=5
Shows all points that with X between 1 and 2 and Y between 2 and 5
inclusive.
TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM Y=1 TO Y=5
Shows all data points with Y values between 1 and 5 inclusive.
TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR
Shows all data points as defined by the cursor limits.
TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM X=CURSOR TO X=CURSOR
Shows all data points according to X values defined by the cursor.
15.65.3.3 LINES|ROWS - For 3-d plots specifies which lines or rows of
the mesh data to show.
15.65.3.4 OUTPUT - This specifies the output file for the DATA. If this
option is not used, the default is SYS$OUTPUT, or your terminal. If
OUTPUT=NONE is specified, then there is not output.
15.65.3.5 POINTS|COLUMNS - This specifies which points to show. For 3-d
this is the range of column numbers.
15.65.3.6 SETS - This specifies which data set to show.
15.65.3.7 Statistics - The statistics on the data are typed at the end
of the data. This includes the following:
1. Range of data for X and Y
2. Sum of all Y values and average Y value per point.
3. Error in the sum. This is only produced if the Y values have a
non zero DY. To specify errors for existing data see the command
X.
4. Mean X value, and standard deviation of the mean.
Mean=SUM(X*Y)/SUM(Y)
Std=SQRT(SUM((X-MEAN)*Y))/SUM(Y)
5. Error on the mean and standard deviation. These are only
produced if either DX or DY are non zero for the data. DY is
used if available otherwise DX is used to calculate the error.
If the number of data points with Y,DX,DY non zero is less than 3
then DX is also used to calculate the error.
15.65.3.8 Example - You have entered a 3 dim array with 20 by 20 points.
X ranges from 0 to 10, Y from 100 to 200. The total array will not fit on
the terminal screen so you show a subset of the data:
TD:SHOW DATA POINTS 3 to 8 LINES 5 to 10
TD:SHOW DATA POINTS 1 5 LINES 1 5 (SHOWS 25 points)
TD:SHOW DATA LINE=1 (Shows only first 20 points)
TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM .5,100 TO .8,120
Example
You have entered 100 data points X,Y,DX,DY etc. To show only points
number 5 to 20
TD:SHOW DATA POINTS 5 to 20
15.65.4 ERRORS
This shows the status of the error reports, and any error messages for
this plot are displayed.
15.65.5 FLAGS
This show the status of all flags. This is generally only useful for
debugging TOPDRAWER. There is no SET FLAGS command.
15.65.6 HISTOGRAMS
This command shows the list of histograms made available by the
SET HISTOGRAM command. You may terminate the listing in the middle by
pressing Ctrl_C.
SHOW HISTOGRAMS [CURRENT] [[IDENT=] n] [FROM] [n1] [TO] [n2]
[SELECT|NAME='hist_name']
[EXACT[=ON|OFF]]
[ALL|FULL|BRIEF[=ON|OFF]]
[CONTENTS[=ON|OFF]]
[OPTIONS[=ON|OFF]]
[STATISTICS[=ON|OFF]]
[AREA|DIRECTORY="dir/subdir..."]
[SEARCH[=ON|OFF]]
[TReE[=ON|OFF]]
[ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]]
[HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]]
[ARRAY[=ON|OFF]]
[MESH[=ON|OFF]]
[NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]]
[NLMIT[=n]]
[NMASK[=n]]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
15.65.6.1 Options -
1. AREA/DIRECTORY - Specifies the area to list.
2. ALL, or FULL - Shows everyhing about the histograms.
3. EXACT - Histogram names are treated as exact strings, and they
are not searched in a case independent manner. This must precede
the option NAME="...".
4. BRIEF - Shows only a list of the hist IDENTS.
5. CONTENTS - Shows a listing of the histogram contents. NTUPLES
are shown according to the SET HISTOGRAM SELECT options.
6. STATISTICS - Shows the histogram statistics.
7. POINTS|COLUMNS - Selects the range of contents to show.
8. SEARCH - Prints information only if the specified histograms are
found.
9. TREE - Looks through the specified directory tree.
10. OPTIONS - Shows the histogram options.
11. AREA - Shows a brief directory of the selected area.
12. CURRENT - Selects the current hist to show.
13. FROM, TO - Selects a range of histograms to show.
14. IDENT - The histogram number to show.
15. MESH - Chooses only MESH data or regular data.
16. NTUPLE - Selects only NTUPLE data. OFF selects both MESH and
regular data.
17. NAME - Selects hist by name.
18. NLIMIT - Shows the limits on NTUPLE variables.
19. NMASK - Shows the hist masks on NTUPLE variables.
15.65.6.2 AREA|DIRECTORY - Selects the area to list histograms. You may
use wild characters to select the particular areas to show. See COMMAND
SET HISTOGRAM. If you wish to get a directory of the direct access file:
TD:SHOW HIST AREA=//FILE/subdir/sub-subdir...
If you wish to get a directory of a global comman section:
TD:SHOW HIST AREA=//SECT/subdir/sub-subdir...
example
TD:SHOW HIST AREA=/X
Shows all histograms in subdirectory //PAWC/X.
TD:SHOW HIST TREE AREA=/X
Shows all histograms in the directory starting with //PAWC/X.
TD:SHOW HIST AREA=/X/*
Shows all histograms in subdirectories of area //PAWC/X
TD:SHOW HIST AREA=/X*/Y
Shows all histograms in the selecte areas. For example //PAWC/X1/Y and
//PAWC/X2/Y will be shown but //PAWC/N/Y and //PAWC/X1/Z will not.
15.65.6.3 ALL|FULL - Shows all data about the histograms. This includes
the ID,NAME, SIZE, and range of values. For some packages entries,
over/underflows, sum, mean, and standard deviations are also listed. For
Rice histograms the cuts are also listed. This option may slow the time
to show each histogram, especially MESH histograms. This will not show
extra information about histograms in an HBOOK4 RZ file. ALL=ON is the
opposite of BRIEF=OFF.
15.65.6.4 BRIEF - Shows only the list of IDs available. ALL=OFF is the
opposite of BRIEF=ON.
15.65.6.5 CONTENTS - Shows the contents of the histograms. This only
works for NTUPLES and Arrays. POINTS selects the range of the array or
the element of the ntuple. LINES selects the NTUPL element. The actual
Ntuples shown are modified by previous SET HISTOGRAM SELECT commands. The
number of significant figures in the output is set by the SET DIGITS
command.
15.65.6.6 CURRENT - Specifies the current histogram.
See:Command SET HISTOGRAM.
15.65.6.7 ENTRIES - If ON it selects only histograms which have entries
(contain data). If OFF it selects only histograms without entries. The
default is ON. If the option ENTRIES is not used, then no selection by
entries is made.
15.65.6.8 EXACT - If ON and SELECT is used, then the histogram names are
searched for in a case sensative manner.
15.65.6.9 FROM|TO - Specifies the range of histogram IDs to show.
15.65.6.10 IDENT - Specifies a single histogram to show.
15.65.6.11 HISTOGRAM - If HISTOGRAM=ON selects only histograms.
15.65.6.12 NTUPL - Selects only NTUPL data to show.
(Default:ON)
15.65.6.13 NLIMITS - Shows you the existing limits on NTUPL variables.
If the variable number is negative, it has not been used.
15.65.6.14 NMASKS - Shows you the existing masks on NTUPL variables. If
the histogram number is negative, it has not been used.
15.65.6.15 MESH - If ON only 3-d or mesh histograms (scatterplots) are
listed. If ON or OFF are omitted, ON is assumed.
15.65.6.16 SELECT - Selects the histograms by name. All histograms
beginning with the hist_name will be shown. Percent '%' and star '*' are
wild characters.
15.65.6.17 SEARCH - Information is printed only if the specified
histograms are found. If SEARCH=OFF then the number of histograms and the
current AREA are printed.
(Default:SEARCH=OFF)
15.65.6.18 STATISTICS - Shows the statistics on the histograms. This
consists of the number of entries, the range and the number of
over/underflows. This will not show extra information about histograms in
an HBOOK4 RZ file.
15.65.6.19 TREE - Searches the current or specified directory tree for
histograms. For example you have directories //PAWC/X/A, //PAWC/X/B, and
//PAWC/Y. You wish to list all histograms in directories X/A and X/B:
TD:SHOW HIST AREA=//PAWC/X TREE
or ...
TD:SET HIST AREA=//PAWC/X
TD:SHOW HIST TREE
15.65.6.20 Example -
TD:SHOW HIST BRIEF
Lists just the IDs of all available histograms.
TD:SHOW HIST ID=5 FULL
Types all information about histogram ID number 5.
TD:SHOW HIST FROM 10 SELECT='ENERGY'
Types the names and ids of all histograms with ID above 9 which have names
beginning with 'ENERGY'.
TD:SHOW HIST SELECT='*ENERGY'
Types on your screen the names of all histograms with names containing the
word 'ENERGY'.
TD:SHOW HIST SELECT='*PI*ENERGY'
Types the names of all histograms containing 'PI...ENERGY' in the name.
TD:SHOW HIST SELECT='*ENERGY' MESH
Types on your screen the names of all 3-d histograms with names containing
the word 'ENERGY'.
TD:SHOW HIST SELECT='*ENERGY' MESH BRIEF
Types on your screen the IDs of all 3-d histograms with names containing
the word 'ENERGY'.
15.65.7 KEYS
TD:SHOW KEYS [key1,key2....]
Shows you the current key definitions for the selected keys. If ALL or no
keys are specified then all keys will be shown. See:Command SET KEY.
To show KP0-KP9 keys you may specify just KP. Likewise you may specify PF
for PF1-PF4 or F for F1-F20.
key names are:
PF1-PF4, KP0-KP9, MINUS, COMMA, PERIOD, ENTER, F1-F20, INSERT, DO,
PREV_SCREEN, NEXT_SCREEN.
15.65.8 LEXICALS
SHOW LEXICALS [V_lex1] [V_lex2]...
Shows you the values of the specified lexicals.
15.65.9 TIME
This shows the current CPU and clock time for your process. There is no
SET command corresponding to SHOW TIME.
15.65.10 Example
TD:SHOW BOX CIRCLE DIAMOND
shows the default sizes for drawing boxes etc.
TD:SHOW COLOR INTENSITY TEXTURE
shows all the default attributes for lines.
TD:SHOW STORAGE
shows the current storage allocation.
15.66 SMOOTH
SMOOTH [{X|Y|Z|RADIUS|THETA|PHI}] [LEVEL=n]
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
[CHECK[=ON|OFF]]
[ERROR[=ON|OFF]]
[FLAT[=ON|OFF]] [AVERAGE[=ON|OFF]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]] [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]]
Replace the X,Y, or Z values by new values that give a smooth curve. The
data is assumed to be a histogram of equally spaced bins. An alternate
way of smoothing data is by convolution. See COMMAND CONVOLUTE. A
convolution may be used to both smooth and "sharpen" the data.
15.66.1 Options
1. APPEND - Puts the smoothed data into a new data set.
(Default:OFF)
2. AVERAGE - Modifies FLAT. When average=off each channel is the
sum of n adjacent channels.
(Default:ON)
3. CHECK - Checks the data to see if it is a proper histogram with X
or X/Y for mesh equally spaced. IF it is not an error message is
issued,and no smoothing is done.
(Default:ON)
4. ERROR - Modifies the errors on the data assuming statistical
errors. If OFF the errors are not modified. Essentially the
smoothing algorithm is used on the square of the errors.
(Default:ERROR=ON for REVISION>4.99)
5. FLAT - Smooths the data by adding together and averaging every n
points. The result has every n points identical. LEVEL=n
selects the number of points. For example SMOOTH FLAT LEVEL=2
averages points 1+2, 3+4, 5+6...
(Default:OFF)
6. LEVEL=n - Selects approximately the number of points on either
side of the bin that are used in determining the value for that
bin. The range of levels is 1 to 5. 1 Will smooth over 3
points, while 5 will smooth over 11 points.
(Default:3)
7. LINES/ROWS - Selects which rows of a mesh are smoothed.
8. LIMITED - Selects the range of X,Y,Z values to smooth.
9. LOG - Logs or types the results on your terminal.
10. MONITOR - Histograms the original data and joins the result.
See: SET MODE MONITOR
The result is joined using the SECONDARY attributes. to change
them use the SET SECONDARY command.
11. NAME - Selects the name of the appended data set
12. POINTS/COLUMNS - Selects which data points or columns of a mesh
are smoothed. If omitted all are smoothed.
13. SELECT - Selects the data set by name
14. SETS - Selects which data sets to use.
15. X,Y,Z... selects whether X, Y, or Z values are replaced. For
MESH data it selects the axis to smooth along. (Default:Y)
15.66.2 Algorithm
The data is smoothed by repeatedly transforming the points and residuals,
using running means, quadratic interpolation, and hanning. Similar
algorithms are described in Exploratory Data Analysis by John W Tukey at
SLAC. This has been modified slightly by J. Clement to treat sparse
statistical data correctly. The original alogorithm would throw away
isolated data points which were larger than the surrounding data.
15.67 SORT
SORT [SYMBOL] [[N][D]{X|Y|Z|U|V|W|THETA|RADIUS|PHI}]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]]
Sorts the data according to the order of the fields (X,Y...) selected. If
fields are omitted then they are sorted according to the order
SYMBOL,X,DX,Y,DY,Z,DZ. Each data set is sorted independently.
example
TD:SORT X Y Z SYMBOL
Sorts data so that all low X are first. Within groups of identical X
values all low Y values are first, and so on. Since DX,DY,DZ are omitted
the actual sorting order is: X,Y,Z,SYMBOL,DX,DY,DZ.
15.68 SPAWN
This command temporarily spawns out of TOPDRAWER to VMS. The SPAWN
command is not journaled unless ABORT=OFF MODE is selected.
SPAWN [dcl_command]
For example you are trying to do a plot, but you have forgotten the
filename with the TOPDRAWER source, so you:
TD:SPAWN DIRECTORY You will get a directory listing so you can find
the file name.
If you use the SPAWN command with no parameters, you return to TOPDRAWER
with the VMS command:
$ LOGOFF
15.69 STOP
STOP|END|EXIT|HALT|QUIT ['string'] These commands all stop TOPDRAWER.
Any data remaining in the buffers is flushed, and all output files are
closed.
This is also equivalent to typing Ctrl_Z if Ctrl_Z is ON.
The program is stopped and the string is typed. If you wish to stop in
the middle type Ctrl_C. This will abort the current operation and restore
the prompt. If you are in the middle of getting data from a file, the
file will skip to the next CLEAR or STOP command. Pressing Ctrl_C twice
rapidly in succession will abort all file input. If you type Ctrl_C twice
rapidly again you will be prompted if you wish to terminate the program
completely.
15.70 SWAP
SWAP {X|[N]DX|Y|[N]DY|Z|[N]DZ|U|[N]DU|V|[N]DV|W|[N]DW} [WITH] {X|[N]DX|Y|
[N]DY|Z|[N]DZ|U|[N]DU|V|[N]DV|W|[N]DW}
[POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[ERROR[=ON|OFF]]
This command swaps the data for 2 variables.
If ERROR is specified then the corresponding errors are swapped with the
data.
(Default:ERROR=ON for REVISION>4.99)
This is useful if the data is in the wrong location for the type of plot
you wish to make. An example of this is making 3-d plots from binned
data. You have read in data, X,Y,DY and you have binned it into a
frequency distribution using the BIN command. Now the result is in
X,Y,DX,DY. You wish to make a 3-d histogram, but the data must be in
X,Z,DX,DZ. To fix the problem:
TD:SWAP Z WITH Y
TD:SWAP DZ WITH DY
Now you can set the Y value and perform the histogram.
TD:Y=10.0
TD:SET THREE ON
TD:HISTOGRAM
You may copy data using the X,Y,Z,DX,... commands.
15.71 SYMBOL
SYMBOL=symbol
[LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
[RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
This resets the symbol for the selected data points or sets. Symbols
should be 0O,1O,...9O, DOT or NONE. Any other symbol may not be properly
centered.
15.72 TITLE
Puts a title on the plot
TITLE [x, [y, [z]]|CURSOR] 'text_of_title' [TIME] [lexicals]
[TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y|Z|GENERAL]
[DATA|XDATA|YDATA|TEXT]
[LJUSTIFY|CENTER|RJUSTIFY] [LINES=n]
[SIZE=n] [ANGLE=n] [SPACES=n] [INDEX=n] [DIGITS=n]
[CASE 'case modifier string']
[INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN]
The text will be written on the plot. It must be enclosed in apostrophes
or quotes.
15.72.1 Xyz
x, y, z - Specify the position of left most character in the text. If no
position is given, and TOP,BOTTOM... are not specified the title is
placed below the most recent title. CURSOR produces the cross hair curson
on interactive terminals. You move the cursor to the location you wish
the title to appear, and press the space bar. The position of the cursor
is written to the JOURNAL file so you may repeat the plot exactly. If you
need titles at angles other than horizontal, you should also use the
option ANGLE=n.
15.72.2 ANGLE
ANGLE=n - Gives the angle in degrees measured counterclockwise. ANGLE=90
runs the title from bottom to top. This has no effect on perspective
labels for 3-d plots.
15.72.3 LJUSTIFY|CENTER|RJUSTIFY
Either left, right or center justifies the title. (Default:LJUSTIFY)
* LJUSTIFY - The center of the first character is at x,y,z.
* CENTER - The center of the string is at x,y,x. The center is assumed
half way between the first and last characters.
* RJUSTIFY - The center of the last character is at x,y,z.
If TOP,BOTTOM... are specified then the title is automatically centered.
example
TD:Title TOP LJUST 'Left'
TD:Title top 'Center'
TD:Title top RJUST 'Right'
puts 3 titles at the top of the plot on the left,center, and right.
example
TD:TITLE 10,5 RJUST 'Location 10,5 -->+'
Puts the title with the plus sign at x=10, y=5.
15.72.4 DATA|XDATA|YDATA|TEXT
Specifies the DATA or TEXT coordinate frame. Normally x, y are in the
text coordinate system. If you specify x,y, and z then the data frame is
assumed.
DATA - both x,y are in the data frame.
TEXT - both x,y are in the text frame.
XDATA - x is in data frame y in text frame.
YDATA - y is in data frame x in text frame.
15.72.5 DIGITS
DIGITS=n selects the number of significant figures to reproduce for
lexicals. If n is omitted it is assumed to be 4. You may also set the
number of digits with the SET DIGITS command.
example
TD:TITLE TOP 'Mean=',DIGITS=6,T_MEAN,' err=',DIGITS=2,T_EMEAN
The top title will be the mean and error for the data.
15.72.6 Lexicals
You may include a lexical value in your title. A title lexical is an
option in the form T_xxxx, where xxxx is the value to plot. The number of
significant digits in the number is normally 4. You may alter this with
the DIGITS=n option or the SET DIGITS command. For example you wish to
show the sum of the data in the top title:
TD:TITLE TOP 'My data - Sum=',T_SUM
You may wish to limit the sum to a portion of the data so you first use
show data to calculate the sum for a limited portion, then put it in the
title:
TD SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM X=5 to X=10
TD:TITLE BOTTOM 'Sum=' T_SUM 'X from ' T_XMIN ' to ' T_XMAX
TD:TITLE TOP 'Sum=' T_SUM ' '+' CASE'M' T_ESUM
For more information SEE:TOPDRAWER LEXICALS.
15.72.7 TIME
Inserts the current DATE and TIME into the title. For example:
TD:TITLE TOP '(Date: ' TIME ')'
Assuming the current time is noon on the Jan 1, 1987, the following title
is plotted at the top:
(Date: 1-JAN-87 12:00:00)
15.72.8 TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|GENERAL
TOP,BOTTOM,RIGHT,LEFT - Specify the title position relative to the data
window. GENERAL is a synonym for TOP. The title is centered at the
appropriate position. The size and angle are determined by the SET SIZE
command. If a size, or x,y,z are specified, they override the default
position and size. A TOP title is generally drawn with character size 1.5
times the default. If no other options are specified, then the character
size is reduced by up to a factor of 4 to keep the title from overflowing
the screen.
15.72.9 X|Y|Z
For 3-d plots the label is drawn in perspective parallel to the selected
axis. For 2-d plots X,Y,Z are synonyms for LEFT,BOTTOM,TOP.
15.72.10 LINES
LINES=n - Moves the title up space for n extra lines of text. The title
is moved up by n-1 lines. If LINES=1 then the title is not moved at all.
15.72.11 SIZE
SIZE=n gives the approximate spacing between chars. in tenths of an inch.
If n is negative hardware characters will be used when available. If n is
positive software characters will be used if mode VECTOR=ON. If not
specified the size is determined by the most recent title command. Once
this parameter has been set, the character size remains the same unless a
BOTTOM,TOP,RIGHT,LEFT,X,Y,Z or SIZE option is used. If not specified the
angle is determined by the most recent title command.
15.72.12 INDEX
INDEX=n - Specifies the line spacing in multiples of character spacing.
This is used for multiline titles.
15.72.13 SPACES
SPACES=n This specifies how much space the title occupies. This is only
necessary if variable character spacing, or sub/superscripts are used and
you wish to center the title.
15.72.14 INTENSITY
INTENSITY - Determines the intensity or line width of the title.
15.72.15 WHITE...
WHITE.... Determines the color of the title.
15.72.16 CASE
Controls the format of the title. It must be the next command after the
TITLE or MORE command or on the same line with the TITLE command. It
modifies only the preceding string. It must immediately follow the string
either on the same, or the next line.
CASE 'case_text'
This specifies the case or character type of each character in the title
text. For the definitions of all possible CASE characters see:
TOPDRAWER FONTS
It is not necessary to use a case command if you only want upper and lower
case ASCII characters. Simply type them into your title as you wish to
see them.
example
TD:TITLE TOP 'ABG' CASE 'GGG'
Produces a title with 3 lower case Greek letters alpha,beta,gamma.
TD:TITLE TOP 'ABC' 'ABG' CASE 'GGG'
Produces a title with 3 Roman letters followed by 3 Greek letters.
TD:TITLE TOP 'S=' CASE 'G' V_SUM
Produces a Greek "Sigma".
TD:TITLE TOP 'S=' V_SUM CASE 'G'
Does not produce any Greek because the case and string are separated by a
lexical.
15.72.17 3-d
If the options X,Y, or Z are used, then the title is plotted in
perspective relative to the default X,Y,Z axis. If you set each axis to
be in a particular location, then you should plot the axis title
specifying X,Y,Z or specify the origin using the SET THREE command. The
title starts at the origin of the axis. If the option CENTER is used the
title is centered along the axis.
If the title position is also specified, then the title is plotted
according to the position specified.
The AXIS angle determines the orientation of the title. See the command
SET THREE.
If a title is drawn in perspective, subsequent title commands without any
position specifications will draw more titles above or below the first
one. The displacement is picked away from the axis.
15.72.18 Consecutive_titles
If a title command omits the options TOP, BOTTOM, RIGHT, LEFT, X, Y, or Z
and no locations (x,y,z) are specified, then the title is placed under the
previous one. The spacing is determined by the INDEX option. The
previous INDEX, ANGLE, SIZE, justification, LINES, and SPACING are
retained. If the previous title was a 3-D title then the current title
may be placed above it, depending on the axes angle and orientation of the
view.
15.73 TRANSFORM
TRANSFORM [FROM|TO CARTESIAN|POLAR|SPHERICAL] [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
Transforms data coordinates from one frame to another. This will not work
with mesh data. If omitted, the FROM or TO is assumed to be CARTESIAN
coordinates.
1. APPEND - Appends the transformed data as a new data set.
2. LOG - Logs the operation on your terminal.
3. POLAR - THETA,R,Z cordinates selected
4. SPHERICAL - THETA,R,PHI cordinates selected
5. CARTESIAN - X,Y,Z cordinates selected (Default)
example
TD:TRANSFORM FROM POLAR TO SPERICAL SET=5
Transforms data set 5.
TD:TRANSFORM TO POLAR
All data sets are transformed from X,Y,Z to polar coordinates THETA,R,Z
respectively.
15.74 TYPE
TYPE [ERASE] [TOP] [BOTTOM] [BELL] [BOLD] [BLINK] [REVERSE] [UNDERLINE]
[WIDE] [BACKGROUND|FOEGROUND [ [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|
MAGENTA|CYAN]] [nn] ["string"]
The string is typed on your terminal. This is useful for typing messages
on the users terminal while plots are being produced from an input file.
1. ERASE - This erases the screen (ANSI terminal). This erases text
from a VT-1xx/2xx compatible terminal. This does not erase
TEKTRONIX graphics, but REGIS graphics will be erased. This must
be precede the string.
2. TOP - The string is at the top of the screen (ANSI terminal).
3. BOTTOM - The string is at the bottom of the screen (ANSI
terminal).
4. BELL - This rings the bell.
5. BOLD,BLINK,REVERSE,UNDERLINE,WIDE - Sets the video attributes of
the line. These must be after the ERASE,TOP options and before
the string. Several of these may be used together. These only
work for a VT-100 or compatible ANSI terminal.
6. BACKGROUND|FOREGROUND control the color. (ANSI terminal) Once
the color has been set it remains set until another type command
sets new colors.
7. nn - This inserts a control character (0-255) into the string.
nn and string may be repeated to generate control characters. See also:
SET PROMPT.
15.75 U
See:Command X
15.76 V
See:Command X
15.77 W
See:Command X
15.78 X
Put a sequence of values into one of the data point or error arrays. This
is useful when the X values are uniformly spaced, and you only wish to
enter the Y values. This may also be used for entering constant,
proportional or counting errors. You may also modify the data by a
constant or an equation. For example you can normalize the data.
{[N][D]{X|Y|Z|U|V|W|THETA|RADIUS|PHI}}=
Generate a range of values
[BINS|VALUES] [[FROM] xlow] [TO xhi] [BY|WIDTH|STEP xstep] [N=n]
Operations
"expression"
or ...
{[N][D]{X|Y|Z|U|V|W|THETA|RADIUS|PHI}} [PLUS|+|MINUS|-|TIMES|*|
DIVIDE|/] n [[NO]ERROR=n]
or ... [POISSON|SQRT|SAMPLES=s]
Data selection
[APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
[SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[SELECT="name"]
[POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
[LOG[=ON|OFF]]
15.78.1 APPEND
The specified points are appended to last data set. If you wish to create
a new set you should use the DATA SET command. This option may not be
used with the SETS or POINTS options. It is also illegal for mesh data.
Along with APPEND you must specify 3 of the options FROM,TO,BY,N.
15.78.2 BINS|VALUES
BINS
creates values at the centers of bins whose edge is defined by the values.
VALUES
specifies the values for the specified coordinate. If you specify a range
of values or bins, you may not specify operations such as
TIMES,DIVIDE,MINUS,PLUS or a coordinate such as X,Y,DX... or an equation.
If you generate a new data set you must specify 3 numbers for FROM,TO,BY,
and N. If you modify an existing data set only 2 numbers are spcified.
You may also specify a single value.
examples
TD:DX=0.5
Sets all DX values to 0.5
TD:X=BINS FROM 1 to 10 by 2
Generates a new data set with values X=2,4,6,8
TD:X=VALUES FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2
or...
TD:X FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2
Generates a new data set with values X=1,3,5,7,9
TD:X FROM 1 BY 2 SET=2
Modifies data set 2 with values X=1,3,5,7,9...
TD:X=Y TIMES FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2
Is illegal
TD:X=Y TIMES 2
is legal
15.78.3 ERROR
This specifies the error on the value you have specified. If you use
NOERROR the error analysis is turned off. This only works when you are
modifying X,Y,Z values. The specified error is used to modify the
DX,DY,DZ value.
example
Y=Y * 5.0
Will multiply each Y and DY value by 5.0.
Y=Y * 5.0 ERROR=0.1
Will multiply each Y and DY value by 5.0. The specified error of 0.1 Will
be used to compute the actual DY value.
Y=Y * 5.0 NOERROR
Will multiply each Y value by 5.0. The DY values will remain unchanged.
Y="LOG(YV)" NOERROR
Will take the LOG to base 10 of each Y value. The DY values will remain
unchanged.
Y="LOG(YV)"
Will take the LOG to base 10 of each Y value. The DY values will be
modified as: DY=ABS(LOG(Y+DY)-LOG(Y)).
15.78.4 Expression
You may use an expression inside quotes to actually calculate the value
for an existing data set. The expression is evaluated for each value
required. The lexicals V_XVALUE,V_DXVALUE,V_ZVALUE... are the current
X,DX,Y... needed to perform the calculation. If you do not specify
NOERROR then the error is also computed when X,Y,Z are modified by the
expression. If you use an expression you may not use any other options
except for POINTS, LINES, COLUMNS, SETS, and LOG and ERROR.
15.78.4.1 Errors - The error is generated in a simple fashion. The
computation is repeated for the value+err. For example you specify:
TD:Y="SIN(YV)"
then the result is:
NDY=-(SIN(Y-DY)-SIN(Y))
DY=SIN(Y+DY)-SIN(Y)
Y=SIN(Y)
This computation may not be correct, so the error analysis must be
carefully checked. It will work for many simple cases.
15.78.4.2 Examples -
TD:X FROM 0 to 360 by 5
TD:Y="SINE<XV>"
Generates a sine wave between 0 and 360 degrees in 5 degree steps.
TD:Y=Y TIMES 10
or...
TD:Y="YV*10"
Both multiply y by the constant value 10.0. The first method is faster,
and it also multiplies DY by the constant, while the expression does not
alter DY.
15.78.5 LINES|ROWS
selects the mesh rows for which values are generated. If a single number
is specified it is the row number to set. If both n1 and n2 are specified
they are the first and last row to set.
15.78.6 LOG
Types on your terminal the results of the operation.
(Default:LOG=OFF)
15.78.7 NAME
The new set will usually have a name consisting of a transformation name
followed by the old set name. If you specify a new name it is applied to
the new data set. If the name ends in "%" then the old name is appended
to the new name. See option:APPEND
15.78.8 POINTS|COLUMNS
selects the points or mesh data columns for which values are generated.
If a single number is specified it is point number to set. If both n1 and
n2 are specified they are the first and last point to set.
15.78.9 POISSON|SQRT
applies only to Dn and makes Dn=SQRT(n). This is counting statistics. It
is a special case of binomial statistics for a large number of samples.
15.78.10 SAMPLES
SAMPLES=s applies binomial statistics to Dn,
Dn=SQRT(max(n,1)*max(s-n,1)/s). You must supply the number of samples
(s). If you generate a set of data by a Monte-Carlo method where the
total number of hits s is selected, but the distribution of the hits is
generated by the program then you should use Binomial statistics.
15.78.11 SETS
selects the data set to modify.
15.78.12 TIMES
Multiplies the selected coordinate by the selected value. If you are
multiplying X,Y, or Z by a constant the DX,DY, or DZ are also multiplied
by the constant. In addition if ERROR was specified then the final Dn
will be modified by the specified error. DY=SQRT(DY**2+(e*n/c)**2)*c
where C is the specified constant.
If a coordinate and a number are specified, but no operator then TIMES is
assumed.
example
To multiply y by 2+-0.1
Y=Y TIMES 2 ERROR=.1
or...
Y=Y * 2 ERROR=.1 To multiply y by 2 with no error on the value 2.
Y=2 Y
or...
Y=2 TIMES Y
or...
Y=2 * Y
15.78.13 PLUS
Adds the value to the coordinate. If you specify ERROR and you are adding
a constant to X,Y, or Z the DX,DY, or DZ are also modified.
DY=SQRT(DY**2+(e)**2) where e is the specified error.
example
To add 2+-0.1 to y
Y=Y PLUS 2 ERROR=.1
or...
Y=Y + 2 ERROR=.1
15.78.14 MINUS
Subtracts the value from the coordinate or the coordinate from the value.
If you specify ERROR and you are subtracting a constant to X,Y, or Z the
DX,DY, or DZ are also modified. DY=SQRT(DY**2+(e)**2) where e is the
specified error.
example
To subtract 2+-0.1 from y
Y=Y MINUS 2 ERROR=.1
or...
Y=Y - 2 ERROR=.1
To subtract Y from 2.
Y=2 MINUS Y
or...
Y=2 - Y
15.78.15 DIVIDE
Divides the coordinate by the value or a value by a coordinate. If you
are dividing X,Y, or Z by a constant the DX,DY, or DZ are also divided by
the constant. In addition if ERROR was specified then the final Dn will
be modified by the specified error. DY=SQRT(DY**2+(e*n/c)**2)/c where C
is the specified constant.
example
To divide y by 2+-0.1
Y=Y DIVIDE 2 ERROR=.1
or...
Y=Y / 2 ERROR=.1 To divide 2+-0.1 by Y
Y=2 ERROR=.1 DIVIDE Y
or...
Y=2 ERROR=.1 / Y
15.78.16 Warning
If you have already plotted the current data, this command will delete it
if just a value, or range of values is specified for X,Y, or Z. If you
wish to keep the data, you should use the option POINTS, SETS, or APPEND.
15.78.17 Examples
TD:X VALUES FROM 0 to 10 by 1
creates a data set with 11 values for X 0,1,2,...10
TD:X BINS FROM 0 to 10 N=10
or ...
TD:X FROM 0 to 10 by 1 BINS
create a data set with 10 values for X 0.5,1.5....9.5
TD:X FROM 0 to 20 BINS POINTS=1 TO 10
generates 1,3,5,...19 for Data points 1 to 10.
TD:Y=2.0 POINT=5
data point number 5 is set to 2.0
TD:DY =5
Sets all Y errors to +-5.
TD:DX =.1 * X
or ....
TD:DX =.1 TIMES X
Sets all X errors to 1. times the X value.
TD:X = 1 PLUS X
or ...
TD:X = 1 + X
Adds 1.0 to all X values.
TD:X = 1 + X ERROR=0.1
Adds 1.0 to all X values and adds 0.1 in quadrature to all DX.
DX=SQRT(DX**2+(0.1)**2)
TD:Y = DIVIDE 5
Both Y and DY are divided by 5.
TD:Y =Y * 5 ERROR=0.1
The Y coordinate is multiplied by 5, and the DY is modified according to
the error. DY=5*SQRT(DY**2+(0.1*Y/5)**2)
TD:SET ORDER Y
TD:1.5; 3.8; 9.7
TD:X FROM 1 to 3
or....
TD:X FROM 1 BY 1
is the same as:
TD:1 1.5; 2 3.8; 3 9.7
TD:DY SAMPLES=100
Each DY is now equal to SQRT(Y*(100-Y)/100). This assumes that each Y
represents the number of sucesses out of a sample of 100.
TD:Y=Y / V_SUM
Normalizes the data to the total sum over all data. Note: This may not
have the desired effect if you have more than 1 data set. To normalize
only one data set:
SET STATISTICS SET=2
TD:Y=Y / V_SUM
Normalizes only data set 2.
TD:Y="LOG(YV)"
Transforms Y by taking the LOG to base 10. DY is likewise modified.
Y=LOG10(Y) and DY=ABS(LOG10(Y+DY)-LOG10(Y))
15.78.18 Mesh_examples
Assume you have mesh data X,Y (ROW,COLUMN) of size 20, 30.
TD:X=X MINUS 5
Shifts the X scale
TD:Y=Y TIMES 2
Expands the Y scale
TD:Z=10 ROW=5 COLUMN=3
Modifies 1 entry
TD:Z=0
Sets all mesh values to 0.0
TD:Z=Z PLUS 1 ROW=5 TO 10 COLUMN=3 TO 5
Adds 1 to all mesh values for the specified range of rows and columns. 15
values are modified.
15.79 Y
See:Command X
15.80 Z
See:Command X
CHAPTER 16 LEXICAL_VALUES
You have access to data via lexicals. For example you may access the sum,
mean, standard deviation of your data set and put them into a title.
See:Command TITLE. Quantities such as points, sum etc. are calculated by
a SET STATISTICS or SHOW DATA command. If you do not use SET STATISTICS
or SHOW DATA to generate them, they are automatically calculated from the
entire data set. Whenever you modify the data set, you must use SET
STATISTICS to set the statistics if you wish the lexicals to represent
only a subset of the data. To use a lexical value you must use a symbol
of the form: T_NAME, S_NAME, or V_NAME. The T_NAME inserts the value of
the name into a title string. V_NAME or <NAME> is used to get the value
as a number. S_NAME gets a value as a string. You may define lexical
values by the command DEFINE VALUE or DEFINE STRING.
The lexicals may be abbreviated to the shortest unique name. For
convenience V_ may be omitted inside an expression. This will increase
the time to parse an expression. For example <V_XVALUE> is the same as
<XVALUE> or V_XV.
16.1 LIST_OF_NAMES
NAMES - Value
* INPUT_LEVEL - The number of input files opened by SET FILE INPUT.
* CPUTIME - The current cpu time
* CPULIMIT - The cpu time remaining
* SETS - The number of data sets.
* CURRENT_SET - The current data set (Set by option:SETS=)
* XVALUE[np,nr,ns] - The X value for point n in set ns.
* DXVALUE[np,nr,ns] - The error on X for point np row nr in set ns
* NDX[np,nr,ns],NDY,NDZVALUE - Negative part of error bar.
* YVALUE[np,nr,ns]
* ZVALUE[np,nr,ns]
* UVALUE[np,nr,ns]
* VVALUE[np,nr,ns]
* WVALUE[np,nr,ns]
* DYVALUE[np,nr,ns]
* DZVALUE[np,nr,ns] - (data for point n)
* RVALUE[np,nr,ns],DRVALUE[np,nr,ns] - Radius in polar or spherical
coordinates
* THVALUE[np,nr,ns],DTHVALUE[np,nr,ns] - Theta in polar or spherical
coordinates
* PHIVALUE[np,nr,ns],DPHIVALUE[np,nr,ns] - Phi in Spherical coordinates
* PLOTS - The number of plots produced.
* WINDOWS - The maximum number of windows
* CURRENT_WINDOW - The current window number
* XWINDOWS - The maximum number of X windows
* CURRENT_XWINDOW - The current X window number.
* YWINDOWS - The maximum number of Y windows
* CURRENT_YWINDOW - The current Y window number.
* COLUMNS - Number of columns in a mesh.
* CURRENT_COLUMN - Current column of a mesh (Set by option:POINT|
COLUMN=)
* ROWS - Number of rows in a mesh.
* CURRENT_ROW - Current row in a mesh. (Set by option:LINE|ROW=)
Calc by SET STATISTICS or SHOW DATA
* POINTS - The points in your data set.
* nMIN - The minimum value of n where n=X,Y, or Z.
* nMAX - The maximum value of n where n=X,Y, or Z.
* SUM - The sum over all points.
* AVERAGE - The average over all points.
* MEAN - The mean of the data.
* STD - The standard deviation of the data from the average.
* ESUM - The error on the sum.
* EAVERAGE - The error on the average.
* ESTD - The error in the STD.
* EMEAN - The error in the mean.
Calc by FIT command
* TERMS - The maximum term fit or constrained. (0...20)
* NPFIT - Then number of points fit
* NTFIT - The number of terms fit.
* CHISQR - The chi squared/point.
* FTEST - The value of FTEST.
* FIT[n] - 1 if coefficient n has been fit (n=0-19), 0 if not.
* CONSTRAINED[n] - 1 if this coefficient has been picked or
constrained.
* COEFFICIENT[n] - Value of the coefficient of the fit.
* ECOEFFICIENT[n] - Error on coefficient n.
SET by SET HIST command
* CURRENT_HISTOGRAM - The current histogram ID
(See:Command SET HISTOGRAM)
* HIST_NAME - Current hist name (S_ only)
* HIST_ENTRIES - The number of entries in the hist
* HIST_MEAN - The mean of the hist
* HIST_STD - The hist standard deviation
* HIST_SUM[n1,n2] - The sum over this histogram.
n1 = 1,2,3 for X Under,sum,over
n2 = 1,2,3 for Y Under,sum,over
If n1 or n2 are omitted or are 0 then you get the sum of all 3.
* XMARKER[n] - Array of 8 X markers
* YMARKER[n] - Array of 8 Y markers
* ZMARKER[n] - Array of 8 Z markers
3-d Parameters
* VIEW_THETA - Viewing angle
* VIEW_PHI - Viewing angle
* VIEW_SEPARATION - Eye separation
* VIEW_DISTANCE - Distance from observer to object
* VIEW_SCRD - Distance from observer to screen
Miscellaneous
* REPEAT[n] - Repeat number for loop n.
16.2 VALUES
V_XVALUE[n,ns] is the n'th value in set ns. Likewise V_DXVALUE[n,ns] is
the n'th value in set ns. You may also access Y,DY,Z, and DZ.
S_SYMBOL[n,ns] is the symbol for the the n'th value in set ns. If ns is
omited then n is the point number.
For MESH plots V_XVALUE[n1],V_YVALUE[n2],V_ZVALUE[n1,n2] are used to
access the data point values where n1 is the column number and n2 is the
row number.
If both n and ns are omitted then it is the value for the current point in
an X=,DX=,Y=... command.
16.3 REPEAT
V_REPEAT[n]
This is the repeat index for repeat commands. It starts at 1 and is equal
to the number of repeats when the loop terminates. You may specify the
loop number as n. If n is omitted it is the current inner loop. If n is
negative it is the next outer loop.
example
TD:REPEAT 2 "TYPE ""A"",S_REPEAT;REPEAT 3 ""TYPE S_REPEAT,'|
'S_REPEAT[-1]""";
Types:
A1.0
1.0|1.0
2.0|1.0
3.0|1.0
A1.0
1.0|2.0
2.0|2.0
3.0|2.0
16.4 EXAMPLES
TD:TITLE TOP 'Mean=' T_MEAN
Writes the mean of our data at the top of the current plot.
TD:SET ORDER X Y DX DY
TD:DATA SET
TD:V_MEAN,V_SUM,V_ESTD,V_ESUM
TD:DELETE SET=FIRST
Creates a new data set containing the Y=SUM, X=MEAN, DX=STD, DY=error on
SUM, then deletes the old data set.
TD:IF V_FIT[1] .gt. 0 TITLE 'Coef(1)=',T_COEFFICIENT[1]
Writes coefficient 1 if it has been fit.
TD:SET STATISTICS LIMITED FROM 0,1 to 5,10
TD:TITLE TOP 'Sum=',T_SUM,' between x=0,5 y=1,10'
Plot a title with the sum over the data between limits on x,y.
TD:SET STATISTICS SET=2
TD:TITLE TOP 'Sum=',T_SUM,' for data set 2'
Plot a title with the sum over data set 2.
CHAPTER 17 EXAMPLES
There are several files that give examples of TOPDRAWER plots.
Fonts + 2 dimensional graphics
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TDINTRO.TOP
3 dimensional graphics
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TD3D.TOP
Character set
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FONT_TABLE.TOP
Color graphics on VT-240 or GIGI
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]COLORGRAPH.TOP
Test routines
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]BENCH.TOP
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]RESOLUTION_TEST.TOP
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FIT_TEST.TOP
Test to make sure coefficients and errors are correct
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FIT_GAUS_COEF_TEST.TOP
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FIT_EXP_COEF_TEST.TOP
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FIT_PARABOLA_COEF_TEST.TOP
CHAPTER 18 SUBROUTINES
The TOPDRAWER package is available as a collection of subroutines. You
can call them to produce plots from any program. Each subroutine is the
same as giving a TOPDRAWER command. They are available in library:
TOPDRAWER_DIR:TOPDRAWER
18.1 NAMES
Most internal subroutines used by TOPDRAWER begin with T1,T2,TD, or TX.
The unified graphics routines all begin with UG. The exceptions to these
rules except for TOKEN are documented here. The CERN library histogram
routines used by TD do not follow any clear conventions.
18.2 STRINGS
WARNING
Routines TDSET,TDTITL and TDCASE are not fully Fortran-77
compatible. You must use either hollerith data, byte arrays,
literals, or character variables sent by reference when using
those routines.
If you use a byte array or a character array sent by reference, you must
terminate it with a semicolon (;) The following are all legal:
CHARACTER*8 str
DATA str /'Title;'/
CALL TDTITL(%REF(str))
or...
CALL TDTITL('Title')
or...
CALL TDTITL(6HTitle;)
or...
REAL*8 str
DATA str /'Title;'/
CALL TDTITL(str)
or...
byte str(5)
DATA str /'T','i','t','l','e',';'/
CALL TDTITL(str)
18.3 UNIT_NUMBERS
The following logical unit numbers are used:
Unit Routine Usage
1 T2SETH Histogram input
6 All Error message/Information output
7 TDMAIN Journal file output
8 All Listing output
9-19 TDMAIN Input
86 All Error message for deferred errors
The journal file, and listing are not output unless the following set
commands are used:
TD:SET FILE LOG filename
TD:SET FILE LIST filename
18.4 LINKING
For more information on linking see UGS. The following routines should be
linked to your program.
$ LINK Routine, -
TOPDRAWER_OLB[/INCLUDE=TD]/LIBRARY, -
PACKLIB_OLB/LIBRARY,MATHLIB_OLB/LIBRARY,
UGS_OLB/LIBRARY
If you wish to link a standalone version of topdrawer use /INCLUDE=TD.
For example you wish to make up a version of Topdrawer to do fits with
your own supplied function TDUFUN. You would link a new version as
follows:
$ LINK TDUFUN, -
TOPDRAWER_OLB/INCLUDE=TD/LIBRARY, -
PACKLIB_OLB/LIBRARY,MATHLIB_OLB/LIBRARY,
UGS_OLB/LIBRARY
18.5 DEMO_PROGRAM
There are Demo programs in TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES] called
TD_DEMO.FOR,TD_DEMO3.FOR and also a command file to build it called
TD_DEMO.COM. This illustrates the usage of the TOPDRAWER subroutines.
18.6 LIST_OF_SUBROUTINES
Miscellaneous routines
1. CPULIM - Gives you the CPU time remaining.
2. CPUTIM - Gives you the consumed CPU time.
3. DEFKEY - Defines keypad keys.
4. HELP - Types help info in your terminal.
5. INTRAC - Tells you if you are running interactively.
6. SPAWN - Spawns a subprocess
7. TRACE - Generates traceback.
8. READPR - Reads input with prompt.
TOPDRAWER routines
9. TDARRO - Draws ARROWN
10. TDCRCL - Draws BOX, CIRCLE, DIAMOND
11. TDEND - Empties buffers and closes graphics.
12. TDFLSH - Flushes the buffers
13. TDGETV - Gets a lexical value.
14. TDHIST - Does histograms
15. TDJOIN - Joins points
16. TDLIMS - Sets plot limits
17. TDNEW - Same as NEW FRAME command (with ALIAS)
18. TDNEWP - Same as NEW FRAME command
19. TDPLOT - Same as PLOT command
20. TDSETS - Sets parameters - same as SET command
21. TDSHOW - Type parameters on your terminal - same as SHOW command
22. TDTEXT - Draws text - same as TITLE command
23. TDVAX_PLOT - Set up default device
24. TD3JIN - Join 3-d data
25. TD3HST - Histogram 3-d data
26. T2MAIN - The main program for TOPDRAWER
27. T2CURS - The cursor routine
28. T2UPCS - Converts string to upper case
29. T2SQEZ - Squeezes multiple blanks from character strings.
30. T2_TRAP - Sets up to trap Control_C
18.7 CPUTIM
TIME = CPUTIM(OTIME)
This call will give you the difference in cputime between the current
time and the previous time (OTIME) in seconds. If otime=0.0 then the
total cpu time since the start of your process is returned.
This subroutine is independent from the rest of TOPDRAWER
18.8 CPULIM
TIME = CPULIM(OTIME)
This call will give you the difference in cputime between the
remaining cpu time and the previous time (OTIME) in seconds. If otime=0.0
then the total time limit since the start of your process is returned. If
CPULIM(0.0) is zero then there is no time limit on your process.
Example
TIME=CPULIM(CPUTIM(0.0))
This gives you the time remaining. If this is negative, then there was no
limit.
This subroutine is independent from the rest of TOPDRAWER
18.9 HELP
CALL HELP(string)
INPUT:
string = string of arguments to pass to help
This program was copied from Fortran Users Guide D-16 It assumes the
primary help library is TOPDRAWER_HLB.
This subroutine is independent from the rest of TOPDRAWER
18.10 INTRAC
ITEST=INTRAC(I)
I - A dummy variable
ITEST = .TRUE. if you are running interactively.
18.11 SPAWN
CALL SPAWN('command line')
A subprocess is created, the command line is executed, and then control
returns to your program. If the command line is blank, the user gets the
DCL prompt, and control returns after the user types LOG.
18.12 TRACE
CALL TRACE
Generates an error message including traceback. This may be useful for
debugging.
18.13 READPR
This reads from the SYS$INPUT after prompting
CALL READPR('PROMPT',STRING,LENGTH,[Itimeout])
INPUT:
PROMPT= string to prompt with
Itimeout= timeout time in seconds (integer) If the time between typed
characters exceeds the timeout then the read is terminated.
OUTPUT:
STRING = input
LENGTH = length of the input
You may define keypad keys to return a string using DEFKEY. DEFKEY and
READPR are routines which work together.
This subroutine is independent from the rest of TOPDRAWER
example
CHARACTER*20 STR
CALL READPR('Input:',STR,I,60)
IF (I.gt.0) TYPE *,'STR=",STR(1:I),'"'
Reads a string of 20 characters or less and writes it on your terminal.
You have 60 seconds to begin typing after the prompt.
18.14 DEFKEY
This defines a key on the keypad.
CALL DEFKEY(string)
The keypad key is defined in a manner similar to the DEFINE/KEY VMS
command. All of the ASK routines and READPR will interpret the keypad
keys, according to the DEFKEY routine. DEFKEY and READPR are routines
which work together.
Example
CALL DEFKEY('/KEY PF2 "HELP"/TERMINATE')
This is the default definition of PF2
18.15 TDARRO
This draws an arrow from XYZ(1:3,1) to XYZ(1:3,2)
CALL TDARRO(XYZ,[DXYZ,[IMODE,[ITYPE]]])
1. XYZ(3,2) is the array of XYZ to specify the arrow. XYZ(*,1) is
the tail while XYZ(*,2) is the head. For 2-d plots the z value
is ignored.
2. DXYZ(4) specifies the offsets and size.
A. DXYZ(1) - The offset for the tail of arrow
B. DXYZ(2) - The offset for the head of the arrow
C. DXYZ(3) - Size of arrow if zero the default is used.
D. DXYZ(4) - Flare of arrow if zero the default is used.
3. IMODE(2) - Specifies the frame. DATA=0, TEXT=1 IMODE(1) is for
tail of arrow.
4. ITYPE - Specifies the Texture,color,intensity
For more information see TOPDRAWER COMMAND ARROW. This is similar to
giving the command.
TD:ARROW FROM XYZ(1,1),XYZ(2,1),XYZ(3,1) LESS DXYZ(1) TO
XYZ(1,2),XYZ(2,2),XYZ(3,2) LESS DXYZ(2) SIZE=DXYZ(3),DXYZ(4) Outputs
extended titles with case formatting.
This routine is not recommended. It is provided for compatability with
older versions of TOPDRAWER. Use TDTEXT instead.
CALL TDCASE('title','case'[,x,y])
CALL TDCASE('title','case','position')
CALL TDCASE('title')
See TDTITL for more information
18.16 TDCRCL
This draws either a BOX, DIAMOND, or ELLIPSE.
CALL TDCRCL(XY,DXY,ITYPE,[IDATA,[MODE[,ANGLES]]]);
1. XY(3) is the array of XYZ to specify the center of the figure.
2. DXY(3) is the array of XYZ to specify the width of the figure.
3. ITYPE
1 2 3
BOX DIAMOND ELLIPSE
4. IDATA
0 - XYZ specified in text coordinates
1 - Center in Data, width in text coordinates.
3 - Both Center and width are in data coordinates.
5. MODE - Specifies Texture, intensity, color.
See:Subroutine TDHIST.
6. ANGLES(2) - Range of angles for circle
example
REAL XY(3),DXY(3)
DATA XY/1.,1.,1./,DXY/.5,.5,.5/
CALL TDCRCL(XY,DXY,3,3)
Draws an ellipse centered at 1,1,1 of size 0.5 in the data frame.
18.17 TDEND
This subroutine ends the graphics and closes any output files. This
should not be used to end an individual plot of a series. It only needs
to be called once before exiting from your program.
18.18 TDFLSH
Normally the graphics buffer is flushed after the subroutine call unless
FLUSH is set OFF. TDFLSH will allow you to flush the buffers only when
desired. This is much faster than flushing automatically.
18.19 TDGETV
LOGICAL L
L=TDGETV('string',VALUE)
INPUT:
string = The name of the lexical to get
OUTPUT:
VALUE = The actual value returned
L = .true. if the lexical was found, .false. if not found.
example
LOGICAL TDGETV
IF (TDGETV('V_SUM',SUM)) WRITE(6,*)'Sum=',SUM
18.20 TDHIST
Does histograms
CALL TDHIST(Npts,X,Y[,DX[,DY[,LEVEL[,MODE[,Z[,DZ]]]]]])
1. Npts - Then number of points to plot
2. X(Npts) - The X for each datum to histogram
3. Y(Npts) - The Y for each datum
4. DX(Npts) - The Error in X
5. DY(Npts) - The Error in Y
6. LEVEL = 0 Histogram
= 1 BARCHART
7. MODE - Selects the line structure,color,intensiy If zero these
are set by the SET command.
Intensity*8 (Intensity=1 to 5)
1*64, 2*64, 3*64, 4*64, 5*64, 6*64, 7*64
64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448
DOTS, DASHES, DOTDASH, SOLID, FUNNY, PATTERNED, DAASHES
WHITE RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN
1*512 2*512 3*512 4*512 5*512 6*512 7*512
8. Z(Npts) - The Z for each datum
9. DZ(Npts) - The Error in Z
18.20.1 Example
REAL X(5),Y(5),DX(5),DY(5)
READ (1,'(4F10.0)') (X(I),Y(I),DX(I),DY(I),I=1,5)
CALL TDHIST(5,X,Y,DX,DY,0,64+4*512)
Reads 5 lines containing X,Y,DX,DY on each and histograms the result with
BLUE dotted lines.
18.21 TDJOIN
Joins points
CALL TDJOIN(Npts,X,Y[,DX[,DY[,LEVEL[,MODE[,Z[,DZ]]]]]])
1. Npts - Then number of points to plot
2. X(Npts) - The X for each datum to histogram
3. Y(Npts) - The Y for each datum
4. DX(Npts) - The Error in X
5. DY(Npts) - The Error in Y
6. LEVEL - The number of segments per/point
7. MODE - Texture,color,intensity, and Fit parameters are added
together. If zero the default is taken or the SET value is used.
Type of fit
0 1 2
Default Spline "GENERAL"
The default is initially "GENERAL"
Texture params
Intensity*8 (Intensity=1 to 5)
1*64, 2*64, 3*64, 4*64, 5*64, 6*64, 7*64
64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448
DOTS, DASHES, DOTDASH, SOLID, FUNNY, PATTERNED, DAASHES
WHITE RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN
1*512 2*512 3*512 4*512 5*512 6*512 7*512
8. Z(Npts) - The Z for each datum
9. DZ(Npts) - The Error in Z
18.21.1 Example
REAL X(5),Y(5),DX(5),DY(5)
READ (1,'(4F10.0)') (X(I),Y(I),DX(I),DY(I),I=1,5)
CALL TDJOIN(5,X,Y,DX,DY,1,64+4*512)
Reads 5 lines containing X,Y,DX,DY on each and joins the result with BLUE
dotted lines. A single line segment joins each point.
CALL TDJOIN(5,X,Y)
Joins the 5 points with the default line type (SOLID,WHITE). The data
will be joined by multiple line segments to form a smooth curve.
18.22 TDLIMS
Sets limit for data set.
CALL TDLIMS(OPTIONS,Npts,values[,errors])
1. OPTIONS: 'XMIN', 'XMAX', 'X', 'YMIN', 'YMAX', 'Y', 'ZMIN',
'ZMAX', 'Z'
This specifies what limits are to be set. For example if 'X' is
specified, both XMIN and XMAX are set.
2. Npts - The number of data points.
3. Values(NPTS) - The array of data to use in setting the limits.
4. Errors(NPTS) - The corresponding error array
18.22.1 Example
REAL X(2),DX(2)
DATA DX/0.1,1.0/
DATA X/0.,10./
CALL TDLIMS('X',2,X)
This will set the plot to range from 0 to 10 along the X axis.
CALL TDLIMS('XMIN',1,0.0)
CALL TDLIMS('XMAX',1,10.0)
This will set the plot to range from 0 to 10 along the X axis
CALL TDLIMS('X',2,X,DX)
Sets the plot to range from -0.1 to 11.0
18.23 TDNEW
This starts a new plot and optionally gives the frame an ALIAS.
CALL TDNEWP('Alias')
If ALIAS is blank (' ') then there is no alias. ALIAS may either be a
string or a character variable.
18.24 TDNEWP
This starts a new plot. This differs from the original TOPDRAWER in that
you may not specify an ALIAS.
CALL TDNEWP
18.25 TDPLOT
Plots points.
CALL TDPLOT(Npts,X,Y[,DX[,DY[,'symbol'[,MODE]]]])
This plots the X,Y data using the specified symbol.
1. Npts - Then number of points to plot
2. X(Npts) - The X for each datum to histogram
3. Y(Npts) - The Y for each datum
4. DX(Npts) - The Error in X
5. DY(Npts) - The Error in Y
6. symbol - The symbol to use in plotting
7. MODE - Determines color,intensity - See TDHIST
18.25.1 Example
CALL TDPLOT(1,100.,200.,0.,0.,2H0O)
or...
CALL TDPLOT(1,100.,200.,0.,0.,'0O')
Puts a cross at 100.,200. in the data frame.
18.26 TDPLT
Plots points.
CALL TDPLT(SYMBOL,Npts,X,Y[,DX[,DY[,MODE[,Z[,DZ]]]]]])
This plots the X,Y data using the specified symbol.
1. symbol - The symbol to use in plotting. It may be either a
literal or character string.
2. Npts - Then number of points to plot
3. X(Npts) - The X for each datum to histogram
4. Y(Npts) - The Y for each datum
5. DX(Npts) - The Error in X
6. DY(Npts) - The Error in Y
7. MODE - Determines color,intensity - See TDHIST
8. Z(Npts) - The Z for each datum
9. DZ(Npts) - The Error in Z
18.26.1 Example
CALL TDPLT('0O',1,100.,200.,0.,0.)
or...
CHARACTER*2 SYMBOL
DATA SYMBOL/'0O'/
CALL TDPLT(SYMBOL,1,100.,200.,0.,0.)
Puts a cross at 100.,200. in the data frame.
18.27 TDSET
Sets parameters.
CALL TDSET(OPTIONS)
OPTIONS is a literal, hollerith, or array containing the options.
see:Subroutine STRING
This routine is not recommended. It is provided for compatability with
older versions of TOPDRAWER. Use TDTEXT instead.
The options are the same as for the SET command. For convenience you
probably should use TDSETS which is Fortran 77 compatible.
example
CALL TDSET('SIZE 10 BY 8')
This sets the size of the plot.
CALL TDSET('COLOR BLUE')
Now everything is plotted in blue.
or....
BYTE STRING(11)
DATA STRING/'C','O','L','O','R',' ',
1 'B','L','U','E',';'/
CALL TDSET(STRING)
18.28 TDSETS
Sets parameters.
CALL TDSETS(OPTIONS)
OPTIONS is a literal or character string containing the options. The
options are the same as for the SET command. This subroutine is Fortran
77 compatible so %REF should not be used.
18.28.1 Example
example
CALL TDSETS('SIZE 10 BY 8')
This sets the size of the plot. This is the same as the command:
TD:SET SIZE 10 BY 8
CALL TDSETS('COLOR BLUE')
Now everything is plotted in blue.
or....
character*10 string
data string/'COLOR BLUE'/
CALL TDSETS(string)
CALL TDSETS('DEVICE VERSATEC')
Sets the current device to be the Versatek printer/plotter.
18.29 TDSHOW
Shows parameters.
CALL TDSHOW(OPTIONS)
OPTIONS is a literal or character string containing the options to type on
your terminal. The options are the same as for the SET or SHOW command.
This subroutine is Fortran 77 compatible so %REF should not be used.
18.29.1 Example
CALL TDSHOW('SIZE')
This types on your terminal the size of the plot.
or...
character*4 string
data string/'SIZE'/
CALL TDSHOW(string)
18.30 TDTEXT
Outputs titles
CALL TDTEXT('options','title','case'[,x[,y[,z]]])
This puts the title at the specified x,y,z
1. options - This is a string specifying the options. These may be
any options used by the TITLE command. Some available options
are:
TOP, BOTTOM, RIGHT, LEFT, DATA, ANGLE=n, X, Y, Z, SIZE=n
2. title - text to put on the screen.
3. case - The case string. If ' ' is used then the text consists of
normal ASCII characters
4. x,y,z - Specify the title position in TEXT coordinates. If
omitted and no options are specified, the current title is placed
under the last.
This is a Fortran-77 compatible subroutine. Do not use %REF with the
option, title, or case strings. Options, title, and case must be either
literals or character variables.
18.30.1 Example
CALL TDTEXT('TOP','My graph',' ')
Puts a title at the top of the graph.
CALL TDTEXT('BOTTOM','X Axes',' ')
Puts a title at the bottom of the graph.
CALL TDTEXT(' ','More on the bottom',' ')
Then puts another line ender the previous one.
CALL TDTEXT('DATA','This is at location 5,1.8',' ',5.,1.8)
Puts a title left justified at the data locations 5.0,1.8
CALL TDTEXT('DATA,CENTER','This is at location 5,1.8',' ',5.,1.8)
Puts a title centered at the data locations 5.0,1.8
18.31 TDTITL
Outputs titles
This routine is not recommended. It is provided for compatability with
older versions of TOPDRAWER. Use TDTEXT instead.
CALL TDTITL('title',,x,y)
This puts the title at the specified x,y.
CALL TDTITL('title','position')
This puts the title at the specified position.
CALL TDTITL('title')
This puts a title under the last title.
1. title - Title
2. x,y - Specify the title position in TEXT coordinates.
3. position - Specifies the position relative to the data area
parameters:
'TOP', 'BOTTOM', 'RIGHT', 'LEFT'
4. If 'title' alone is specified, then the current title is placed
under the last.
18.31.1 Example
CALL TDTITL('My graph','TOP')
CALL TDTITL('X Axes','BOTTOM')
18.32 TDTSET
This controls the format of titles. This modifies only the next CALL
TITLE or CALL CASE.
This routine is not recommended. It is provided for compatability with
older versions of TOPDRAWER. Use TDTEXT instead.
CALL TDTSET(SIZE,[ANGLE,[SPACES,[IDATA]]])
1. SIZE - The character size in tenths of inches.
2. ANGLE - The Angle to draw the title at.
3. SPACES - The number of spaces the title occupies.
4. IDATA - Non zero if title is specified in DATA coordinates.
18.33 TD3JIN
This joins 3-d data.
CALL TD3JIN(ARRAY,NX,NY,[[[[[[IXYZ],ITXTUR],NXL],NYL],NXH],NYH])
1. ARRAY(NX,NY+1) - Contains the 3-d data.
* ARRAY(1,1) - N1+N2*4 - N=1,2,3 for X,Y,Z
N1=1 if ARRAY(1,1) is X, 2 if Y, 3 if Z.
N2=1 if ARRAY(1,1) is X, 2 if Y, 3 if Z.
* ARRAY(2:NX,1) - X values at center of bin
* ARRAY(1,2:NY) - Y values at center of bin
* ARRAY(2:NX,2:NY) - Z values
2. IXYZ controls type of plot.
* 0 = draw X,Y,Z
* 1 = draw X lines only
* 2 = draw Y lines only
* 3 = draw Z lines only
3. ITXTUR - (N*64=texture, N=1:7)
4. NXL - Low X chan to plot (0=plot all)
5. NYL - Low Y chan to plot (0=plot all)
6. NXH - High X chan to plot (0=plot all)
7. NYH - High Y chan to plot (0=plot all)
For more information see the sample program:
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TD_DEMO3.FOR
18.34 TD3HST
This histograms 3-d data.
CALL TD3HST(ARRAY,NX,NY[[[[[[[IXYZ],ITXTUR],DXYZ],NXL],NYL],NXH],NYH])
1. ARRAY(NX,NY+1) - Contains the 3-d data.
* ARRAY(1,1) - N1+N2*4 - N=1,2,3 for X,Y,Z
N1=1 if ARRAY(1,1) is X, 2 if Y, 3 if Z.
N2=1 if ARRAY(1,1) is X, 2 if Y, 3 if Z.
* ARRAY(2:NX,1) - X values at center of bin
* ARRAY(1,2:NY) - Y values at center of bin
* ARRAY(2:nx,2:NY) - Z values
* ARRAY(1,NY+1) - Lower Edge of first x bin
* ARRAY(2,NY+1) - Upper Edge of last x bin
* ARRAY(3,NY+1) - Lower Edge of first y bin
* ARRAY(4,NY+1) - Upper Edge of last y bin
2. IXYZ controls type of plot.
* 1 = draw X lines
* 2 = draw Y lines
* 4 = draw Z lines
* 8 = NoDEPTH
* 16 = NOHIDE
* 32 = NOFRAME
* 64 = Shade XY face
* 128 = Shade YZ face
* 256 = Shade ZX face
* 512 = Shade with X's
* 1024 = Shade with dots.
3. DXYZ(3) - Distance between lines used to shade plot (DX,DY,DZ)
4. ITXTUR - (N*64=texture, N=1:7)
5. NXL - Low X chan to plot (0=plot all)
6. NYL - Low Y chan to plot (0=plot all)
7. NXH - High X chan to plot (0=plot all)
8. NYH - High Y chan to plot (0=plot all)
For more information see the sample program:
TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TD_DEMO3.FOR
18.35 TDVAX_PLOT
CALL TDVAX_PLOT
This will set up your terminal as the default device, provided the symbol
PLOT_TERM is correctly set. Normally it is set when you log in so you
usually do not need to worry about it.
If this routine is not called, you must call TDSET and specify the device
to use in plotting.
18.36 T2CURS
CALL T2CURS(I,XYZ,XYZ1,XYZ2,LF1,LF2);
This subroutine returns both text and data coordinates from the Cursor:
1. I = Character typed ICHAR(character) (If 0 no input)
2. XYZ(2) = Physical device coordinates.
3. XYZ1(2) = Text coordinates.
4. XYZ2(3) = Data coordinates. If the plot is 2-d XYZ2(3)=0
5. LF1 = .true. if text coor. returned
6. LF2 = .true. if data coor. returned
18.37 T2MAIN
CALL T2MAIN(IARG,string)
This calls the TOPDRAWER main program.
INPUT: string
This is a command to perform. If it is blank then TOPDRAWER will prompt
you until either a RETURN,STOP, or NEW PLOT command is typed.
OUTPUT: IARG
= 1 if a CLEAR command was typed.
= 2 if a STOP command was typed.
NOTE
This subroutine calls all other TOPDRAWER subroutines. If you
call it then all other subroutines will be included in your
program.
18.38 T2UPCS
CALL T2UPCS(str)
Converts a character string to upper case.
18.39 T2SQEZ
CALL T2SQEZ(str,ILEN)
Squeezes out multiple blanks from str, and returns the location of the
last non blank character in ILEN.
18.40 T2_TRAP
Traps any control C interrupts. While executing Topdrawer subroutines
this returns control back to T2MAIN or the user routine.
CHAPTER 19 LINKING
If you wish to link a program so that it may share HBOOK4 histograms with
TOPDRAWER, you need to do the following:
1. Insert the following lines of code into your main program.
INTEGER HCREATEG
PARAMETER IHSIZE=100000
COMMON /PAWC/MEMORY(IHSIZE)
......
ISTAT=HCREATEG('region_name',MEMORY,IHSIZE)
IF (ISTAT .le. 0) STOP 'Can not create region'
CALL HLIMIT(IHSIZE)
You may adjust the IHSIZE to the proper value.
2. When you link you must also include:
TOPDRAWER_DIR:TD_GROUP/OPT
To give users in your group only read access to your histograms.
ISTAT=HCREATEG('region_name',MEMORY,-IHSIZE)
or link using....
TOPDRAWER_DIR:TD/OPT
TD_GROUP uses a modified version of HCREATEG rather than the
standard CERN version. The modified one in addition to setting
up group read/write protection on the section also prevents
creation of the same global section by more than 1 person. It
creates a new version instead. It will type out the name of the
created global section. The modified version will create a read
only section if -IHSIZE is passed to it.
To create a global section HCREATEG must open a scratch file.
The modified version attempts to do this on SYS$SCRATCH:. By
reassigning the scratch device you may put this file on a disk
with enough quota.
$ DEFINE SYS$SCRATCH USR$SCRATCH:[name]
For information about using the TD subroutines:
SEE:SUBROUTINES
CHAPTER 20 REVISIONS
The original sources were written by:
Roger B. Chaffee
Computation Research Group
Stanford Linear Accelerator Center
Stanford, California
Modified:
J. Clement
All syntax has been "regularized" and extended for convenience.
20.1 OBSOLETE_COMMANDS
Most commands in the "original" version still work. There are the few
known exceptions.
1. DUMP - Removed
2. SET FILE DEBUG - Removed
3. SET FILE ERROR - Removed
4. SET FILE INPUT n - No longer works the same. Instead of a unit
number you must specify a file name.
5. SET FILE OUTPUT n - No longer works the same. Instead of a unit
number you must specify a file name.
6. TIME - Replaced by SHOW TIME.
7. SET DEVICE 4013 - Removed.
8. Certain undocumented commands were removed. Specifically in the
original version the option SET may be omitted entirely, but it
must be used in the BONNER LAB version for set commands.
20.2 86
1. SET COLOR - Now accepts full range of UGSYS color specs.
2. SET FILE - Command rewritten. It now accepts a file name and
multiple nesting of SET FILE INPUT is possible.
3. Unit numbers modified to allow batch input.
4. SET DEVICE DDNAME=filename - The limitation of 8 chars on
filename is removed.
5. SET DEVICE - INTERACTIVE is the default.
6. HELP - New command added.
7. Added prompting for interactive input.
8. PLOT_TERM, PLOT_DEVICE symbols are used to determine default
device.
9. TOKEN - Tabs are treated as spaces.
10. SIXELS is now a legal device.
11. SET INPUT is a synonym of SET CARD.
12. SET ERRORS - New command added.
13. Fixed SET DEVICE command so SIDEWAYS works properly.
14. INTENSITY/WIDTH 3 did not work properly, and would cause other
options to work improperly.
15. SET DEVICE accepts lowercase chars. in string.
16. SET STRUCTURE can now set FUNNY.
17. HISTOGRAM command now produces a BLOCK plot for 3-d data.
18. FLUSH command flushes the buffers.
19. Fixed UG errors when no plot make.
20. Fixed failure to SET DEVICE in the middle of an interactive
session.
21. Added JOURNAL file and SET JOURNAL command.
22. Added SHOW commands as mirror to SET commands.
23. Rewrote T23HST to add fast "LEGO" plots as well as minimal
histograms.
24. TITLE X|Y|Z now produces titles next to 3-d axes. The lables and
titles are always drawn on the outer side of axes by default.
25. T23HST,T23JIN accept a texture parameter. T23HST may plot hidden
lines with the option HIDE.
26. T2FREQ modified for incomplete storage. Now only X,Y are
required.
27. Modified TXDOT and TXTSYM to produce points directly from unified
graphics. This makes better points for hi resolution displays,
and faster points on Tek4010 displays.
28. T23PLT - added to do scatter plots.
29. SLICE - command added to plot slices of mesh data.
30. Fixed T2DEF2 so limits are properly defined at all times.
31. Added SET HIST command. This is conditionalized for the 3
different types of hist routines. You can get RICE format, and
HBOOK format hist files to be displayed by TOPDRAWER.
32. SHOW DATA can show you a subset of the data, with calculations of
statistics on the data.
33. 3D is now properly selected for each type of hist.
34. DEFINE KEY - Defines keypad keys for ANSII terminals.
35. The previous 20 input lines are stored for recall by ANSII mode
terms. This is done using SMG routines so foreign terminals can
be defined also.
36. Traceback for input files has been added.
37. Modified TXLINE for optimized point plotting. Essentially
drawing points with UGMARK is faster for some protocalls than
drawing zero length lines. This is automatically done wherever
possible. This is especially true for 4010 graphics. A cluster
of Nearby dots can save a factor of 3 in transfer time.
38. Regularized the error messages, and added messages for
PEN,WIDTH,CARD LENGTH out of range.
39. Added PERMANENT option to SET SYMBOL,GRID,WIDTH This changed the
logic of SET SYMBOL slightly to conform to other commands.
40. The card length was changed to conform to standard screen sizes
(80 cols). The Format string is (256A1) to make card size
changes easy.
41. Fixed automatic flush so it works properly for interactive use.
42. Fixed NOVECTOR mode so that it works. Make the default VECTOR.
Removed '$' as a separator. This is necessary for some
filenames! (TXXUG77)
43. 29-Oct-1986 - Added DSIZE,DOTS,... options to
CIRCL,ELLIPSE,DIAMOND,BOX commands. (T2MAIN,T2PLOT)
44. 31-Oct-1986 - Added cursor support
(T2XFRM,TXXUG77,T2SET1,T2SHOW).
45. 5-Nov-1986 - Fixed the option PLOT SYMBOL so it works, and fixed
problem with multiple options after PLOT.
46. Added color,texture,intensity control to SET AXES, OUTLINE, GRID,
TITLE. Also color, texture may now be specifed for any command
that draws something. PLOT, HIST, BOX, TITLE....
47. Added support for multiple data sets. option SETS picks data
sets.
48. Added MESH data support to SMOOTH command.
49. 14-NOV-1986 - Fixed bug in T2RDPT. Data after a symbol was
skipped.
50. Modified string handling to Fortran-77.
51. 26-Nov-1986 - Added IF,ELSE,ENDIF.
52. 1-Dec-1986 - Added options SCALE, TICKS, and PERMANENT to SET
SCALE command. Added option PERMANENT to SET COLOR and reset
color with each new plot. Fixed a problem with JOIN SPLINE DASH.
If the points were closely spaced a solid line is drawn. Added
options BLINK, PROPORTIONAL, HARDTEXTURE.
53. 8-Dec-1986 - Added sideways option to SET SIZE. Added options
WHITE,... WIDTH=, DOTTED to SET TICKS,LABELS,TITLE. SHOW
command now shows the Default values as well as the current ones.
54. 16-Dec-1986 - Added options DOT/DASH/DAASH/RANDOM/SPACE to set
pattern. Fixed infinite loop when no pattern specified.
55. 23-Dec-1986 - Added option for automatic pattern generation for
drawing commands. ie. JOIN DOT DOT DASH generates the pattern
to do this. Added EXPAND option to JOIN,HIST,PLOT. Added
VARIABLE, SIZE, NORANDOM options to PLOT.
20.3 87
1. 1-Feb-1987 - Typing Ctrl_C will abort the current plot or print.
The SET HISTOGRAM command may select histograms by substring in
the title. NEXT|PREVIOUS may be combined with NAME= to select
the next hist which matches the name. NEXT|PREVIOUS will wrap
around the end of the histogram list unless WRAP OFF is specified
or in BATCH mode.
2. 12-Feb-1987 - The journal file will contain coordinates entered
by cursor. The AUTOPLOT mode was added. The condition
INTERACTIVE may be tested by the IF command. MARGINS may be
specified in addition to the SCREEN size in the SET SIZE command.
3. 26-Feb-1987 - Added DEFINE COMMAND and SHOW HIST may now show
more information. The option CURRENT has been added to SHOW
HIST.
4. 10-Mar-1987 - Added option APPEND to SET HIST. Added options
POINTS, and SETS to BIN. Histogramming speed was optimized for
cases with a series of identical Y values. SHOW DATA gives
errors on statistics, and statistics are generated for each data
set separately. Fixed problem with histogramming data withou Z
values as 3-d plot.
5. 7-Apr-1987 - Added commands DELETE, FIT. Fixed some problems
with separate data sets.
6. 30-Apr-1987 - Added option ADD to SET HIST. If a mesh was read
with one axes increasing and the other decreasing, it would not
plot properly. This has been fixed.
7. 8-May-1987 - Added contour plotting, and LOG_ERROR routine to
trap arithmetic errors. The error handling returns to the T2MAIN
program.
8. 19-May-1987 - Virtual memory added to VAX version.
9. 5-Jun-1987 - Fixed hidden line algorithm. It used wrong average
X,Y to calculate the vertical. As a result it treated as hidden
many lines incorrectly.
10. 11-Jun-1987 - Fixed infinite loop in T2MSFV. Rewrote T2MESH for
better hidden line removal. The old algorithm would leave in
hidden lines, or omit visible line segments that are bisected by
sharp peaks. The new algorith fixes these errors with less than
a 5% loss in cpu speed.
11. 17-Jun-1987 - Fixed problems with title overflow for small page
sizes. Added LINES parameter to SET TITLE and SHIFT to SET
LABELS. Added numbered windows. Negative SCRD will produce
constant view of mesh. Dot plots and mesh plots were optimized
for max speed. Essentially the user can select windows more
easily.
12. 23-Jun-1987 - Fixed problems with 3-d text. The DUPLEX font did
not work for 3-d text, it caused array overflows or spurious
lines. 3-d text processing was somewhat optimized. The syntax
of the SET GRID command has been brought in line with set
AXES,LABEL,TITLE commands.
13. 16-Jul-1987 - Fixed SET THREE to conform to documentation.
14. 23-Jul-1987 - Modified T2TLAB so that labels may be generated for
data with a large range. Some changes were also made in T2CNTR.
Added Table generation for 1/2-d data. Limit generation was
modified to keep the limits within reasonable values, when the
data has very small relative variation. Title generation was
modified to keep long titles on the screen. The character size
is reduced by up to a factor of 4 if the title is too long to
fit.
15. 30-Jul-1987 - Modified YEAR/MONTH scale so that all days occupy
equal space.
16. 30-Aug-1987
A. Lexicals were added as input to allow access to internal
numbers.
B. The SET STATISTICS command allows the user to set the actual
statistical data used by the lexicals.
C. SET DIGITS determines the number of digits used for output.
DIGITS options in titles allow formatting of numbers in
titles.
D. PLOT TABLE - plots the data as a table of numbers.
E. PLOT AXES/GRID - Has options X,Y,Z... to allow absolute user
control over axes/grid generation.
F. INHIBIT option has been added to SET LABELS, SET AXES... To
allow inhibiting axes generation while still leaveing room
for the axes.
17. 16-Sep-1987 - Added mesh data handling to X,Y,Z commands, as well
as MINUS and DIVIDE options. MULTIPLY and DIVIDE commands may be
used to manipulate histograms or spectra. The X,Y,Z commands
were modified to handle DX,DY, and DZ automatically.
18. 14-Oct-1987 - Added Lexicals for external histogram parameters.
Modified PLOT command so that the current texture applies to the
error bars. DEFINE VALUE and DEFINE STRING commands were added.
S_ lexicals were added for access to string lexicals.
19. 31-Oct-1987 - Added LOG option to BIN, SWAP, X, SMOOTH, SET HIST,
DEFINE HIST, ADD, MULTIPLY, and DIVIDE commands. Added
SET MODE LOG for automatic logging. Added SET WINDOW LEVEL=n to
make inset windows easier. Added INSIDE option to SET LABELS to
make packed windows easy to create.
20.4 88
1. 15-Jan-1988 - Added expression parsing. This allows you to enter
an arithmetic expression wherever a number is called for. The
syntax is <expression>. See TOPDRAWER DATA EXPRESSION for more
details. Added REPEAT and ENDREPEAT commands. The equals sign
"=" may not be replaced by a comma "," or slash "/" where it is
used in the documentation. It may be replaced by spaces. Plus,
or minus "+-" signs are not allowed in options except as part of
a number.
2. 4-Feb-1988 - Added angle lexicals (VIEW_...). Fixed some bugs in
MESH plots. Added X="expression" command. Added CREATE MESH
command to create mesh data sets. Modified PLOT VARIABLE for
mesh data so the symbol size is automatically set to the maximum
bin size.
3. Apr-1988 - Fixed LIMITED option for SHOW DATA command, and added
LIMITED option to BIN command. Added FOR option to WAIT. Added
PACKED option to SET ORDER. The SET ORDER and SET STORAGE
commands no longer delete data. The SORT command has been added.
4. Jun-1988 - Fixed the error calculation on MEAN for show
statistics. Fixed NEW RESET so that scales are also reset to the
original default.
5. Aug-1988 - Added MESH,NORMAL options to BIN command. Added CHECK
option to ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE commands. Added SPLIT
option to PROJECT command. Added ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE
options to DEFINE HISTOGRAM commnand. Fixed an infinite loop
when a single point is histogrammed.
6. Nov-1988 - Added THETA,PHI,ANGLE specifications to SET SYMBOL,
and SET GRID. Spiffed up the show formats. Added EXCL driver
for native mode support of TALARIS-1590 and LN-03+ printers.
7. Dec-1988 - Fixed several bugs. Set window 3 of -4 did not work
as the first window. Only 1 of 4 could be the first window. A
call to t2MAIN with blank string after a call with non blank
string would not prompt for input. SHOW WINDOW worked
incorrectly for - windows. Calls to T2JOIN,T2HIST...,
incorrectly reset permanent limits.
8. Dec-1988 - Added NTFIT,NPFIT lexicals, and extended TDPLT,
T2JOIN,T2HIST for 3-d data.
9. 28-Dec-1988 - Added options
AREA/SHARE/SAVE/READ/WRITE/INPUT/OUTPUT to SET/DEFINE/SHOW
HISTOGRAM commands. Created a compatible version with HBOOK4.
20.5 89
1. Jan-1989 - Fixed error calculations for fitting routines. The
quoted errors were too large. Added ERROR option to FIT command.
Fitted curves are generated with error bars now. ADD FIT to data
set now also adds the fitted errors unless ERROR=OFF is
specified. Fixed equation evaluation. Exponents were evaluated
incorrectly ie. <1.0E-3>-->1000. and <1.0E+3>-->.001
2. Feb-1989 - Added file spec/LIST=/COMMAND=/JOURNAL= options to
TOPDRAWER command line.
3. Mar-1989 - Added MERGE command to merge data sets.
4. Apr-1989 - Added mixed data sets. Mesh + regular data may exist
as separate data sets. Added error display to JOIN command for
mesh data. ADD/SUB/MUL/DIV commands now may add mesh data.
Added errors to mesh data. SHOW STAT now shows mean/std... for
mesh data. New options:
ERROR had been added to command READ MESH,JOIN,CREATE MESH.
APPEND has been added to READ MESH,CREATE MESH
Modified options:
SETS, POINTS|COLUMNS, LINES|ROWS are now independent
options.
SETS - Specifies the data set only.
POINTS - Specifies the point/column number within the set.
When the LIMITED option is used, the Z value is used to limit the
data.
Created NETWINDOW files to use TD over the DECnet.
5. June-1989 - Added TEK4207 support to TEK driver. Speeded up
REGIS/TEK drivers. Added VAXSTATION (UGUISD driver) support.
6. Nov-1989 - Added support for NTUPLES to NTOPDAWER. Removed the
slash as a separator. It may be put back by the command:
SET CHARACTER SEPARATOR "/"
7. Dec-1989 - A number of enhancements have been made to NTOPDRAWER.
Added the options TREE to SAVE/RESTORE/SET HISTOGRAM commands and
added support for "wild" characters for histogram area
specification. Added the MONITOR HISTOGRAM, and DELETE
HISTOGRAM. Removed support for RICE histograms from NTOPDRAWER.
Added support for a GLOBAL SECTION containing HBOOK4 histograms.
NTOPDRAWER is now capable of handling HBOOK4 histograms in a
fairly simple fashion.
Both NTOPDRAWER and TOPDRAWER have been enhanced as follows. The
driver for TEK4010 has been modified to allow you to specify the
necessary escape sequences for entering and exiting TEK-4010 mode
as well as for reproducing colors. Support for the LSI-7107
color terminal has been added. Support for postscript and am
IMAGEN printer has been added. The options SPACE has been added
in addition to DOTS,DASH... for line structure.
20.6 90
1. Jan-1990 - Optimized expression evaluation to achieve a 30 fold
speedup. Added error handling to smoothing routine. Added
support for a postscript printer.
2. Feb-1990 - Added EQUATION option to FIT. For general linear
fits. Optimized the auto label generation for logarithmic axes.
Removed restrictions on order of DECADES, SUBTICKS in the SET
SCALE command. Added device UIS to be able to dump screen of
Vaxstation to disk in full resolution. Made VAXstation driver
work for color station. Added color mappings for DECGIGI driver.
3. July-1990 - Fixed PROJECT command in TOPDRAWER. It was correct
in NTOPDRAWER. It would sometimes give incorrect results for
HBOOK histograms.
Added options FETCH and READ to TOPDRAWER command RESTORE HIST.
(Version 3.5)
Note: some versions may have had problems with the fitting
lexicals. VCOEFFICIENT... as some modules were compiled with
/Gfloat and some were not. The standard is /GFLOAT for all
double precision operations if it is supported by the machine
that it is compiled on.
Fixed lexicals V... inside expressions. Y="VXVALUE**2" yielded
incorrect results while Y="XVALUE**2" was correct. This problem
dated from Jan-1990 when optimization was introduced.
4. Dec-1990 - Added options WEIGHT, EWEIGHT to
ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE commands. These allow weighting of
data when doing the operation.
20.7 91
1. Jan-1991 - Added documentation to command SET DEVICE on how to
create separate plot and command windows for TEK-4010 and REGIS
graphics.
Added procedures: FREEZE.TOP and FREEZE22.TOP to TOPDRAWER_DIR:
2. 18-Jan-1991 - Fixed bug in module TXLINE that produced spurious
lines by incorrect scissoring.
3. Added SET CYCLE, SHOW CYCLE commands and CYCLE option to CONTOUR.
4. 21-Jan-1991 - Fixed bug in PLOT,JOIN,HISTOGRAM commands. SLICES
did not work properly when THREE was OFF. Revision level 3.6.
Added options OFFSET,DATA,ABSOLUTE,VALUE,CURSOR to PLOT TABLE to
move the table to more convenient locations.
Add option VECTOR to PLOT command, to plot a vector field, where
DX,DY,DZ is the length of the vector.
5. 29-Jan-1991 - Fixed security hole to conceal passwords when using
files over DECnet. Fixed some minor bugs in
ADD/SUBTRACT/MULTIPLY commands.
Add option VECTOR to ADD/SUBTRACT/MULTIPLY commands to do
operations on VECTOR fields.
6. 8-Feb-1991 - Added SET MODE CHECK,CONFIRM,TREE. These select
whether checking, confirmation, or HBOOK tree searching are
defaulted to ON. Added options POINTS,ROWS,LIMITED to
ADD/SUB/MULT/DIV commands This allows compete selection of a
subset of data to operate on. Added option CHECK to FFT command
to allow turning off data checking.
7. 11-Feb-1991 - Fixed problem with short ticks being produced in
SET SCALE when option LABEL=n preceded TICKS=m. Version 3.7
8. 28-Feb-1991 - Added options FILL,HIDE to most commands that draw
something. This means you may fill and hide BOXES,CIRCLES,
DIAMONDS, HISTOGRAMS, ARROWS. In addition the SET/SHOW FILL
commands allow you to manipulate the fill patterns. Added the
command SET/SHOW SHIELD to shield a section of a plot from
further plotting. Added A GKS (DEC) for those devices not
availble through UGS. Fixed a minor bug that switched line
texture unexpectedly in UIS driver.
9. 4-Mar-1991 - Added SET/SHOW UNITS to allow you to reset both TEXT
and character units.
Fixed some problems with 3d histograms. Conditionalized the code
means that the defaults are all in CM instead of INCHES. You may
use these conditionals to build a completely metric verstion of
TD.
10. 15-Mar-1991 - Version 4.0 Added options SELECT="name",
NAME="name" to add names to data sets. SELECT selects data sets
by name, while NAME sets the data set name. HBOOK histogram
names are automatically propagated to the data set. Option TITLE
added to JOIN, PLOT, HIST, CONTOUR to add title when data set is
plotted.
11. 25-Mar-1991 - Added NONLINEAR option to FIT to use MINUIT to
perform fits on nonlinear functions. Fixed problem in arbitrary
linear fit functions.
Version 4.0.
12. 2-May-1991 - Updated HBSEARCHID and T2SETH4 to be HBOOK V4.10
compatible. Added more units to SET UNITS.
13. 14-Jun-1991 - Add options WIDTH, HEIGHT to SET DEVICE. Made the
default the new version of TOPDRAWER. Fixed some bugs with SET
UNITS.
14. 28-Jun-1991 - Modified the X,Y,Z commands so that DX,DY or DZ are
automatically recomputed when an expression is used.
15. 22-Jul-1991 - Fixed a bug in STORE HIST command. The wrong
default RECL was used. Removed calls to obsolete HFNEXT routine.
16. 23-Aug-1991 - Added option MESH to FIT command for MESH fits.
Added option APPEND to LIST command to append listing on old
file. Fixed error handling for MINUIT fits. Now the errors are
the same for linear and NONLINEAR fits. Added functiond DGAUSS
and DPOLY to list of functions, as fits of Z vs X,Y. Fixed a bug
in T2MESH that messed up histograms of mesh data with errors.
GMINUT has been added to NTOPDRAWER.
17. Sept-1991 - Added option SAVE to CONTOUR to save the contour
lines in data sets. Fixed an 2 outrageous bugs in T2SMOOTH and
SMCTRL. One bug incorrectly treated the end points of a curve.
The other would delete isolated data points that were adjacent to
a flat region in the data.
Added INTERPOLATE command to produce interpolated data sets using
local fitting procedures. This uses the same procedures as the
JOIN command. Added MONITOR option to BIN, FIT, FFT, CONVOLUTE,
SMOOTH commands to plot before/after pictures. Added SET MODE
MONITOR/APPEND to enable automatic MONITOR, APPEND.
Fixed equations inside FIT command. Arbitrary equations would
sometimes give incorrect results. It has been fixed.
Version 4.31
18. Nov-1991 - Fixed fatal error in FIT that prevented producing a
curve from set coefficients. Fixed some bugs in all commands
that use the option CHECK.
19. Version 4.4 Added ORIENTATION=n to SET SIZE/DEVICE commands.
20. Apr-1992 Added option PORTRAIT/LANDSCAPE to set device. Also
added device EPS.
21. July-1992
A. Fixed the BIN command to work properly with data when DY=0.
B. Added options BREAK/SUPPRESS to SET BAR to suppress error
bars around the symbol for a PLOT command.
C. Added some fixes to SET DEVICE for DECGKS-3D to send the
Xwindow output to the correct device. Added some FNAL fixes,
and added output options to initial command line.
$ TOPDRAWER [filename [device1 [device2 ...]]]
D. Added new coordinates NDX,NDY,NDZ to PLOT/BAR/HIST assymetric
error bars. These are NOT used in some computations
involving errors.
E. Fixed an error in TOKEN that prevented access to the data
point lexicals when the data set number (3'rd index) was
specified.
F. Fixed an error that produced spaces when more than 195 points
are joined.
G. Reversed the default for ERROR option on the SWAP,SMOOTH
command. Now the ERROR option should be default be on for
all commands. By setting the REVISION to lower than 5.0 this
should revert to the old behavior.
H. Added the minus (-) sign as a continuation character at the
end of a line.
I. Added options SET AXES FRONT,BOTH,THREE
To allow default plotting of 3-d axes in a "sensible"
fashion.
J. Added options SET GRID OUTLINE,Z
To improve the 3-d grid capability.
Version 5.0
22. Aug-1992 V5.1 - Fixed some bugs in the PLOT command.
NOSYMBOL did not work
POINTS FROM n TO m would not select the correct range of points.
CHAPTER 21 INSTALLATION
To install topdrawer on your system, copy the files in
TOPDRAWERROOT:[*...] to a directory of your choice. Execute the SETUP.COM
procedure to create the necessary local TOPDRAWER symbols and logics. On
the FNAL cluster, the files are placed in LIB:[LIB.TOPDRAWER.version], and
SETUP TOPDRAWER causes the SETUP.COM procedure to be run. The
TOPDRAWER.HLP help library module has been placed in the LIB alternate
help library.
You may wish to rename and delete some of the executables, if your system
lacks Xwindows or GKS.
1. TOPDRAWERMIN has neither Xwindows nor GKS support.
2. TOPDRAWER has Xwindows but not GKS.
3. TOPDRAWERGKS has both.
CHAPTER 22 AUTHOR
This version is heavily modified from the original written by:
Roger B. Chaffee
Computation Research Group
Stanford Linear Accelerator Center
Stanford, California
U.S.A.
The original docuementation is:
CGTM 178 - November 1980
This version was written by:
John Clement
Bonner Nuclear Lab
Rice University
P.O. Box 1892
Houston, Tx, 77251
(713) 527-8101 x 2037
Internet: CLEMENT@PHYSICS.RICE.EDU
Bitnet: CLEMENT@RICEVM1
Hepnet: FNBIT::RIPHYS::CLEMENT
or...
RIPHYS::CLEMENT
Index
3-D plots 26, 40, 51, 82, 83, 85, 92, 94, 105, 108, 109, 110, 113, 151,
156, 169, 174, 175, 178, 191, 194, 195, 203, 205, 206, 208, 233
Abbreviations 29
ABORT 158
ALL 175
ANGLE 145, 176
Angles 17
Answerback 8
APPEND 39, 95
Arpanet 139
Astronomical symbols 23
AUTOPLOT 158
AVERAGE 39
Axes 103, 153, 162, 166, 182
AXIS 178
BASE 167
Binomial statistics 64
Block plot 83
Box 43
Case blind 142
CENTER 178, 179
Character case 142
CLEAR 68, 126
COEFFICIENTS 75
COLOR 32, 38, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 81, 90, 102, 122, 126, 145, 153, 164,
166, 170, 182, 184, 227, 228
Command 1, 30
ADD 35
ARROW 38
BARGRAPH 38
BIN 39
BOX 43
CASE 207
CIRCLE 45, 66
CLEAR 68
Continuation 29
CONTOUR 45
CONVOLUTE 48
DEFINE
COMMAND 53
KEY 59
DIAMOND 62
DIVIDE 64
DPHI 209
DRADIUS 209
DTHETA 209
DU 209
DV 209
DW 209
DX 209
DY 209
DZ 209
ELLIPSE 66
END 100, 102, 140, 203
EXIT 100, 102, 140, 203
FFT 69
FILL 70
FIT 71
FLUSH 81
format of commands 29
HALT 100, 102, 140, 203
HELP 87
HISTOGRAM 81
JOIN 89
MERGE 95
MORE 98
MULTIPLY 99
NDPHI 209
NDRADIUS 209
NDTHETA 209
NDU 209
NDV 209
NDW 209
NDX 209
NDY 209
NDZ 209
NEW FRAME 100
NEW PLOT 100
PHI 209
PLOT 102
PROJECT 110
QUIT 100, 102, 140, 203
RADIUS 209
READ
MESH 113
POINTS 112
SET 120
AREA 187
ARROW 122
AXES 122
AXIS 122
BAR 123
BLINK 125
BOX 124
CARD 125
CHARACTER 125
CIRCLE 126
CLEAR 126
COLOR 126
COMMAND 126
Ctrl_Z 126
DATE 127
DEVICE 128
DIAMOND 141
DIGITS 141
ELLIPSE 141
EXACT 34, 142
FILE 142
FONT 144
FORMAT 145
GRID 145
HISTOGRAM 13, 147
INPUT 125
INTENSITY 153
LABELS 153
LIMITS 155
MODE 157
MONITOR 160
ORDER 161
OUTLINE 162
PATTERN 163
PEN 164
POLAR 164
PROMPT 165
REVISION 166
SCALE 166
SECONDARY 166
SEGMENTS 166
SHADOW 170
SIZE 172
SPHERICAL 173
STATISTICS 174
STORAGE 175
STRUCTURE 177
SYMBOL 176
TEXTURE 177
THREE 178
TICKS 182
TITLES 183
UNITS 186
WIDTH 187
WINDOW 187
SHOW 192
CURSOR 193
DATA 141, 194
FLAGS 196
HISTOGRAMS 196
TIME 200
SMOOTH 201
SORT 202
SPAWN 202
STOP 100, 102, 140, 203
SUBTRACT 35
SWAP 203
SYMBOL 204
THETA 209
TITLE 204
TRANSFORM 208
U 209
V 209
W 209
X 209
Y 209
Z 209
Command<SET<ERRORS 142
Comments 29
Contour plots 45
Coordinates 19
Copying data 95
Cosine fit 74
Ctrl_C 52, 53, 100, 194, 196, 203
Ctrl_Z 126, 192, 203
CURSOR 10, 38, 41, 43, 51, 63, 67, 76, 93, 107, 155, 156, 166, 187, 193,
204
CYCLE 46
Cyrillic characters 21
DAASHES 32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
DASHES 32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
data format 14
Data frame 19
Dates 17, 127
Days 17, 127, 167
DEBUG 158
DECnet 139
DECwindows 139
Degrees 17
Demonstartion programs 223
Devices 8, 128
ADM-3A Retrographics 8, 135
C.ITOH 328 8, 135
C.ITOH 467 135
CGM 131
CIT-467 8
DECwindows 139
Digital GIGI 134
EPS 131
EXCL 9, 129
Falco infinity series 8
GKS 130
GPOSTSCRIPT 131
HP7550 131
HP7580 131
HP7585 131
HPGL 132
IMAGEN 9
Kermit 8, 135
LA-100 9
LA-50 9
LCP01 131
LJ250 131
LJ250_180DPI 131
LN-03 9
LSI 7107 8, 135
LVP16A 131
LVP16B 131
METAFILE 131
POSTSCRIPT 9, 133
Printronix 9, 133
QMS-1200 9, 133
REGIS 9, 134
Selanar HiREZ 100XL 8, 135
Sixels 9
Talaris 1590 8, 9, 129, 135
TEEMTALK 8
Tek-4027 8
TEK4107 131
TEK4128 131
TEK4129 131
Tek4207 8, 131
Tekemulation 8
Tektronix 4010 8, 135
Tektronix 4207 135
Versatec 9, 139
VersaTerm 8
Visual 102 8, 135
VSXXX 131
VT-100 Retrographics 8, 135
VT-240 9, 134, 135
VT125 131
VT125BW 131
VT240 131
VT240BW 131
VT330 131
VT340 131
Xwindow
XWINDOWS 9, 139
Diamond 62
Digits 141, 205
DIRECTION 178, 179
DISTANCE 178, 180
DOTDASH 32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
DOTS 32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
DOUBLE 47
Drawing characters 23
ECHO 158
Efficiency curves 35, 64
Ellipse 66
ERASE 158
Error bars 16, 81, 102, 123, 161
error matrix 72, 76, 78, 193
ERRORS 36, 40, 65, 75, 90, 99, 103, 107, 196, 211
Example 182
EXPAND 46
Exponential fit 74
Fast Fourier Transformation 69
File
BENCH.TOP 221
Case of filename 159
COLORGRAPH.TOP 221
Data output 92, 93
FIT_TEST.TOP 221
FONT_TABLE.TOP 221
Histogram 147, 149
Input 6, 10, 143
Journal 11
Listing 11, 223
Logfile 223
Output 11
Plot output 128, 139
TD.OPT 236
TD3D.TOP 182, 221
TDINTRO.TOP 143, 221
TD_DEMO3.FOR 233, 234
TD_GROUP.OPT 236
Fourier series 73, 74
Frequency distribution 39
FUNNY 32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
Gaussian fit 74, 75
Global section 55, 59, 96, 98, 117, 118, 147, 151, 197, 236
Greek characters 21
Grids 103
HARDTEXTURE 159
Hardware characters 134, 160, 185, 207
HBOOK 13, 28, 147
Hewlett Packard Plotters 132
HISTOGRAM 4
Histograms 147
Hours 17, 167
input 16, 125, 142, 145
INSIDE 47
INTENSITY 32, 38, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 81, 90, 102, 122, 145, 153, 166,
170, 182, 183, 187, 227, 228
Internet 139
Inverse power series fit 73
JOIN 4
journaling 10, 11, 13, 143, 156, 159, 188, 193, 223
Key-pad 59
LABEL 45, 47
Labels 105, 123, 153, 167
Legendre polynomial fit 74
Lego plot 83
Lexicals 141, 174, 206, 217
LIMITED 41, 51, 76, 93, 95, 102, 107
Line texture 177
Line width 153, 187
LINEAR 167
Linking routine 223
Linking with global section 236
Listing 142, 159
LOG 95
LOGARITHMIC 46, 167
Logging 159
Logical
PLOT_DEVICE 8
PLOT_TERM 8, 234
LONG 105
MAGNIFY 172, 181
MARGINS 173
Markers 23
Mathematical characters 21
Merging several data sets. 95
MESH 37, 64, 99
Mesh data 26, 34, 45, 51, 82, 84, 85, 88, 106, 109, 112
Minutes 17, 167
MONITOR 39, 40, 42, 71, 72, 79, 95, 157, 159, 201
Months 17, 127, 167
NDU 101
NDV 101
NDW 101
NDX 17, 101, 119, 147, 161, 175, 202, 210, 217
NDY 17, 40, 101, 119, 147, 161, 175, 202, 210, 217
NDZ 17, 101, 119, 147, 161, 175, 202, 210, 217
Network connections 139
Nonlinear fits 74, 75, 77
NTUPLES 52, 54, 56, 94, 147, 150, 197
Option
FILL 33, 43, 63, 66, 82, 90, 144
HIDE 33, 83, 90
ORIGIN 178, 181
output 11, 128, 142
OUTSIDE 47
PARALLEL 47
PATTERNED 32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
Pen number 126, 164
PERMANENT 122, 123, 124, 126, 141, 145, 153, 155, 161, 162, 170, 176,
177, 179, 183, 184, 187
PERPENDICULAR 48
PHI 145, 156, 161, 174, 176, 178, 179, 180, 200, 210
PLOT 4
Plotting symbols 23
POINTS 95
Polynomial fit 73, 75
POWER 167
PRIMARY 45, 48
Projections 110
PROPORTIONAL Spacing 159
RADIUS 161, 165, 174, 175, 200, 210
RDIST 180
REDUCE 172, 181, 187
Revisions 166, 182, 237
ROOT 167
ROTATED 140, 173
RZ file 197
SCALE 155
Scatter plot 26, 88, 103, 108, 110, 238
SCRD 178, 180
SECONDARY 45, 48, 166
Seconds 17, 167
Segmentation 166
SEPARATION 178, 181
Separators
Set up 13
SETS 95
SHORT 105
SIDEWAYS 140, 173
Significant digits 141, 205
Sine fit 73
Slice 31, 34, 81, 84, 90, 92, 102, 111
SOLID 32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
SPACE 32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
SPLINE 90
Stereo plots 181
Subroutine 222
TDCASE 226
TDHIST 227
TDJOIN 228
TDLIMS 229
TDNEWP 229
TDPLOT 229
TDPLT 230
TDSET 230
TDSETS 231
TDSHOW 231
TDTEXT 231
TDTITL 232
TDTSET 232
TDVAX_PLOT 234
Subroutines 223
Substitution 53, 126, 184, 185, 186
Symbol 16, 17, 102, 145, 161, 170, 175, 176
TCP/IP 139
TEXT 172
Text frame 19
Texture 32, 38, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 81, 90, 102, 122, 145, 162, 166,
170, 177, 183
Theoretic special symbols 22
THETA 145, 156, 161, 165, 174, 175, 176, 178, 179, 180, 200, 210
Ticks 105, 123, 167, 169, 182
Time 17
Time scale 169
TITLE 159
TOPDRAWER_INIT 13
TRACE 160
UNITS 172, 186
User function fit 75
USER SCALE 169
VECTOR 160
Vector plot 110
VERTICAL 178, 181
Virtual memory 175
VLOG 41, 51, 76, 93, 107, 160
Windows 187
X 17
Xwindows 139
Y 17
Years 17, 127, 167
Z 17